Sie sind auf Seite 1von 350

#

75-4\5 /71,-
FlII 6.0 8L'8 IL The soltware described in this guide is lurnished under a
license agreement and may be used only in accordance
with the terms ol that agreement.
nlormation in this document is subject to change without
notice. Simulation Sciences nc. assumes no liability lor
any damage to any hardware or soltware comonent or any
loss ol data that may occur as a result ol the use ol the
inlormation contained in this manual.
6opyrIghI hoIIra Coyright 1OO7 Simulation Sciences nc. All Rights
Reserved. ho art ol this ublication may be coied and/or
distributed without the exress written ermission ol
Simulation Sciences nc., GO1 S. valencia Avenue, 8rea, CA
O2828, uSA.
Tradamarks FR0/ is a registered mark ol Simulation Sciences nc.
SMSC is a service mark ol Simulation Sciences nc.
windows is a trademark ol Microsolt Cororation.
Excel is a trademark ol Microsolt Cororation.
AutoCAB is a trademark ol AutoBesk, nc.
Frinted in the united States ol America.
Table of Contents
6kaler 1 uslag F/ll
Starting PRO/II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Compatibility with Previous Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
PRO/II Main Window Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Manipulating the PRO/II Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Working with On-Screen Color Coding Cues . . . . . . . . 1-6
Using the Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Using the Floating Palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Using the Toolbar Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Using the PRO/II Main Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
6kaler 2 5lmulallaa 8aslcs
General Approach. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Building the Flowsheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Required Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Default Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Optional Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
6kaler 3 Maaaglag FF Flles
Opening a New Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Opening an Existing Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Saving the Current Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Closing a Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Deleting a Simulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Copying a Simulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Importing a PRO/II Keyword Input File . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Exporting Simulation Data to a PRO/II Keyword File . . . 3-10
Using the Spreadsheet Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Exporting the Flowsheet Drawing to the Clipboard . . . . 3-12
Exporting Stream Property Table Data . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Copying Stream Property Table Data to the Clipboard. . . 3-13
Exporting the PFD to an AutoCAD or PostScript File . . . 3-13
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc Ta||c cf 0citcits
i
6kaler 4 8ullJlag a Flawskeel
Setting Simulation Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Placing a Unit on the Flowsheet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Drawing Streams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Searching for a Unit or Stream . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Changing the Flowsheet Layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Drawing Freehand Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
6kaler 5 Maalulallag hjecls
Selecting Objects or Groups of Objects . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Resizing an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Rearranging Objects or Groups of Objects. . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Editing Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
6kaler 5 vlewlag Flawskeel 6aaleals
Scrolling the PFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Zooming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Opening Multiple Viewport Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Redraw the Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Panning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6kaler 7 ala alry WlaJaws
Defining the Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Data Entry Windows for Unit Operations . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
6kaler 8 5ecllylag 6amaaeal, TkermaJyaamlc aaJ 5lream ala
Component Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Assay Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Thermodynamic Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Stream Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Refinery Inspection and User-defined Properties. . . . . . 8-34
BVLE (Validating Equilibrium Data) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
6kaler 9 uall erallaas aaJ ullllly MaJules
CALCULATOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
FORTRAN Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Sample Calculator Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
COLUMN, BATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
COLUMN, DISTILLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
COLUMN, LIQUID-LIQUID EXTRACTION . . . . . . 9-34
Ta||c cf 0citcits FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
ii
COLUMN, SIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
COMPRESSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42
CONTROLLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46
CRYSTALLIZER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48
CYCLONE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51
DEPRESSURING UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57
DISSOLVER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-62
EXPANDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-63
FLASH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-65
FLASH WITH SOLIDS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-69
FLOWSHEET OPTIMIZER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-70
HEAT EXCHANGER, LNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-75
HEAT EXCHANGER, RIGOROUS . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-77
HEAT EXCHANGER, SIMPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-85
HEATING/COOLING CURVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-89
MIXER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-93
MULTIVARIABLE CONTROLLER . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-94
PHASE ENVELOPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-97
PIPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-99
POLYMER REACTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-104
PROCEDURE DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-105
PUMP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-113
REACTION DATA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-114
REACTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-118
REACTOR, BATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-128
SOLID SEPARATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-129
SPLITTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-130
STREAM CALCULATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-132
SPEC/VARY/DEFINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-135
USER-ADDED UNIT OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . 9-151
ELECTROLYTE MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-157
SIMSCI ADD-ON MODULES. . . . . . . . . . . . 9-160
VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-163
WIPED FILM EVAPORATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-164
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc Ta||c cf 0citcits
iii
6kaler 10 uaalag aaJ vlewlag a Flawskeel
Using the Run Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Checking the Simulation Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Understanding the Unit Color Coding Cues . . . . . . . . 10-4
Running the Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Viewing Calculation History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Viewing Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Viewing Results in Stream Property Tables. . . . . . . . . 10-8
Running a Case Study . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
Viewing Case Study Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Running Files in Batch Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
6kaler 11 Frlallag aaJ Flalllag
Defining Output Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Generating a Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Viewing a Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Printing a Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Plotting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
The Plot Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Setting Up the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Printing a Flowsheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
6kaler 12 6uslamlzlag lke FF Warklace
Changing Unit Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Changing Stream Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
Modifying Drawing Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
Specifying a Default Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
Changing the Default Font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10
laJex
Ta||c cf 0citcits FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
iv
6kaler 1
uslag F/ll
This chapter describes how to start and exit PRO/II. In addition, it reviews
some basic Windows features as they appear in PRO/II and briefly
describes how to use them.
5larllag F/ll
If you have not yet installed PRO/II on your system, see the PRO/II
PC/LAN Installation Guide.
If you do not see a PRO/II icon in a SIMSCI group window or in your
Program/SIMSCI Start menu, see the troubleshooting section in the
PRO/II PC/LAN Installation Guide.
To start PRO/II:
Double-click on the PRO/II icon or launch from the Start menu.
The PRO/II welcome window appears. This window contains infor-
mation on opening files and on the color codes used in the program.
Figure 1-1: The PRO/II Welcome Window
Click OK to exit the window. The PRO/II main window will
appear.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 1 Lsii FFU/II
1-1
Figure 1-2: The PRO/II Main Window
You can now open a new simulation file (select File/New), open an
existing file (select File/Open), or import a keyword file (select
File/Import). See Chapter 3, Managing PFD Files, for additional
details.
6amallhlllly wllk Frevlaus verslaas
PRO/II v4.1/4.13/4.15/4.17 simulation files are not compatible with
this release of PRO/II. You must use the Simulation File Converter
program to convert these files. If you attempt to open one of these
simulation files before you have used the Simulation File Converter,
you will receive a message indicating that the file was created using the
wrong version of PRO/II and asking you to convert the files.
hale: Before using the file converter, make a copy of the database files
to be converted. Work only on the copies. In this way you will eliminate
any possibility of corrupting your original files.
To convert a PRO/II v4.1/4.13/4.15/4.17 simulation file:
Run the Simulation File Converter program (FILCVT.EXE) by
double-clicking on its icon in the SIMSCI program group (NT3.51)
or select Programs/Simsci/Simulation File Converter from the Start
menu (Win95/NT4.0).
0|aptcr 1 Lsii FFU/II FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
1-?
The original databases files have the extensions .PR0, PR1, .PR2, .PR3,
and .SFD. Some of these files may not exist for every problem
database. The file converter converts these files to the new database
structure used by the current release of PRO/II and replaces the old
.PR* files with new ones. These newly converted files are not
compatible with earlier versions of PRO/II.
As a safety measure, the Simulation File Converter also copies the
original database files and saves them with the extensions .SV0, .SV1,
.SV2, .SV3, and .SVS. These files are compatible with the earlier
version of PRO/II. However, before they can be used, their old exten-
sions must be restored to .PR0, PR1, .PR2, .PR3, and .SFD,
respectively.
hale: Some keyword input files that were created manually may include
features that are not supported by the PRO/II graphical user interface.
PRO/II issues a warning when this occurs. For flowsheet execution, all
features will be preserved if you choose either Read Only mode or Run
Batch mode . In all cases, if you subsequently export the problem, all
supported features will be lost. The exported file will not include any of
the unsupported features. Later import of the exported file will reveal
that the unsupported features are missing. It is always prudent to make
copies of your original files and to work only on copies of the original
files.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 1 Lsii FFU/II
1-3
F/ll Mala WlaJaw 6amaaeals
6omponanI asrrIpIIon
Controlmenu 8ox Bislays a menu with commands lor si/ing, moving and
closing the active window.
Title 8ar dentilies the alication and the name ol the oen lile, can be
used to move the entire window.
Minimi/e 8utton Reduces the alication window to an icon.
Maximi/e/Restore
8utton
Enlarges a window to lullscreen or restores it to its delault
si/e.
Menu 8ar dentilies the menus available in FR0/. |i|c, dit, Iip0t,
U0tp0t, Tcc|s, Lraw, Vicw, Upticis, Wiidcw and |c|p.
Toolbar Frovides ushbutton access to various dit, Iip0t, Tcc|s, Vicw,
Wiidcw, and |c|p otions
FFB Main window Frovides a worksace lor lacing units, making stream
connections, drawing objects, and adding text.
hori/ontal Scroll 8ar Functions as a sliding scale lor moving the llowsheet right or
lelt in the FR0/ main window.
vertical Scroll 8ar Functions as a sliding scale lor moving the llowsheet u or
down in the FR0/ main window.
Status 8ar Bislays hel, inlormation and error messages lor the active
leature or object.
8order handles Changes window height, width, or si/e when the corresond
ing border handle is dragged to a new osition.
0|aptcr 1 Lsii FFU/II FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
1-4
Maalulallag lke F/ll WlaJaw
The PRO/II window offers many features that enable you to customize
its appearance relative to the full screen and other applications.
Detailed instructions on the use of the Windows graphical user
interface may be found in numerous reference manuals available at any
larger bookstore.
6hangIng WIndoW8Ita
The Windows interface provides tools for resizing each window. Some
tools automatically change a window to a particular size and orienta-
tion, others enable you to control the magnification.
sIng MInImItalMaxImIta 8uIIons
The minimize and maximize buttons automatically adjust the size of a
window.
sIng 8ordar handIas
You can use the window border to change the size of the main window. The
border works like a handle that you can grab with the cursor and drag to a
new position.
sIng Iha 6onIroI Manu
You can also use the Control menu to Restore, Move, Size, Minimize, or
Maximize a window. Open the Control menu by clicking on the PRO/II
icon at the far left of the title bar or by pressing the <Alt+Space>.
6hangIng WIndoWFosIIIon
You can change the position of the main window (or any pop-up
window) by dragging the title bar.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 1 Lsii FFU/II
1-5
Warklag wllk a-5creea 6alar 6aJlag 6ues
PRO/II provides the standard visual cue (grayed out text and icons) for
menu items and toolbar buttons that are currently unavailable. In
addition, PRO/II uses colored borders liberally to indicate the current
status of the simulation. You may customize the color coding by
accessing the Set Colors window by selecting Options/Colors from
the menu bar.
FlII n8rraan 6oIor 6odas
6oIor 8IgnIIIranra
Red Required data. Actions or data required ol the user.
0reen 0tional, or delault data.
8lue Bata sulied by user.
Yellow 0uestionable data. A warning that the value sulied
by user is outside the normal range.
0ray Bata lield not available to user.
8lack Bata entry not required.
uslag lke Meaus
The names of the PRO/II main menus appear on the menu bar. Use
these menus to access most PRO/II operations.
0|aptcr 1 Lsii FFU/II FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
1-6
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 1 Lsii FFU/II
1-7
|i0rc 1-4: dit Mci0 |i0rc 1-3: |i|c Mci0
|i0rc 1-5: Iip0t Mci0
|i0rc 1-7: Tcc|s Mci0
|i0rc 1-6: U0tp0t Mci0
0|aptcr 1 Lsii FFU/II FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
1-8
|i0rc 1-8: Lraw Mci0 |i0rc 1-9: Vicw Mci0
|i0rc 1-11: Wiidcw Mci0
|i0rc 1-1?: |c|p Mci0
|i0rc 1-10: Upticis Mci0
uslag lke Flaallag Falelles
There are two floating palettes. The first contains the unit operations
and streams needed to construct a flowsheet. The second contains
controls used to run the simulation. These palettes may be displayed or
hidden by selecting View/Palettes from the menu bar.
Menu tem Bescrition
view/Falettes/FFB Checking this otion dislays the FFB alette
containing unit oerations and streams (also
known as the Streams/unit alette).
view/Falettes/Run Allows running the simulation and viewing
results.
uslag lke Taalhar 8ullaas
The main toolbar can be displayed in standard (full) or compact format.
When displayed in standard format (View/Toolbar/Standard from the
menu bar), seven groups of buttons are visible. Toolbar buttons
duplicate options available from the menus on the menu bar.
G Multiple View and PFD Palette buttons
G Data Entry Window buttons
G Go To buttons
G VLE Tool buttons
G Run/Results buttons
G Delete and View buttons
G Help button
sIng Iha MuIIIpIa VIaWand FF FaIaIIa 8uIIons
These buttons enable you to open multiple views of a single flowsheet
and hide or display the floating PFD palette.
8utton Menu tem Bescrition
view/hew view 0ens another viewort window ol a
single simulation roblem.
view/Falette/FFB Bislays or hides the lloating FFB alette.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 1 Lsii FFU/II
1-9
sIng Iha aIa LnIry WIndoW8uIIons
Each Data Entry Window button provides quick access to the main data
entry window for the selected section of input.
8uIIon Manu IIam asrrIpIIon
nut/Froblem Bescrition Bescribes the current simulation and
relates it to a secilic roject.
nut/units ol Measure Sets units ol measure secilic to this
simulation. Each new simulation
extracts delaults lrom the delault unit
ol Measure Set.
nut/Comonent
Selection
Secilies the comonents and
seudocomonents lor the current
simulation.
nut/Comonent
Froerties
Sulies comonent roerties.
nut/Thermodynamic
Bata
Selects thermodynamic methods lor
the current simulation.
nut/Assay
Characteri/ation
Modilies T8F cutoints and charac
teri/ation otions lor generating seu
docomonents lrom Assay streams.
nut/Reaction Bata Belines reactions and rovides heat ol
reaction, equilibrium, or kinetic data
lor reaction sets.
nut/Frocedure Bata use this window to create or delete
Frocedure blocks in order to calculate
kinetic reaction rates.
nut/Casestudy Bata Allows user to erlorm studies on a
base case solution by altering arame
ters and rerunning.
nut/Calculation
Sequence
Secilies a userdelined calculation
sequence.
nut/Recycle
Convergence
Secilies userdelined recycle conver
gence and acceleration otions.
0|aptcr 1 Lsii FFU/II FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
1-10
sIng o To 8uIIons
The Go To buttons enable you to jump to a selected unit or stream. PRO/II
repositions the flowsheet to place the selected unit or stream at the center
of the main window. The Stream List and Unit List (Go To) windows
also allow direct data entry and review of output results for the selected
stream or unit.
8uIIon Manu IIam asrrIpIIon
view/Fan view Allows quick anning through the entire
llowsheet.
view/unit List Bislays a list ol units in the current
llowsheet. 8y selecting a name, you
can jum directly to that unit.
view/Stream List Bislays a list ol streams in the current
llowsheet. 8y selecting a name, you can
jum directly to that stream.
sIng VLL TooIs 8uIIons
The VLE Tools buttons enable you to perform simulation functions,
e.g., flash a stream highlighted on the PFD using the Flash Hot-key.
8uIIon Manu IIam asrrIpIIon
Tools/Flash Stream Flashes the stream highlighted on the
FFB. (Also called the ||as| |ct-kcy.)
Tools/8inary vLE 0enerates lots and tables ol Kvalues
and lugacity coellicients lor binary airs
ol comonents.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 1 Lsii FFU/II
1-11
sIng unlasuIIs 8uIIons
The Run/Results buttons duplicate functions on the Run Simulation
floating palette. They allow you to run or stop a simulation, or permit
viewing of results and generating of output reports. The Generate
Output button duplicates an Output menu item.
8uIIon Manu IIam asrrIpIIon
-- Runs the simulation
-- Stos the simulation.
-- Allows results lor the selected
stream or unit to be viewed.
0utut/0enerate
Reort
0enerates an outut reort lor the
simulation roblem.
sIng aIaIa and VIaW8uIIons
PRO/II provides a Delete button and a set of View buttons on the
toolbar that facilitate editing and viewing of the flowsheet. These
buttons duplicate items available on the Edit and View menus.
8uIIon Manu IIam asrrIpIIon
Edit/Belete cr
Belete>
Beletes the currently selected
object(s) lrom the llowsheet.
view/Zoom/
Zoom n, Zoom 0ut
Zooms in or out ol the llowsheet.
view/Zoom/
Zoom Full cr home>
Bislays the entire llowsheet in the
FFB window.
view/ Zoom/
Zoom Area
Bislays the selection rectangle used
to select a set ol units, streams or
objects on the llowsheet. The selected
area lills the FFB.
view/Zoom/
Redraw cr Shilt+home>
Clears the FFB ol any extraneous
object by redrawing the llowsheet.
0|aptcr 1 Lsii FFU/II FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
1-1?
sIng Iha haIp 8uIIon
The What Is? Help Button displays context-sensitive help.
8uIIon Manu IIam asrrIpIIon
what s? Bislays hel lor the object you oint
to.
uslag lke F/ll Mala WlaJaw
The PRO/II main window (PFD) is the main drawing board. On the PFD you
may place the following objects:
G Unit operations from the PFD palette
G Stream connections
G Text
G Drawings
G Stream property tables
Use the PRO/II main window to see the contents of your simulation.
You can choose to view the entire flowsheet or only a portion of it. You
control the view using scroll bars, pan options, the zoom bar, or arrow
keys.
hale: See Chapter 5, Manipulating Objects, for information about
placing, selecting and changing the size of objects in the PFD.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 1 Lsii FFU/II
1-13
This page intentionally left blank.
0|aptcr 1 Lsii FFU/II FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
1-14
6kaler 2
5lmulallaa 8aslcs
In the previous chapter, you learned some of the basic window features of
PRO/II. In this chapter you will learn simulation basics; that is, how to set up
simulation problems, solve them, and analyze the results.
eaeral Araack
This chapter provides a quick overview of the use of PRO/II for solving
engineering problems. A suggested basic approach is given, as well as
helpful explanations of the information flow in PRO/II. Sample data
entry windows are given to illustrate data entry for PRO/II. Step-by-
step examples are available in the PRO/II Tutorial Guide. Online help is
also available.
You have already learned that PRO/II gives you great flexibility and
many options when supplying simulation data. For many items of data,
default values are supplied. A color code informs you when data are
required, supplied by default, out of normal ranges, or missing.
hale: You must supply data for all red-bordered fields or red linked text
(including data required) before running your simulation.
Problem data may be supplied in almost any order: PRO/II warns you
when required data are missing. However, it is still best to follow a
logical path when supplying simulation data. For example, some
options such as stream compositions are dependent upon the compo-
nents selected. Some unit operations, such as the flash drum, have
features that are dependent on the thermodynamic data. For some other
unit operations, performance specifications based on the components in
the system are the preferred way to define the operation.
For these reasons, the following approach is recommended when
building a simulation flowsheet:
raWIha FIoWshaaI
Select the unit operations needed for the flowsheet calculations and
position them on the PRO/II PFD main window.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr ? 5im0|atici 8asics
?-1
6onnarI Iha nII paraIIons WIIh 8Iraams
The streams are the connectors for the process calculations, with infor-
mation passed from one unit operation to another via the process
streams.
aIIna Iha 6omponanIs In Your 8ysIam
It is best to order the components in volatility order, starting with the
lightest component. This makes it easy to analyze the separations
which occur in unit operations such as distillation. While not a
necessity, for hydrocarbon/water systems, defining water as the first
component is also a good idea. This makes it easy to see the break
between the aqueous and non-aqueous phases. User-defined petroleum
pseudocomponents and/or polymer components for which you supply
data should be entered next. Petroleum pseudocomponents generated
by PRO/II from petroleum stream assay data will appear last in the
component lists of the output reports.
8aIarI Iha TharmodynamIr and TransporI FroparIy MaIhods
For many problems, a system may be selected from the Most Commonly
Used thermodynamic methods. Guidelines for thermodynamic methods
are provided in the PRO/II online help, and in the PRO/II Reference
Manual (both in online help and in hardcopy forms). Further assistance
is available through SIMSCI Technical Support. Selecting a proper
thermodynamic method is a critically important step in the solution of a
simulation problem.
8uppIy aIa Ior Iha Faad 8Iraams and aryrIa 8Iraams
You must supply thermal conditions, flowrates, and compositions for
all external feed streams to the flowsheet. It is usually desirable,
although not necessary, to provide estimated data for recycle streams to
speed convergence of recycle calculations.
8uppIy paraIIng 6ondIIIons Ior Iha nII paraIIons
Double-click the icon for each unit operation to access the data entry
windows. The color codes tell you what data you must supply and what
data have default values. You may also use the online help to learn more
about the calculation options, data entry items, etc., for each unit operation.
A quick review is also a good idea at this point. Do the thermodynamic
methods support the unit operation calculations? Are transport proper-
ties required for any of the unit operations?
0|aptcr ? 5im0|atici 8asics FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
?-?
un Iha Frorass 8ImuIaIIon
PRO/II lets you know by color code when sufficient information has
been supplied to perform the calculations. When all of the borders on
the toolbar icons have changed from red (indicating missing data) to
green or blue, you are ready to run your simulation. At this point, you
may click the Run (right arrow) icon on the toolbar or the Run button
on the floating Run palette to begin the flowsheet calculations.
knaIyta Iha 8ImuIaIIon asuIIs
Use the many convenient report and plotting features of PRO/II to
analyze the simulation results. At this point, your training as an
engineer should take charge. Are the results reasonable? How do the
results compare with the plant data? Can differences be reconciled?
Are better data for the feedstocks needed? Are the models adequate for
the intended purposes?
Now that we have presented an overall plan for simulating a flowsheet,
lets look at some of the individual steps in more detail.
8ullJlag lke Flawskeel
nII paraIIons
Use the floating PFD palette to begin building the flowsheet. The icons
and names for the unit operations appear as buttons on the PFD palette.
To add a unit operation to the flowsheet, click the unit icon on the PFD
palette and click-drop it at the desired location on the flowsheet.
8Iraams
Click the Streams button on the top of the floating PFD palette. The
PFD is now in stream mode and a small S is attached to the cursor.
You will notice that all possible exit ports for each unit operation are
now marked. Required outlet ports are colored in red; green is used to
mark optional ports. PRO/II adds each stream to the flowsheet in an
orthogonal manner, following a rectangular grid pattern.
As soon as a valid flowsheet has been built, i.e., all required inlet, outlet,
and connector streams have been added for all the process units, the red
border around the Streams button on the PFD palette changes to blue.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr ? 5im0|atici 8asics
?-3
equlreJ ala
Now that the flowsheet has been built, its time to supply the required
data for the calculations: the components and thermodynamic methods
must be defined, inlet feed streams and, optionally, recycle streams
must be supplied, and the operating conditions for the unit operations
must be specified.
6omponanIs
To define the components, select Input/Component Selection from the
menu bar or click on the benzene ring toolbar icon to open the
Component Selection main window. Note that this icon has a red
border, indicating that components have not yet been defined.
Library components for which the library access names are known may
be directly typed into this window, where they are transferred to the
List of Selected Components for the problem. A convenient search
procedure is also provided which may be used by clicking the Select
from Lists... button. Petroleum (PETRO) components are defined in the
Petroleum Components window which is reached by clicking the
Petroleum... button. Non-library components can be defined in the
User-defined window which is reached by clicking the User-defined...
button.
Note that petroleum pseudocomponents defined by PRO/II from
petroleum stream assay data do not appear in the Component Selection
main window.
TharmodynamIr MaIhods
Thermodynamic methods are defined in the Thermodynamic Data main
window which is reached by selecting Input/Thermodynamic Data from
the menu bar or by clicking on the phase diagram icon. Note that this icon
is initially outlined in red, indicating that thermodynamic methods must be
defined for the problem.
For most problems, a predefined set of thermodynamic methods for
calculating K-values, enthalpies, entropies, and densities may be used.
PRO/II offers numerous Categories of method sets. After a category has
been selected, you may select a method set within that category as a
Defined System for the problem and modify it by clicking the Modify...
button to access the Thermodynamic System-Modification window. Note
that transport property calculations are not included in the predefined method
sets. If they are required for the problem, you must add them to the prede-
fined thermodynamic method set in this window.
0|aptcr ? 5im0|atici 8asics FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
?-4
8IraamInIormaIIon
The identifiers for feed streams requiring input data are marked with
red borders indicating that information is missing. Stream information is
supplied in the Stream Data main data entry window which is reached by
double-clicking a stream identifier. The predefined stream identifier may
also be changed in this window.
Three types of information must be supplied in this window: the thermal
condition of the stream, the flowrate for the stream, and the composition of
the stream. For petroleum assay streams, the assay data are provided
instead of the composition data, and PRO/II defines the stream composition
for you in terms of petroleum pseudocomponents.
Although optional, it is good practice to provide reasonable estimates for
recycle tear streams in order to accelerate convergence of problem recycle
calculations.
nII paraIIons
Unit operation identifiers for which data entries are needed are marked
with red borders. To enter information for a unit operation, double-
click its icon to retrieve the Unit data entry window. Various input
options and numeric values are supplied via this parent window and its
child windows. Required information is always bordered in red; data
entry fields for items with supplied defaults are always bordered in
green. After you have supplied information in a data entry field, the
border color changes to blue. Information you have supplied which lies
outside the normal range for the field is marked with a yellow border.
You may also change the default unit identifier in this window and
furnish a longer, more descriptive name for the unit operation. Notice
that when you return to the flowsheet, the unit identifier on the PFD has
a black instead of red border, signifying that all data entry requirements
are satisfied. If the border is still red, you must return to the data entry
window for the unit operation and supply the missing data.
MIsraIIanaous aIa
All data entries in this category are optional. PRO/II provides default
entries. In some cases global values may be used to supply the
defaults, as explained in Chapter 4, Building a Flowsheet.
Miscellaneous data categories include problem descriptive information,
the calculation sequence, recycle convergence options, flowsheet toler-
ances, and the scaling of product streams.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr ? 5im0|atici 8asics
?-5
Problem descriptive information is optional; however, it can be benefi-
cial to document a simulation model for future users. This information
includes a project name, problem name, user name, date, site, and
problem description. This information is supplied in the Problem
Descriptive Information window, which is accessed by clicking the
toolbar icon with the printed page icon or by selecting Input/Problem
Description from the menu bar.
For most problems, the calculation order determined by PRO/II is satis-
factory. To supply your own sequence, click the toolbar icon with the
two connected flowsheet blocks or select the Input/Calculation
Sequence from the menu bar.
Definitions of recycle loops are automatic. To define your own loops, or
to use acceleration techniques, click the toolbar icon with the flowsheet
loop icon to enter the Problem Recycle Convergence and Acceleration
Options window or select the Input/Recycle Convergence from the
menu bar.
Flowsheet tolerances are used for convergence of unit operation specifi-
cations and may be changed in the Default Unit Specification Toler-
ances window, which is reached by choosing Input/Flowsheet
Tolerances from the menu bar.
All flowsheet results may be scaled so that a desired flow is obtained
for a product stream. To use the scaling feature, select the
Output/Report Format/Miscellaneous Data. Click the Product Stream
Scaling... button on the Miscellaneous Report Options window to
access the Scale Stream Flowrate window.
elaull ala
To simplify data input, PRO/II supplies default options and values
wherever practical. Default values supplied by PRO/II are printed in black
in a data entry field with a green border, or in the case of linked text, in
green. For example, the default number of iterations for a column unit
operation using the IO method is supplied as 15. Entries which you must
always supply are indicated with a color red because they have no
default values.
While you do not need to replace a default entry to satisfy the input
requirement for PRO/II, default data should be inspected carefully to
ascertain that they meet your requirements. When you replace a default
value, the border color for the data entry field changes to blue, indi-
cating that you have supplied this value. For linked-text strings, the
0|aptcr ? 5im0|atici 8asics FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
?-6
color of the linked text is also changed to blue, indicating that you have
replaced the default value.
llaaal ala
Optional data, which are displayed in black, are data or options not
specifically necessary for the unit operations to proceed. For example,
the Description entry is optional for all unit operations. A reboiler is
optional for the Column unit operation, since the calculation require-
ments may also be satisfied by a vapor feed to the bottom tray of the
column.
Data options which do not apply to a particular combination of input
data appear in the color gray, and are not available for data entry. For
example, when the kettle reboiler option is selected for a column
reboiler, the data entry fields for a thermosiphon reboiler are colored
gray.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr ? 5im0|atici 8asics
?-7
This page intentionally left blank.
0|aptcr ? 5im0|atici 8asics FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
?-8
6kaler 3
Maaaglag FF Flles
This chapter describes how to open, save, close, delete and copy simulation
files. In addition, this chapter outlines how to import a PRO/II keyword
input file or export a flowsheet.
ealag a hew 5lmulallaa
When you start PRO/II, the program does not automatically bring up a
new, untitled simulation.
hale: If you want PRO/II always to open with a new simulation, select
Options/New File on Startup from the menu bar.
To open a new simulation:
Choose File/New. . . from the menu bar. PRO/II clears the main
window for a new simulation and opens the initial viewport
window, View 1.
Figure 3-1: PRO/II Main Window
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 3 Maiaii F|L |i|cs
3-1
ealag aa xlsllag 5lmulallaa
You can open any previously saved simulation for modification, viewing or
printing. PRO/II opens the flowsheet file and its supporting PRO/II
database files.
To open an existing simulation:
Choose File/Open... from the menu bar. PRO/II displays the Open
Simulation window.
Figure 3-2: Open Simulation Window
Type or select the name of the simulation file.
Choose OK or press <Enter>. PRO/II displays the simulation in
the PFD main window.
hale: PRO/II 5.x provides a file converter for import of PRO/II 4.x files
with the exception of Add-On Module files.
5avlag lke 6urreal 5lmulallaa
Before you close a simulation, you should save it. You may also want to
save the simulation periodically while creating it.
To save the current simulation:
Choose File/Save from the menu bar. If you have not previously
saved this simulation, PRO/II displays the Save As window.
hale: PRO/II 5.x automatically compresses the three PRO/II database
files (*.pr1, *.pr2, *.pr3) and the simulation flow diagram file (*.sfd)
into a single *.prz file. Beside reducing the size of stored files, PRO/II
0|aptcr 3 Maiaii F|L |i|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
3-?
file compression assures that a complete set of files for each simulation
has been saved.
Figure 3-3: Save As Dialog
Type a name for this simulation.
Choose OK or press <Enter>.
hale: The PRO/II Autosave functionality automatically creates a backup
file at user-specified intervals from which recovery can be made. If you
close or exit the simulation without saving, this backup file is deleted.
Select Options/Simulation Defaults/Autosave from the menu bar to
access the Autosave Options window.
8avIng a 8ImuIaIIon Io knoIhar hama
You can save a simulation to another name. Changes you made to the
simulation since the last save are saved as part of the simulation under
its new name.
hale: If youve made changes to a simulation and dont want to alter
the original simulation, but do want to keep the changes, use Save As.
To save the current simulation to another file name:
Choose File/Save As... from the menu bar.
PRO/II prompts you for a new file name.
Type a name for the simulation.
Choose OK or press <Enter>.
PRO/II appends a .PRZ extension to the filename.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 3 Maiaii F|L |i|cs
3-3
6laslag a 5lmulallaa
You should save a simulation before closing it, although PRO/II will
prompt you to save changes for an existing simulation.
To close a simulation:
Choose File/Close from the menu bar.
If you close a simulation without first saving the simulation files, you
lose any changes you made to the simulation since the last save.
elellag a 5lmulallaa
You can delete any simulation except the current (active) simulation at
any time.
To delete a simulation file:
Choose File/Delete... from the menu bar. PRO/II displays a list of
existing PRO/II simulation files.
Figure 3-4: List of Files
Type or select the name of the file you want to delete. (You may
not delete the current simulation.)
Choose OK or press <Enter>. PRO/II deletes all files associated
with this simulation.
0|aptcr 3 Maiaii F|L |i|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
3-4
6aylag a 5lmulallaa
You can copy all files associated with a simulation (one flowsheet and three
database files) to a target simulation you name. You can copy to new or
existing file. If you copy to an existing file, PRO/II verifies if you want to
overwrite the existing file.
To copy a simulation file:
Choose File/Copy... from the menu bar.
Figure 3-5: Copying Files
Select the name of the file you want to copy from the file selector.
(You may not copy the current simulation.)
Enter a name for the copy (target).
Chose OK or press <Enter>.
PRO/II copies all files associated with the simulation.
hale: There may be as many as 17 separate files associated with a
single simulation problem. These are described in Table 3-1.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 3 Maiaii F|L |i|cs
3-5
TabIa 81. FlII 8ImuIaIIon FIIas
FIIa LxIansIon asrrIpIIon
`.r1, `.r2, `.r8 FR0/ database liles
`.sld 0rahics lile
`.r/ Comressed liles containing `.r1, `.r2, `.r8 and
`.sld liles.
`.out Main outut lile
`.ot1 Comonent, calculation sequence, recycle
loos/streams outut data
`.ot8 Equiment/streams outut data
`.sr1 nut source listing
`.ix8 0utut index
`.hs2 Calculation history
`.in Keyword inut lile
`.lt Flots saved in the lot dislay window
`.txt Stream roerty table
or lot (saved in ASC lormat)
`.csv Stream roerty table
or lot (saved in tabular lormat)
`.cl 0rahics saved in Cliboard lormat
`.rc Temorary rocedure lile created and removed by
FR0/. 0nly remains il there is an abnormal termina
tion.
0|aptcr 3 Maiaii F|L |i|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
3-6
lmarllag a F/ll keywarJ laul Flle
You can import an existing PRO/II keyword input file into the PRO/II
graphical user interface and then execute the simulation problem just as
if you had entered the problem using the PFD graphical main window.
PRO/II automatically converts the specified keyword input file into a
flowsheet and displays it in the PFD window.
To import a PRO/II keyword input file:
Choosing File/Import from the menu bar.
PRO/II displays a list of existing keyword input files.
Figure 3-6: List of Files
Type or select the name of the keyword file that you want to im-
port.
Choose OK or press <Enter>.
PRO/II converts the selected keyword input file into a flowsheet and
displays it in the PFD main window automatically.
kayWordFaaIuras WIIhouI FlII I supporI
The RESTART feature is not supported by the graphical user interface
in this version of PRO/II. You will not be allowed to import keyword
files that contain this feature.
If a RESTART keyword is detected upon import, you will be reminded
that only the Run Batch feature of PRO/II may be used with these
keyword input files. See Chapter 10, Running and Viewing a
Flowsheet, for information on running keyword files in Batch mode.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 3 Maiaii F|L |i|cs
3-7
kayWord FaaIuras IhaI ran ba ImporIad InIo FlII In "unnIy Moda
Certain keyword features are not fully supported by the graphical user
interface of PRO/II. However, if one of these unsupported features is
detected, you will be allowed to import the keyword file, however the
GUI interface will operate in the Run-Only mode. Such unsupported
keywords include:
G BVLE Data
G Stream Report Writer
G Hydrate Unit Operation
G HEXTRAN Property Data Generator.
If you attempt to import a keyword input file that contains PRO/II
program features not supported by the graphical user interface, the
unsupported features will be automatically listed in a status window.
You have the option to save or delete the unsupported features. If you
choose to save the unsupported features, PRO/II will run the file in
Run-Only Mode.
la "ua-aly maJe, yau caa:
G Review and modify the PFD graphic image. You may move
unit operation icons and streams around to improve the appear-
ance of your PFD.
G Add drawing elements to the PFD.
G Add stream property tables to the PFD.
G Have access to all the capabilities on the Run palette (perform
all interactive execution functions available on the Run palette
for both supported/unsupported units, review the calculated
results on the PFD for all streams and supported/unsupported
units, generate output reports for all features, generate plots for
supported features only).
G Export the flowsheet and stream property table information to
other Windows applications.
G Edit the keyword file, reimport, and rerun (without leaving
PRO/II).
G Use the stream flash icon.
la "ua-aly maJe, yau caaaal:
G View simulation data with the data entry windows. This
includes Component and Thermodynamic data. Double-
clicking on a unit operation or stream will cause a short
warning message to be displayed.
0|aptcr 3 Maiaii F|L |i|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
3-8
G Perform any input mode functions, including changing the
calculation sequence. All buttons and menu options that access
simulation data will be disabled.
G Perform any of the following functions: adding/deleting units,
adding/deleting streams, and reconnecting streams.
G Export the PRO/II keyword input file.
If you attempt to import a keyword containing an unsupported feature,
the following message window will be displayed:
Figure 3-7: Unsupported Features Warning Window
If you click Yes , a message window similar to the following will be
displayed:
Figure 3-8: Flowsheet Status Window for Unsupported Features
Once you close the message window, the interface will be placed to the
Run-Only mode as illustrated in Figure 3-9.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 3 Maiaii F|L |i|cs
3-9
Figure 3-9: PRO/II in Run-only Mode
Click the Run button on the Run palette.
Once the flowsheet has been solved, you may double-click a unit or
stream to view the results.
xarllag 5lmulallaa ala la a F/ll keywarJ Flle
You can export an existing PRO/II simulation flowsheet to a keyword
input file as follows:
Choose File/Export from the menu bar. PRO/II displays the Export
window which lists the data export options.
0|aptcr 3 Maiaii F|L |i|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
3-10
Figure 3-10: Available Data Export Options
Choose the Simulation Data to Keyword File option.
Click the OK button.
PRO/II converts the current simulation flowsheet data into a PRO/II
keyword input file in ASCII format. The name of the keyword file will
be YYY.INP, where YYY.PR1 is the name of the simulation flowsheet
PRO/II database file.
uslag lke 5reaJskeel Taals
The Tools/Spreadsheet menu item can be used to start a spreadsheet
tool. The list of currently installed tools will appear in a side menu.
Spreadsheet tools are Excel template files and macros that can read
information in the PRO/II simulation database to generate reports or
perform additional on-the-spot calculations. They can also update data
in the simulation database itself using data from an Excel spreadsheet.
hale: You must have Microsoft Excel installed on your system to use
these tools.
PRO/II comes preinstalled with some default spreadsheet tools. They
can be used to create tables of stream properties or component
flowrates or generate a distillation report.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 3 Maiaii F|L |i|cs
3-11
xarllag lke Flawskeel rawlag la lke 6llhaarJ
You can export part or all of the flowsheet drawing to the Clipboard.
You can then paste this drawing into other Windows applications.
To export the entire flowsheet drawing to the Clipboard:
Choose File/Export from the menu bar. PRO/II displays the Export
window (Figure 3-10).
Choose the Flowsheet Drawing option.
Click the OK button.
To export one page of the flowsheet to the Clipboard:
Select the page to export by clicking on its edge on the PFD.
Choose File/Export from the menu bar. PRO/II displays the Export
window (Figure 3-10).
Choose the Selected Page of Flowsheet Drawing option.
Click the OK button.
xarllag 5lream Fraerly Tahle ala
You can export the information in a stream property table to an ASCII
file for import into spreadsheet and word processing applications.
To export data from a stream property table:
Select the stream property table to export on the PFD.
Choose File/Export from the menu bar. PRO/II displays the Export
window (Figure 3-10).
Choose the Stream Property Table option.
Click the OK button. The Export File Filter window will be
displayed (see Figure 3-11).
Enter a name for the Output File.
Select the desired file format (tab-delimited or comma-delimited)
from the Save File as Type drop-down list box.
Click the OK button.
0|aptcr 3 Maiaii F|L |i|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
3-1?
Figure 3-11: Export File Filter Window
PRO/II then generates the ASCII file. To import this file into your
spreadsheet or word processing program, follow the instructions
included with that application.
6aylag 5lream Fraerly Tahle ala la lke 6llhaarJ
You can copy the information in a stream property table to the
clipboard. This table can then be pasted into any other Windows
application.
To copy a stream property table to the Clipboard:
Select the stream property table on the PFD.
Choose Edit/Copy from the menu bar.
xarllag lke FF la aa Aula6A ar Fasl5crll Flle
You can export your flowsheet drawing as an AutoCAD .DXF or
Encapsulated PostScript (.EPS) file:
Choose File/Export from the menu bar. PRO/II displays the Export
window (Figure 3-10).
Choose the Flowsheet to AutoCAD .DXF or Flowsheet to Post-
Script option.
Click the OK button. The Save As window appears.
Enter a name for the .DXF or .EPS file.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 3 Maiaii F|L |i|cs
3-13
This page intentionally left blank.
0|aptcr 3 Maiaii F|L |i|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
3-14
6kaler 4
8ullJlag a Flawskeel
This chapter describes how to construct a flowsheet. It begins by
describing the various defaults that may apply to your simulation on a
global, simulation, or unit level. This chapter also includes instructions
for placing unit operations, connecting units, and drawing objects that
enhance the presentation of your flowsheet without affecting
calculations.
5elllag 5lmulallaa Frelereaces
PRO/II enables you to set global defaults for problem descriptions
information, units of measure and thermodynamic systems. These
global defaults apply to all simulations unless you specifically override
them either for a particular simulation or unit operation.
On a simulation level, you can set problem-specific input and output
units of measure defaults. Simulation level settings override global
defaults. In addition, you can change units of measure settings for a
specific unit. This setting overrides both simulation and global defaults.
8aIIIng FrobIamasrrIpIIon IobaI aIauIIs
The Problem Description Information (Project Identifier, Problem Iden-
tifier, User Name, Date, Site) appears on each page of a results printout
as a heading and the Problem Description itself appears on the first
page. All simulations use the global problem descriptive information
unless you override the defaults for a particular simulation.
To set problem description global defaults:
Choose Options/Simulation Defaults from the menu bar.
Choose Problem Description. The Global Default for Problem
Descriptive Information window appears.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 4 80i|dii a ||cws|cct
4-1
Figure 4-1: Global Default for Problem Descriptive Information
Complete the window.
Click OK .
varrIdIng Iha IobaI aIauII FrobIamasrrIpIIon
Before laying down your flowsheet, you may want to update the
problem description for the current simulation. PRO/II uses the global
defaults for all simulations, unless you specifically override the data for
a particular simulation.
To override the global default problem definition:
Click on the Problem Description icon or choose Input/Problem
Description from the menu bar. The Problem Descriptive Informa-
tion window appears.
You can enter up to ten problem description lines (80 characters each),
that will appear on the first page of a results printout.
0|aptcr 4 80i|dii a ||cws|cct FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
4-?
8aIIIng nIIs oI Maasura IobaI aIauIIs
By default, PRO/II uses the English units of measure set for all input data
and for output reports. These defaults apply to all new simulations. You can
override the default set for either input data or output reports (or both) for
all new simulations. PRO/II maintains a library of units of measure sets
that you can select from and add to.
To set the unit of measure global defaults:
Choose Simulation Defaults from the Options menu.
Choose Units of Measure. The Default Sets of Units of Measure
window appears.
Figure 4-2: Global Units of Measure Sets
Select the desired default units of measure set for entering simula-
tion data. The default choice is ENGLISH-SET1, i.e., the data input
will be in English units.
Select the desired default units of measure set for generating the
first output report. The default choice is Same as Input, i.e., the first
output report will be printed in the default English units.
If any choice other than the default is selected, the second output report
will no longer be available, and the list-box for selecting the alternate
units of measure set for the second output report will be disabled.
Select the desired default units of measure set for generating the second
output report. The default choice is None, i.e., no second output report
in alternate units will be generated.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 4 80i|dii a ||cws|cct
4-3
8aIIIng nIIs oI Maasura 8ImuIaIIon aIauIIs
PRO/II sets English units as the default for units of measure. You can
override this default, setting the global units of measure for all new
simulations. In addition, you can override the default units of measure
for a particular simulation problem.
To set the units of measure for the current simulation:
Click on the Input Units of Measure icon or choose Input/Units of
Measure from the menu bar. The Default Units of Measure for
Problem Data Input window appears.
Figure 4-3: Default Units of Measure for Problem Data Input Window
Select different dimensional units for data input for each individual
category or choose Initialize from UOM Library... to automatically
fill in the defaults from another set.
Click on the Standard Vapor Conditions... button to enter the
Problem Standard Vapor Condition window. The default tempera-
ture and pressure bases are shown in data entry fields and may be
replaced or the standard vapor volume per mole may be replaced,
but not both. PRO/II default values are:
TamparaIura Frassura Vapor VoIuma
English
GOF 14.GOG sia 87O.48 lt
8
/lbmol
Metric
OC 1.O882 kg/cm
2
22.414 m
8
/kgmol
S
278.15 K 1O1.82 ka 22.414 m
8
/kgmol
0|aptcr 4 80i|dii a ||cws|cct FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
4-4
The current atmospheric pressure (Pressure Gauge Basis) is shown in a
data entry field and may be replaced with another value as desired. The
PRO/II default value is 14.696 psia or the metric equivalent.
Click on the TVP and RVP Conditions... button to select the Prob-
lem TVP and RVP Conditions window. The temperature for true va-
por pressure specifications may be replaced in this window. The
PRO/II default for TVP calculations is 100F. The calculation
method for Reid vapor pressure may be selected in a drop-down list
box on this window. Choices are:
I API Naphtha (the default)
I API Crude
I ASTM D323-73
I ASTM D323-82
I ASTM D4593-91
I ASTM D5191-91
Click OK .
nIIs oI Maasura LIbrary
A library of dimensional unit sets which may be used for data entry or
report writing is maintained with this feature. To add a new set to the
library or to edit an existing set:
Select Options/Units of Measure List from the menu bar.
The Units of Measure Library window appears and may be used to create,
copy, edit, rename, and delete dimensional unit sets. The Units of Measure
Set Name and Description list box contains the names of the dimensional
unit sets currently in the library. The program provides three initial dimen-
sional unit sets: English (the default), Metric, and SI.
To create a new set:
Click the Create... button on the Units of Measure Library
window to get the Create Units of Measure Set window.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 4 80i|dii a ||cws|cct
4-5
Figure 4-4: Units of Measure Library
Supply a name for the new set in the data entry field provided, and
select the basis for the set with the appropriate radio button:
English, Metric, or SI.
Figure 4-5: Create Units of Measure Set Window
Click on OK to continue.
The units for the standard dimensional unit sets in PRO/II are assigned
to the new set and the edit feature may now be used to customize the
set.
0|aptcr 4 80i|dii a ||cws|cct FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
4-6
hale: An alternate way to create a new set is to highlight an existing
set in the Units of Measure Set Name and Description list box and click
the Copy button on the Units of Measure Library window. The name
for the new set is then entered in the Copy Units of Measure Set win-
dow. The Edit feature may now be used to customize the set.
To delete, rename or edit a set:
Select the set in the Units of Measure Set Name and Description
list box.
Click the Delete , Rename , or Edit button on the Units of
Measure Library window.
Jlllag lke lmeaslaaal uall 5els lar ulul earls
A dimensional unit set for output reports may be edited in two places in
PRO/II:
1. Library sets are edited with the Edit... feature in the Units of
Measure Library window.
2. The set being used for the current problem is edited in the Default
Units of Measure of the Problem Output Report which is accessible
from the PFD main window by:
I Selecting the Output menu on the menu bar.
I
Selecting the Report Format from the Output menu.
I
Selecting Units of Measure from the Report Format menu.
Editing of the dimensional items is identical for these two
windows.
The dimensional unit set for the output report is initialized from the
global set, as previously explained. However a different set may be
chosen from the units of measure library while in the Default Units of
Measure for Problem Output Report window. To use a different dimen-
sional unit set:
Click the Initialize from UOM Library... button. The Initialize Units
of Measure from UOM Library window appears.
Select the desired set from the drop-down list box.
Click the OK button to continue. This set now becomes the output
report set. The newly selected output report set may be edited in
this window as desired. The edited set is saved with the problem.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 4 80i|dii a ||cws|cct
4-7
The Print Option for output reports may also be selected using the
Output Report(s) to be Printed drop-down list box where options are:
One Output Report in Input Units (the default): When this option is
selected, an output report based on the units of measure used for the
problem data input will be generated. The currently specified input
units of measure will be displayed for informational purposes, but they
cannot be changed. With this option, the output units of measure can
only be changed by selecting the Units of Measure option from the
Input menu.
One Output Report in Output Units: When this option is selected, an
output report based on the output units of measure specified will be
generated. The currently specified output units of measure will be
displayed, and they can be changed if desired.
Two Output Reports, one in Input Units, one in Output Units:
When this option is selected, two output reports will be generated, one
each based on the input and specified output units of measure will be
generated. The currently specified output units of measure will be
displayed, and they can be changed if desired.
For the second and third cases discussed above, the displayed output
units of measure set can be copied from the specified input units, or
initialized from one of the units of measure sets stored in the units of
measure library.
To copy the input units of measure set to be used for the output
report, or to reset the explicitly specified output units to the
previously specified input units:
Click the Copy from Input UOM button on the Default Units of
Measure for Problem Output Report window.
Click OK to continue.
To initialize the output units of measure set from a units of measure
set stored in the units of measure library:
Click the Initialize from UOM Library... button on the Default Units
of Measure for Problem Output Report window.
Click OK to continue.
If the results of a previously executed simulation must be printed in a
different set of dimensional units, it is only necessary to select the
required units through this feature and generate a new report. The entire
simulation need not be executed from the start just to obtain the output
results in a different set of dimensional units.
0|aptcr 4 80i|dii a ||cws|cct FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
4-8
8aIIIng TharmodynamIr 8ysIamIobaI aIauIIs
To set the thermodynamic system global defaults:
Choose Simulation Defaults from the Options menu.
Choose Thermodynamic System. The Global Default
Thermodynamic System window appears.
Figure 4-6: Global Default Thermodynamic System Window
Complete the window.
Click OK .
hale: This global default will not become effective until the next time
File/New is selected.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 4 80i|dii a ||cws|cct
4-9
8aIIIng anaraI raWIng aIauIIs
PRO/II allows you to change the appearance of your workplace through
the General Drawing Defaults window. You can set the snap and move
tolerances, zoom and pan increments, the PFD palette icon, icon fill,
unit snapping, and delete confirmation. The defaults, shown below in
Figure 4-7, are appropriate for most scenarios and you may never need
to make changes in this window.
To make changes to the general drawing defaults:
Choose Options/Drawing Defaults/General... from the menu bar.
Figure 4-7: General Drawing Defaults Window
6kaaglag elele 6aallrmallaa
By default, PRO/II prompts you to confirm each delete operation. You may
want to change this default setting.
To turn delete confirmation off:
Within the General Drawing Defaults window, uncheck Confirm
Deletes to turn the option off.
0|aptcr 4 80i|dii a ||cws|cct FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
4-10
8aIIIng IobaI FIoWshaaI ToIaranras
You use this option to identify the acceptable margins of error and
criteria for satisfying certain numerical methods. Some flowsheet toler-
ances, such as the tolerance for flash calculations, are internal and are
not user-definable. The default flowsheet tolerances are satisfactory for
most problems.
To set the tolerance for this flowsheet:
Choose Input/Flowsheet Tolerances on the menu bar.
Figure 4-8: Default Unit Specification Tolerances
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 4 80i|dii a ||cws|cct
4-11
Flaclag a uall aa lke Flawskeel
The PRO/II main window is your drawing board. PRO/II supplies a
floating PFD palette and drawing objects that help you draw your
problem quickly.
The PFD palette shows icons for each unit operation that you can select
to place on the flowsheet. The PFD palette appears automatically when
you open a new or existing file, or when you import a keyword file.
To close or open the PFD palette:
Click on the Palette on/off icon, or select the View menu on the
main PRO/II window. Check the Palettes/PFD option on or off.
8aIarIIng a nII IromIha FF FaIaIIa
To select a unit icon for placement and place it on your flowsheet:
Choose the icon from the PFD palette (see Chapter 9 for unit
descriptions).
Position the cursor where you want the unit icon to appear and
click the left mouse button.
Figure 4-9: Placing a Unit
0|aptcr 4 80i|dii a ||cws|cct FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
4-1?
8nappIng
When connecting two units with a stream PRO/II will adjust or snap
the unit icon positions to straighten the connecting stream. By default,
units you add to or move in the PFD main window snap to an invisible
grid. You can turn grid snapping off.
To turn grid snapping off:
Choose Drawing Defaults from the Options menu.
Select General.
Select Unit Snapping. The disappears from the Unit Snapping
check box.
FIarIng MuIIIpIa nII Irons
You can place a series of unit icons in succession.
To place more than one unit at a time:
Select the desired unit from the floating PFD palette.
Press <Shift>, and while holding down <Shift>, click on the PFD
main window to place the icon.
While still holding down <Shift> click on the PFD main window to
place the second icon.
Repeat for each additional placement of this icon.
6anraIIng nII FIaramanI
To cancel unit placement:
Click the right mouse button.
aIaIIng a nII
To delete a unit already on the flowsheet:
Click on the unit icon you want to delete.
Click on the delete icon on the toolbar, or press <Delete>, or click
the right mouse button and select Delete.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 4 80i|dii a ||cws|cct
4-13
aIabaIIng a nII
PRO/II automatically labels each unit icon you place on the PFD main
window. You can change the label for a unit by modifying the label on
its data entry window. By default, the label consists of a character and
a one-digit auto incrementing number.
To relabel a specific unit:
Double-click on the unit you want to rename. The data entry
window for that unit appears.
Figure 4-10: Unit Data Entry Window
Type over the default name for Unit.
Choose OK .
0|aptcr 4 80i|dii a ||cws|cct FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
4-14
rawlag 5lreams
Streams mode is used to lay out the connections between units and feed
and product streams. The product ports for each unit automatically
appear when you depress the Streams button. Required product ports
are red, while optional product ports are green. For some unit opera-
tions, an entire side of the unit will be red or green denoting multiple
connections to that port.
To use Streams mode or display ports:
Select the Streams button on the PFD palette.
Figure 4-11: Streams Button Down
The cursor changes to an arrow with a small S to indicate Streams mode.
PRO/II displays the product ports for each unit in the layout. To
display feed ports, depress the left mouse button while the Streams
button is depressed.
raWIng Faad 8Iraams
To draw a feed stream:
Click on an unoccupied area of the PFD main window.
Click the mouse on the feed port you want the incoming stream
connected to.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 4 80i|dii a ||cws|cct
4-15
raWIng FrodurI 8Iraams
To draw a product stream:
Click the left mouse button on a product port.
Click the left mouse button again where you want the stream to
end.
raWIng a 6onnarIIon
To connect units:
Click the left mouse button on a port to anchor or start a stream.
The ports and port colors for some unit operations change depending on
the port you selected.
Click the mouse again at the other unit you want to connect.
PRO/II draws an orthogonal line to connect the ports.
Figure 4-12: Feed, Product, and Connection Streams Layout
6anraIIng a 6onnarIIon
To cancel a stream connection:
Click the right mouse button or press <Esc>.
6hangIng a 6onnarIIon
To change a connection:
Click the end (port) of the stream and hold down the mouse button.
Drag the end of the stream to a new port.
Release the mouse button.
0|aptcr 4 80i|dii a ||cws|cct FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
4-16
6onnarIIng 8Iraams Whan na nII Is hoI VIsIbIa
In order to complete a stream connection, the ending unit for the stream
segment must be visible in the PFD main window. You may open
another viewport window of the same simulation and move to the end
port you wish to view. Alternately, you can also use the scroll bars, the
Pan View window, Search for Unit, or Search for Stream tool to display
the end port.
LabaIIng a 8Iraam
PRO/II automatically labels each stream you place on the PFD main
window. By default, the label consists of an S followed by an auto
incrementing number. You can change the label for a stream by
changing the label on its data entry window.
To relabel a stream:
Double-click on the stream you want to relabel. The Stream Data
window appears.
Type over the default name for Stream.
Choose OK.
This stream will now show the new label; other streams retain the
original labeling scheme.
MovIng 8Iraams
You can change the route of the stream between two connections
whenever you wish.
To move a stream:
Click on the end of the stream you want to move.
Drag the stream to the new location.
Release the mouse button to drop the stream in place.
arouIIng 8Iraams
As you add new connections, PRO/II automatically performs a stream
route calculation. When you move a stream or a unit operation icon,
this calculation may no longer be valid. You can recalculate an unob-
structed, orthogonal path for selected streams.
To re-route a stream:
Select the stream(s) you want to reroute.
Choose Reroute from the Edit menu.
PRO/II calculates the best route for these streams and automatically
re-routes them.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 4 80i|dii a ||cws|cct
4-17
5earcklag lar a uall ar 5lream
PRO/II builds two lists that identify the units and the streams you have
placed on the flowsheet. The Unit List identifies each unit by name.
The Stream List identifies each stream by name.
oIng Io a nII
To search for a unit:
Click on the Go to Unit icon or select View/Unit List. The
Search for Unit dialog box appears, showing the names of all units
currently placed on the flowsheet diagram.
Select the unit you want to go to. The unit appears at the center of
the PRO/II main window.
oIng Io a 8Iraam
To search for a stream:
Click on the Go to Stream icon or select View/Stream List. The
Search for Stream dialog box appears, showing the names of all
streams currently placed on the flow diagram.
Select the stream you want to go to. The stream appears at the
center of the PFD.
hale: These search tools are only available on the toolbar if the
Standard Toolbar is active.
6kaaglag lke Flawskeel Layaul
PRO/II provides a variety of layout templates that change the look of
your process flow diagram. Each template uses a different algorithm for
calculating the position of unit operations and stream connections. You
do not have to re-execute a simulation in order to change its layout.
To change the layout of your diagram:
Choose Lay Out Flowsheet from the View menu. A cascading menu
appears to the right of the View menu.
Choose one of the following layouts:
I
Single Line
I
Multi-line Type 1
I
Multi-line Type 2
0|aptcr 4 80i|dii a ||cws|cct FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
4-18
Figure 4-13: Sample PFD
Single line format lays units in a single line from left to right.
Figure 4-14: Single Line
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 4 80i|dii a ||cws|cct
4-19
rawlag FreekaaJ hjecls
PRO/II provides six objects that you can place on the flow diagram to
customize the look and increase understanding of the flow diagram
without interfering with simulation data. These objects are:
G Text
G Line
G Polygon
G Rectangle
G Ellipse
G Page
LnIarIng TaxI
You use the text option to include notes on your drawing. Once you
choose text mode, you remain in text mode as long as you continue to
choose the OK button on the Draw Text window; choosing Cancel
exits text mode.
To place text:
Choose Draw/Text from the menu bar. The Draw Text window ap-
pears.
Figure 4-15: Draw Text Window
Enter the text you want to appear on the diagram.
Optionally, choose a font size for the text. The default is 3.
Choose OK .
0|aptcr 4 80i|dii a ||cws|cct FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
4-?0
raWIng LInas
You use the line option to add connected lines to the diagram without
interfering with simulation data. PRO/II provides an orthogonal
polyline feature.
To draw a line:
Choose Line from the Draw menu.
Click and hold the mouse button on the PFD main window to an-
chor the line.
Press <Space> to set each anchor point for drawing in a new direction.
Release the mouse button to complete your line.
To draw orthogonal connected lines:
Choose Line from the Draw menu.
Click and hold the mouse button on the PFD main window to an-
chor the line.
Press <Ctrl>, and while holding down <Ctrl>, drag the cursor.
Press <Space> to set each anchor point for drawing in a new direction.
Release the mouse button to complete.
raWIng 8hapas
You can draw shapes to enclose figures on a diagram without
interfering with simulation data.
To draw a polygon:
Choose Polygon from the Draw menu.
Click and hold down the mouse button on the PFD main window.
Press <Space> to each anchor point for drawing in a new direction.
Release the mouse button to complete your object.
To draw an orthogonal polygon:
Choose Polygon from the Draw menu.
Click and hold the mouse button on the PFD main window.
Press <Ctrl>, and while holding down <Ctrl>, drag the cursor.
Press <Space> to each anchor point for drawing in a new direction.
Release the mouse button to complete your orthogonal polygon.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 4 80i|dii a ||cws|cct
4-?1
To draw a rectangle or ellipse:
Choose Rectangle or Ellipse from the Draw menu.
Click and hold down the mouse button on the PFD main window.
Drag and release when you see the desired size rectangle.
To draw a square or circle:
Choose Rectangle or Ellipse from the Draw menu.
Click and hold down the mouse button on the PFD main window.
Press <Ctrl> then drag and release the mouse button to complete
your square.
raWIng Fagas
You can divide your PFD into pages and define separate page setup
options for each page. Pages can be individually printed or copied to
the clipboard (see Chapter 3, Managing PFD Files).
To add a page:
Choose Page from the Draw menu.
Click on the PFD.
Drag and release the mouse button to the desired size.
The page name is automatically given as PG followed by an auto
incrementing three-digit number.
Figure 4-16: Pages
0|aptcr 4 80i|dii a ||cws|cct FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
4-??
To change the page setup options:
Double-click anywhere along the page border. This brings up the
Page Setup window.
Select your page setup options.
Click on OK to continue.
After you have set up a page, you can resize it or make this page one
cell in a grid of pages.
To resize the page:
Click near the page outline to highlight the page.
Click and drag the sizing box.
To move the page:
Click and drag the page outline to a new location.
To make a grid of pages:
Select the page by clicking near the page outline.
Double-click the left mouse button to display the Page Setup
window.
Click on the radio button labeled Grid in the Change Page
Parameters group box.
In the Page/Grid group box, select the radio button for Multiple
Pages.
Change the number of rows and columns to make a grid of pages
on the PFD. The page you started with will be the upper left cell of
the grid.
The grid can be resized and moved on the PFD, in the same manner as
a single page.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 4 80i|dii a ||cws|cct
4-?3
This page intentionally left blank.
0|aptcr 4 80i|dii a ||cws|cct FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
4-?4
6kaler 5
Maalulallag hjecls
This chapter describes how to select unit icons, streams, and other
objects on the PFD main window and how to move, resize, rotate, or
flip them. In addition, this chapter describes how to edit and align text.
5elecllag hjecls ar raus al hjecls
You can select a single object, multiple (noncontiguous) objects, or a
group of objects. Objects or groups of objects include units, streams
and drawn objects. All manipulations (delete, rotate, move) are
performed on selected objects.
8aIarIIng MuIIIpIa bjarIs
You can select a set of noncontiguous objects.
To select a set of individual objects:
Click on the first object.
Press <Shift>.
While holding down <Shift>, click on each object you want to in-
clude as part of this set.
Figure 5-1: Multiple Unit Selection Handles
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 5 Maiip0|atii U|jccts
5-1
Handles appear for the set of objects. For example, although five
objects appear to be selected as part of this set (Figure 5-1), when you
move the selection the fourth and fifth objects (the valve and the
compressor) do not move with the set (Figure 5-2).
Figure 5-2: Move Multiple Objects
8aIarIIng a roup oI bjarIs
You can gather a group of contiguous objects by dragging a selection
rectangle around them.
To select a contiguous group of objects:
Click on an unoccupied area of the PFD adjacent to one of the
items you want to select and begin dragging the cursor by moving
your mouse.
Drag the cursor until all desired objects are inside the selection rec-
tangle outline.
Release the mouse button to end the selection.
Handles appear for the selected group of objects.
8aIarIIng kII bjarIs
You can select all objects on the flowsheet with one command. Once
selected, you can then move or delete the entire selection.
To select all objects on the flowsheet:
Choose Select All from the Edit menu.
0|aptcr 5 Maiip0|atii U|jccts FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
5-?
asaIarIIng bjarIs
If you change your mind after selecting objects, you can reverse any
selection.
To deselect or unselect all objects in the layout, do one of the following:
Choose Select None from the Edit menu.
Click on another item or on an unoccupied area of the PFD.
6anraIIng a 8aIarIIon paraIIon
For most operations, you can undo (reverse) the last action. The label
for the Undo command changes to indicate the type of operation you
can undo.
To undo any operation, do one of the following:
Choose Undo from the Edit menu.
Click the right mouse button on an unoccupied area of the PFD.
Press <Esc>.
eslzlag aa hjecl
You can change the height, width, or overall size of any object or a
group of objects on your flowsheet.
6hangIng Iha 8Ita oI a 8aIarIad bjarI
When changing the width of a group of objects, you change the
absolute distance between the objects and maintain the relative
distance.
To change the size of an object:
Click and drag the cursor until the object is the desired size.
Release the mouse button.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 5 Maiip0|atii U|jccts
5-3
Figure 5-3: Resize Column
hale: Condensers and reboilers shown on distillation or side columns are
fixed in size. They do not resize when you change the size of the column.
0|aptcr 5 Maiip0|atii U|jccts FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
5-4
asIorIng nII Iron 8Ita
If you dont like how your resized icon looks (relative to other icons
and objects on your flowsheet) you can quickly return the icon to its
default size.
To restore an icon to its original size:
Choose Restore Icon Size from the Edit menu. You can also click
the right mouse button on a selected icon, and then choose Restore
Icon Size from the Icon pop-up menu.
earraaglag hjecls ar raus al hjecls
You can move objects to a different area of the flowsheet. You can also
rotate or flip a unit icon so it fits into the flow of your diagram.
MovIng 8aIarIad bjarIs
You can move an object to a new position on the flowsheet.
To move a selected object:
Click and drag the object or group of objects to a new position.
Release the mouse button.
8aIIIng Mova ToIaranra
Move Tolerance controls the incremental distance for any object you
move. The default is 5 pixels.
To change move tolerance:
Choose Drawing Defaults from the Options menu, then General.
The General Drawing Defaults window appears.
Type the desired value over the default Move Tolerance.
Choose OK .
oIaIIng 8aIarIad bjarIs
You can rotate a selected object(s) on its axis by 90, 180 or 270
degrees.
To rotate a selected object:
Choose Rotate from the Edit menu. The Rotate degrees cascade
menu appears to the right of the Edit menu.
Choose 90, 180, or 270.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 5 Maiip0|atii U|jccts
5-5
oIaIIng an Iron
You can also click the right mouse button on a unit icon, then choose
Rotate from the Pop-up Unit menu to display the rotation degrees.
FIIppIng 8aIarIad bjarIs
You can flip a selected object(s) horizontally or vertically to better
orient the object(s) relative to other objects of the diagram.
To flip a selected object:
Select an object(s).
Choose Flip from the Edit menu. The Flip options menu appears to
the right of the Edit menu.
Choose Horizontal or Vertical.
FIIppIng an Iron
You can also click the right mouse button on a unit icon, then choose
Flip from the Pop-up Unit menu to display the flip options.
Jlllag Texl
You can change the text, size and or rotation of any text object you
placed on the PFD main window.
To edit text:
Double-click on the text object you want to change. The Draw Text
window appears.
Select desired changes and choose OK.
kIIgnIng TaxI
You can align text in two or more text boxes to the left, right or center
of the box they are drawn in.
To align text:
Select the text you want to align (you must select at least two) by
clicking on the first text box, then click on the other box(es) while
holding down the <Shift> key.
Choose Align Text from the Edit menu. The align menu pop-up ap-
pears to the right of the Edit menu.
Choose Left, Center or Right.
0|aptcr 5 Maiip0|atii U|jccts FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
5-6
6kaler 5
vlewlag Flawskeel 6aaleals
PRO/II offers a variety of tools that aid you in viewing your flowsheet
contents:
G Horizontal and vertical scroll bars are always available for
changing the visible portion of the process flow diagram in the
PFD main window.
G You may open additional viewport windows of your current
flowsheet to display different views of your simulation.
G The Pan View window is a special feature of PRO/II that
enables you to see a thumbnail of the entire flowsheet and use a
bounding box in the thumbnail to move the visible area.
This chapter describes how to use the PRO/II scroll, pan, and multiple
viewport features to display portions of your flowsheet diagram in the
PFD.
5cralllag lke FF
You can scroll the PFD left, right, up, or down using the horizontal and
vertical Scroll Bars. Both bars enable you to scroll in small or large
increments or to scroll to a general location.
8aIIIng 8rroIIIng InrramanIs
You can change the actual value for the scroll increments by altering
the Pan Increment value on the General Drawing Defaults window.
Zaamlag
You can access the PRO/II zoom features from the View menu, using
the zoom buttons on the toolbar, or using the keyboard.
To zoom in or out, do one of the following:
Choose Zoom In or Zoom Out from the View menu.
Click on the Zoom icon on the toolbar.
Choose <PgUp> or <PgDn>.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 6 Vicwii ||cws|cct 0citcits
6-1
ZoomIng In on a 8aIarIad kraa
You can specify the exact area of the flowsheet that you want to zoom
in on.
To zoom in on a specific area of the flowsheet:
Click on the Zoom Area icon on the toolbar or choose Zoom Area
from the View menu.
Click and drag the mouse to encompass the desired area within the
selection rectangle outline.
Release to complete the zoom area operation. The selected area fills
the PFD.
ZoomIng Io 8hoWIha FuII FIoWshaaI
You can quickly display the entire flowsheet in the PFD.
To use zoom to show the full flowsheet, do one of the following:
Click on the Zoom Full icon on the toolbar.
Choose Zoom Full from the View menu.
Press <Home>.
8aIIIng Iha ZoomInrramanI
You can change the increment PRO/II uses to zoom in or zoom out
within the General Drawing Defaults window. The default small zoom
increment is 5 pixels and the default large zoom increment is 20 pixels.
ealag Mulllle vlewarl WlaJaws
You can open multiple viewports of a single simulation problem to
display different views of the flowsheet.
To open an additional viewport of the current simulation problem,
do one of the following:
Click on the Multiple Viewports icon on the toolbar or choose New
View on the Window menu.
hale: If the multiple viewports button is not displayed on your toolbar,
check the Standard menu option from the View/Toolbar menu (i.e.,
select this option).
0|aptcr 6 Vicwii ||cws|cct 0citcits FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
6-?
Figure 6-1: Multiple Viewports
eJraw lke 5lmulallaa
You can use redraw to clear extraneous lines and dots from the PFD.
To redraw the diagram do one of the following:
Click on the Redraw icon on the toolbar.
Choose Redraw on the View menu.
Press <Shift+Home>.
Faaalag
You can pan the contents of the PRO/II main window using the Pan
window or the Small Pan or Large Pan options on the View menu.
The Pan View window is a thumbprint of the entire flowsheet. A
bounding box identifies the area of the flowsheet currently visible in
the PFD main window. You move the bounding box or change its size
to change how much or what portion of the flowsheet you see in the
PFD.
From the View menu, you can pan in large or small increments: up,
down, left, or right. You can change the settings for the pan increment
in the General Drawing Defaults window.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 6 Vicwii ||cws|cct 0citcits
6-3
IspIayIng and hIdIng Iha Fan VIaWWIndoW
To display the Pan View window:
Click on the Pan View icon on the toolbar or choose Pan View
from the Window menu.
Figure 6-2: Pan View Window
FannIng sIng Iha Fan VIaWWIndoW
Use the bounding box to change the visible portion of the flowsheet in
the PFD window by moving, enlarging or reducing the bounding box in
the Pan View window. The flowsheet in the PFD view changes to
match the area encompassed by the bounding box.
MovIng Iha 8oundIng 8ox
To move the bounding box:
Click the mouse inside the box.
Drag to a new location. The area enclosed fills the PFD.
hale: For a large flowsheet, use the Pan View window to quickly
switch from one area of the flowsheet to another.
6hangIng Iha 8Ita oI Iha 8oundIng 8ox
To change the size of the bounding box:
Click and drag the bounding box border handle to enlarge or reduce
the bounding box. The area enclosed fills the PFD.
0|aptcr 6 Vicwii ||cws|cct 0citcits FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
6-4
FannIng sIng Iha Manu pIIons
You can pan the image in the PFD up, down, left, or right using the
panning options on the Zoom menu.
To pan the image a large or small amount:
Choose Large Pan or Small Pan from the View menu. The pop-up
menu appears.
Choose Left, Right,Up, or Down.
8aIIIng FannIng 8ansIIIvIIy
You can change the increment PRO/II uses to pan. The default small
pan increment is 5 pixels and the default large pan increment is 20
pixels.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 6 Vicwii ||cws|cct 0citcits
6-5
This page intentionally left blank.
0|aptcr 6 Vicwii ||cws|cct 0citcits FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
6-6
6kaler 7
ala alry WlaJaws
PRO/II offers a wide variety of data entry windows for entering the data
associated with your PRO/II simulation. There are a number of libraries
from which you can extract sets of data. This chapter provides an intro-
duction to these data entry windows.
ellalag lke 5lmulallaa
You can use the data entry window buttons on the toolbar or the options
on the Input menu to define the scope of the current simulation. PRO/II
identifies which units are missing data by putting a red border around
the unit icon (on the toolbar). For units that are missing product
streams, the identification string for that unit appears in red (on the
PRO/II main window).
Defining the scope of the simulation involves:
G Defining the simulation problem
G Selecting the components for the simulation
G Setting the thermodynamic methods for the simulation
hale: Chapter 8, Specifying Component, Thermodynamic and Stream
Data and Chapter 9, Unit Operations and Utility Modules provide
explicit details on the use of the data entry windows introduced in this
chapter.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 7 Lata itry Wiidcws
7-1
A summary of the Data Entry Window buttons available on the PRO/II
toolbar is provided below.
8utton Menu tem Bescrition
FrobIam asrrIpIIon Enables you to describe the current
simulation and relate it to a secilic
roject.
nIIs oI Maasura Enables you to set units ol measure
secilic to this simulation. Each new
simulation extracts delaults lrom the
delault unit ol Measure Set.
6omponanI 8aIarIIon Enables you to secily the comonents
and seudocomonents you want to use
in the current simulation
6omponanI FroparIIas Enables you to suly comonent
roerties.
TharmodynamIr aIa Enables you to select thermodynamic
methods lor the current simulation.
kssay 6hararIarItaIIon Enables you to modily T8F Cutoints and
characteri/ation otions lor the generation
ol seudocomonents lrom Assay
streams.
Froradura aIa Enables you to suly F0RTRAh code lor
kinetic reaction rate calculations without
the need lor comilation and linking.
6asa 8Iudy 8parIIIraIIon Allows you to erlorm studies on a base
case solution by altering arameters
selectively and rerunning.
aarIIon aIa Enables you to deline reactions and
rovide heat ol reaction, equilibrium, or
kinetic data lor reaction sets.
6aIruIaIIon 8aquanra Enables you to secily a userdelined
calculation sequence.
aryrIa 6onvarganra Enables you to secily userdelined
recycle convergence and acceleration
otions.
0|aptcr 7 Lata itry Wiidcws FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
7-?
8aIarIIng 6omponanIs
You use this option to select the components and pseudocomponents
that you want to include in this simulation.
To select components for use in this simulation:
Click on the Component Selection icon on the toolbar or choose
Component Selection on the Input menu. The Component Selection
window appears.
Figure 7-1: Component Selection
Select a component from the available lists or type the name of the
component. Each component you select appears in the List of Se-
lected Components box on the right side of the window.
ModIIyIng 6omponanI FroparIIas
You can use this option to modify fixed component properties or use
the Fill from Structures feature to fill in missing component data for
library or user-defined components.
To modify component properties:
Click on the Component Properties icon on the toolbar or choose
Component Properties from the Input menu. The Component Prop-
erty Modification window appears.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 7 Lata itry Wiidcws
7-3
Figure 7-2: Component Property Modification
8aIarIIng TharmodynamIr MaIhods
You use the thermodynamic data option to choose the thermodynamic
method(s) for this simulation.
To set thermodynamic calculation methods for this simulation:
Click on the Thermodynamic Data icon on the toolbar or choose
Thermodynamic Data on the Input menu.
Figure 7-3: Thermodynamic Data
You can specify a predefined system of thermodynamic calculation
methods.
Select a category of predefined systems. PRO/II displays the prede-
fined systems for this category in the Primary Method list box.
Select a predefined system from the Primary Method list box.
Choose Add-> to define the calculation method.
0|aptcr 7 Lata itry Wiidcws FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
7-4
8aIarIIng kssay aIa
You use this option to modify the data obtained from the selected Assay
Set.
To select assay data for this simulation:
Click on the Assay Characterization icon on the toolbar or choose
Assay Characterization on the Input menu.
Figure 7-4: Assay Cutpoints and Characterization
PRO/II always supplies the Primary TBP Cutpoint set. You can modify
the primary set or define a new cutpoint set or set characterization
options.
8parIIyIng aarIIon aIa
You use this option to define reactions and enter heat of reaction, equi-
librium, or kinetic data for reaction data sets.
To specify reaction data sets for this simulation:
Click on the Reaction Data icon on the toolbar or choose
Reaction Data on the Input menu.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 7 Lata itry Wiidcws
7-5
Figure 7-5: Reaction Data
8parIIyIng Froradura aIa
You use this option to create procedure blocks to calculate kinetic
reaction rates. You are able to supply FORTRAN code for the reaction
rate calculations without the need for compilation and linking.
To select procedure data for this simulation:
Click on the Procedure Data icon on the toolbar or choose
Procedure Data on the Input menu.
Figure 7-6: Procedure Data
0|aptcr 7 Lata itry Wiidcws FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
7-6
8parIIyIng MuIIIpIa 8ImuIaIIons Ior 6asa 8Iudy
You use this option to make changes to input data and then examine the
effect of those changes on the values of calculated data or functions of
calculated data.
To select case study data for this simulation:
Click on the Case Study icon on the toolbar or choose Casestudy
Data on the Input menu.
Check the Define Case Study box.
Figure 7-7: Case Study Specification
8aIIIng Iha FrobIam6aIruIaIIon 8aquanra
PRO/II performs a simulation by solving one unit operation at a time,
following a certain calculation sequence to reach the problem solution.
You use this option to specify the method to determine this calculation
sequence for the current problem.
To select calculation sequence for this simulation:
Click on the Calculation Sequence icon on the toolbar or choose
Calculation Sequence on the Input menu.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 7 Lata itry Wiidcws
7-7
Figure 7-8: Problem Calculation Specification
8parIIyIng Iha aryrIa 6onvarganra
You use this option to override the recycle loop sequence determined by
PRO/II, and to specify acceleration methods and convergence
tolerances for individual loops.
hale: This window is not available if you select the SIMSCI method for
Calculation Sequencing, since the loops are determined automatically
by this method.
To select recycle convergence for this simulation:
Click on the Recycle Convergence icon on the toolbar or choose
Recycle Convergence on the Input menu.
0|aptcr 7 Lata itry Wiidcws FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
7-8
Figure 7-9: Recycle Convergence Options
ala alry WlaJaws lar uall erallaas
The data entry window for any unit operation can be accessed by high-
lighting the unit on the PFD and selecting the Input/Data Entry from
the menu bar. Numerous types of data entry devices are used to supply
numeric values and select calculation options in PRO/II, including:
Push Buttons, Radio Buttons, Check Boxes, Edit Fields, Spin Buttons,
Standard List Boxes, Drop-Down List Boxes, Grid and X-Y Grid,
Combo Boxes, Drop-Down Combo Boxes, and Linked Text.
Most main data entry windows provide Help, Overview, and Status buttons
that enable you to access different levels of help text. In addition, some
main data entry windows (and some subordinate windows) provide UOM,
Define and Range buttons. Grayed buttons indicate that the feature is not
currently available.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 7 Lata itry Wiidcws
7-9
8utton Bescrition
Bislays context sensitive hel lor the active data entry lield, or lor
the window itsell (il there is no active lield).
Bislays the main hel window lor the data entry window.
Bislays the results ol the data consistency checks erlormed lor
the main window alter you choose 0K.
Selects a units ol measure set lor the selected data entry lield.
Relerences one stream or unit arameter value to another stream
or unit arameter.
Bislays the valid range ol values lor the active data entry lield.
rIds and Iha XY rId
Grids are used to supply data in tabular form. There may be several
rows of related data entries. X-Y Grids are a special type of grid that
are used to supply data for relational curves. The two grid columns
contain an independent variable (x) and one related dependent variable
(y).
The Column Tray Hydraulics window shown below is an example of a
grid. Notice that it provides columns for the starting tray number, ending
tray number, calculation type, and entry of tray data. Each row has a
numbered click button which is used to select the row for toolbar actions.
For this example, several types of data entry devices are used in the grid.
The starting and ending tray numbers are integer edit fields, the calculation
type is a drop-down list box, and the entry of tray data is a click button,
which brings up the Column Tray Sizing window or Column Tray Rating
window, depending on the calculation type that was selected.
0|aptcr 7 Lata itry Wiidcws FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
7-10
Figure 7-10: Column Tray Hydraulics Window
Observe that five rows are provided in the initial grid corresponding to
five sections in the column. This may be expanded by clicking a row
number button and then clicking the Insert button far left. A row will
be added below the selected row. When the number of rows exceeds
five, a scroll bar appears at the right side of the grid to provide access to
the rows not displayed. To deselect a row, click the number button of
the previously selected row, or select a different row. To clear data
entries from a row, click the row number button and then click the
Reset button. To remove a row, click the row number button and the
Cut button.
As another example, the Compressor Outlet Pressure Performance
window shown below contains an X-Y grid for a user-supplied
compressor pressure curve.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 7 Lata itry Wiidcws
7-11
Figure 7-11: Compressor Outlet Pressure Performance Window
Notice that two columns are used for the pressure curve. The first
column is the volumetric feed rate and the second column is the corre-
sponding outlet pressure from the compressor. Four individual entries
or cells corresponding to two rows in the table are marked with a red
border as mandatory input. Optionally, more pairs of information may be
provided.
The initial grid displays four pairs of cells. Note that each row in the
grid has a numbered click button which may be used to select the row.
The initial table may be expanded with the Insert button on the
toolbar as described in the previous example. When the number of
rows in the X-Y grid exceeds four, a scroll bar appears to provide
access to rows not displayed.
A row may be deleted from the grid by clicking its number button and
then clicking the Cut button. To copy a row, first click its number
button and then click the Copy button. The row is copied into the
clipboard. Next, click the row number button for the row which will be
just below the copied row. Complete the copy by clicking the Paste
button to insert a copy of the row from the clipboard.
0|aptcr 7 Lata itry Wiidcws FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
7-1?
LInkad IaxI
Linked text is used to input information in a sentence format. Numeric
values, mathematical operators, stream or unit names, or various
options may be supplied as linked text. Linked text may serve to access
another data entry device. The Feedback Controller data entry window
containing linked text is shown in Figure 7-12.
Figure 7-12: Feedback Controller Main Data Entry Window - Initial Display
Linked text is used on this window to define the Specification and
Variable. Note that the Parameter and value link texts are red, denoting
that you must click these strings and provide data entries. The text
string the default tolerance is green, denoting a default value.
Optionally, a different tolerance may be provided by clicking the afore-
mentioned text string to open the Specification Tolerance window
where the appropriate radio button may be clicked to select a new
tolerance type, i.e., relative tolerance. Click OK to return to the
Feedback Controller window. Notice that the relative tolerance text
string becomes blue indicating a user-supplied value.
When the value text string is clicked, a floating point entry field for the
specification value is displayed with a red border signifying mandatory
input. The value you supply is now displayed in blue numbers instead
of the value text string.
Clicking the Parameter text string retrieves the Parameter window in
which the unit or stream and its parameter are defined. The unit or
stream identifier and the parameter for the specification are now
displayed in blue, replacing the Parameter text string.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 7 Lata itry Wiidcws
7-13
Figure 7-13: Feedback Controller Data Entry Window - Final Display
0|aptcr 7 Lata itry Wiidcws FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
7-14
6kaler 8
5ecllylag 6amaaeal,
TkermaJyaamlc aaJ 5lream ala
This chapter describes several types of optional component, thermody-
namic and stream information which may be supplied for PRO/II. In
many cases, the default values are satisfactory and it may not be necessary
for you to visit these sections.
6amaaeal ala
anaraI InIormaIIon
PRO/II provides considerable flexibility in the definition of component
data. No limit is set on the number of components which may be used
for any problem. Furthermore, component data may originate from a
variety of sources such as SIMSCI databanks, user-prepared databanks,
user-defined components, and components derived from petroleum
assay data for feed streams. Moreover, you may stipulate a preferential
search order when multiple databanks are used.
The SIMSCI databanks, SIMSCI and PROCESS contain more than
1700 components and are adequate for nearly all simulation models.
The AIChE DIPPR databank is also available as an add-on to PRO/II.
User databanks of thermophysical data can be created, using SIMSCI
LIBMGR and DATAPREP programs, and maintained through PRO/II
graphical user interface. SIMSCI REGRESS is also fully supported in
PRO/II, allowing you to carry out regression of experimental thermo-
physical data to model equations.
8aIarIIng LIbrary 6omponanIs
You may select library components, from both SIMSCI and user-
supplied databanks, through the Component Selection main data entry
window. To open this window from the PRO/II main window:
Click the Component Selection icon on the toolbar, or select the
menu bar item Input/Component Selection. The Component
Selection window appears.
If you know the library access name for a component, you may enter it
directly into the data entry field. Click Add-> or press <Enter> to
retrieve the component from the component databank and add it to the
List of Selected Components. If the component cannot be located by the
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 5pccifyii 0cmpcicit,T|crmcdyiamic aid 5trcam Lata
8-1
name you have entered, a warning will recommend that you use the
Select from Lists feature to locate the component in the SIMSCI and
PROCESS databanks:
Click the Select from Lists button on the Component Selection
main data entry window to open the Component Selection -
List/Search window.
Select a Component Family from the like-named drop-down list
box. A large number of component families are provided to speed
the search. A brief description is given below:
MosI 6ommonIy sad. Approximately 100 components representing all of
the pure components commonly encountered in natural gas and
petroleum processing.
hydrorarbon LIghIands. Light gases commonly reported on analyses for oil
refinery streams.
kII 6omponanIs. Every component in the SIMSCI and PROCESS
databanks.
FamIIIas oI 8parIIIr 6hamIraI Typa. Twenty families in alphabetical order:
Acids Additional Electrolyte Components
Alcohols Aldehydes
Amides Amines
Aromatic Hydrocarbons Elements
Esters Ethers
Halogenated Derivatives Ketones
Miscellaneous Naphthenic Hydrocarbons
Other Nitrogen Derivatives Paraffinic Hydrocarbons
Salts and Minerals Silicon Derivatives
Sulfur Derivatives Unsaturated Hydrocarbons
For all families listed above, except for Hydrocarbon Lightends, you
may define specific search criteria by selecting radio buttons and
entering a search string. Use part or all of the component name, alias,
or chemical formula as the search string. As components are located,
transfer them to the Additions to Component List box. When you have
located all the components, click OK to return to the Component
Selection main window and to transfer the components to the List of
Selected Components.
The priority order for databanks may be defined by pushing the
Databank Hierarchy button on the Component Selection main window
to access the Component Selection Databank Search Order window.
This window initially displays the default search order and may be
modified to search the databanks in any order. Components are always
5pccifyii 0cmpcicit,T|crmcdyiamic aid 5trcam Lata FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
8-?
selected from the first databank in the search order in which they
appear.
LnIarIng sardaIInad 6omponanIs
You may want to enter a component as a user-defined component when
you wish to use a component that is not in the PRO/II library.
Enter user-defined components by clicking User-defined on the
Component Selection main window to access the Component
Definition - User Defined window.
Type in the name of the user-defined component in the Component
Name entry field.
Click OK to commit the new component name.
hale: At this point, you have only entered the name of the user-defined
component in the database. Now you must supply the properties for the
component by the steps described below in Modifying Component Proper-
ties.
aIInIng FaIroIaum(FLT) 6omponanIs
Define PETRO components by pushing the Petroleum button on the
Component Selection main window to access the Component Selection
Petroleum Components window. You may define any number of
PETRO components in a single visit to this window by using the
tabular input provided.
You must supply at least two of the three correlating properties, normal
boiling point, standard liquid density, and molecular weight for each
component. Names may be optionally provided or will be supplied by
PRO/II as NBP XXX where XXX is the component normal boiling point.
PRO/II uses internal correlations to estimate the third parameter, when
missing.
All necessary physical and thermodynamic properties are computed
from the three correlating properties. Molecular weight is the most
difficult property to predict accurately from generalized correlations
and should be supplied when possible for the most accurate characteri-
zation for a PETRO component.
hale: It is not possible to enter data for assay pseudocomponents (which
are based on stream assay information) with this window. All properties
for components derived from assay data are automatically defined by
PRO/II. The components are also added to the component list by PRO/II.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 5pccifyii 0cmpcicit,T|crmcdyiamic aid 5trcam Lata
8-3
aIInIng 8oIId 6omponanIs
You can enter input solids characteristics directly into PRO/II. You may
specify stream properties, the particle size distribution, and the particle
properties. PRO/II also allows you to input experimental solids solu-
bility data.
To add a solid component to the flowsheet:
Click on the Component Selection icon or select Input/Component
Selection from the menu bar to open the Component Selection win-
dow.
Click the Component Phases button. Ensure that the compo-
nents that may be solid have the solid phase enabled. For example,
if you enter NaCl for use in a dissolver, make sure that its compo-
nent phase designation is liquid-solid.
If the flowsheet will include unit operations that require particle size
distributions (e.g., Cyclone, Dissolver, Crystallizer), Input/Component
Property Data from the menu bar. In the like-named window, click
Particle Size Distribution to open the Particle Size Distribution for
Solids window. Enter PSD cutpoints for all relevant solid components.
Particle size grades are bounded by the cutpoints that are entered here.
Grades will not be created on the open ends of the first and last
cutpoints (i.e., if the cutpoints are 10 and 20 microns, there will be one
grade of 10 to 20 microns, not three grades of less than 10, 10 to 20,
and greater than 20 microns).
To change the units of measure for the particle size distribution, click in
any of the Distribution Ranges entry fields to enable the UOM button
in the toolbar at the top of the window.
aIaIIng and anamIng 6omponanI FroparIIas
Currently, actions on components that appear in the List of Selected
Components in the Component Selection main windoware limited to deletion
or renaming of components.
To delete a component:
Highlight the name of component in the List of Selected
Components.
Click Delete .
To rename a component for printout purposes:
Highlight the component.
Click Rename to open the Rename a Component window.
Enter the new name in the data entry field.
5pccifyii 0cmpcicit,T|crmcdyiamic aid 5trcam Lata FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
8-4
ModIIyIng 6omponanI FroparIIas
You can modify properties for any component entered through the
Component Selection main data entry window via the Component
Property window. To reach this window:
Select Input/Component Properties... from the menu bar or click on
the Component Properties icon on the main toolbar.
The Component Properties window is the master navigation point for
changing all component properties.
hale: Component properties cannot be defined before the component
names have been entered.
There are three methods available for component property
modification:
MaIhod 1. 8parIIyIng FIxad FroparIIas
Click Fixed to open the Components Properties-Fixed Properties
window. Here you can modify fixed component properties such as
molecular weight, critical temperature and NBP. With the exception of
assay components, all components can be modified via this window.
For those properties having UOMs, all data is displayed with the UOMs
of the current problem.
Starting from this window, use the appropriate button to modify other
properties:
Click Critical Properties to specify critical temperature, critical
pressure, critical volume and critical compressibility factor.
Click Molecular Constants to specify properties such as Dipole
Moment, Radius of Gyration, van der Waals Area parameter and
van der Waals Volume parameter.
Click Heats of Formation to specify Enthalpy of Formation and
Gibbs Energy of Formation. In this entry, reference phase designa-
tion is a required input. The reference phase can be vapor, liquid or
solid. Vapor phase is the default.
Click Miscellaneous Properties to specify Acentric Factor,
Solubility Parameter, Rackett Parameter, Liquid Molar Volume, Heat
of Vaporization, Heat of Fusion, Normal Melting Point, Triple Point
Temperature, Triple Point Pressure, Heat of Combustion, Gross Heat-
ing Value, Lower Heating Value, Carbon Number and Hydrogen Defi-
ciency Number.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 5pccifyii 0cmpcicit,T|crmcdyiamic aid 5trcam Lata
8-5
For PRO/II library components, the values in the database will appear
in the various property windows. In cases where there is no library
value to serve as the default, the default displayed will be the text
Missing. You may reassign values for any of these properties.
MaIhod Z. 8parIIyIng TamparaIuraapandanI FroparIIas
You may enter or override default data for properties that change with
temperature, such as density and viscosity, for the vapor, liquid or solid
phases of the pure components in your simulation. You may supply new
data in the form of tables or as correlation coefficients of one of 29
different equation types.
Click Temperature Dependent to open the Component Properties -
Temperature Dependent Properties window. All the library and user-
defined components from the current problem are displayed. To enter
or modify data for a property of a component, click on the
corresponding push button for that component. For properties that may
apply to more than one phase, you will first be required to select the
phase for which you are to supply data in the Component Properties -
Phase window,
Click VP to enter or modify liquid or solid vapor pressure data.
Click H to enter or modify vapor, liquid or solid enthalpy data.
Click Cp to enter or modify solid heat capacity data.
Click to enter or modify latent heat data.
Click to enter or modify liquid or solid density data.
Click enter or modify vapor or liquid viscosity data.
Click to enter or modify vapor, liquid or solid conductivity
data.
Click to enter or modify liquid surface tension data.
In the Component Properties - Data Source Selection window choose
the method of data entry. You may enter data either in tabular form or
as coefficients for one of as many as 29 equations.
If you choose the Correlation Coefficients option, you may display the
form of the equation by selecting the appropriate Correlation Number
in the like-named drop-down list.
Select one of the correlations and supply coefficients as required.
If the form of the equation is logarithmic, you may select the base
of the logarithm. You may change the units of the equation and
may impose maximum and minimum temperatures of applicability.
5pccifyii 0cmpcicit,T|crmcdyiamic aid 5trcam Lata FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
8-6
hale: The full range of equations can be found in the online PRO/II
Reference Manual accessible via the Help system. If you choose an
equation that is not standard, a message to that effect appears, and the
border of the drop-down list box will be yellow.
If you choose the Tabular Data option, the Component Properties -
Tabular Data window appears.
Enter temperature and property data. You must enter at least one
data pair.
ATAFF
The most commonly used features of DATAPREP, particularly relating
to point properties and temperature-dependent correlations for pure
components, are now accessible in the graphical user interface of
PRO/II. PRO/II allows you to input data, view database correlation
information, override database information as desired, and plot parame-
ters over a temperature range.
MaIhod 8. 8parIIyIng FIII From8IrurIura
The Fill from Structure button opens the Components Properties - Fill
from Structure window. The Available Components list on the left hand
side contains library and user-defined components from the current
problem. You may add or remove components to be filled from
structure to the like-named list on the right. Click OK to have the
properties of the selected components filled from structure.
PRO/II predicts properties from structure using established correlations
and techniques. Joback (1985) significantly expanded the work of
Lyderson (1955) in this area providing a group contribution method for
the prediction of critical properties, boiling point, freezing point, ideal
gas capacity, enthalpy and Gibbs heat of formation. Joback used a
large database of components to statistically determine group parame-
ters for 42 different functional groups. SIMSCI has extended this work
to include several missing parameters.
To complete the Fill from Structure procedure, click the
UNIFAC Structures button on the Component Properties window to
display the like-named window. A UNIFAC Structure entry is
mandatory for all components for which Fill from Structure has been
requested. Click the UNIFAC Structures button adjacent to the
component of interest to open the Define UNIFAC Structure window
where you may choose from families of components or from the
UNIFAC group number directly.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 5pccifyii 0cmpcicit,T|crmcdyiamic aid 5trcam Lata
8-7
Assay ala
anaraI InIormaIIon
For many petroleum-based streams, the composition is not fully known
in terms of defined components. These stocks must be characterized by
pseudocomponents for which the necessary physical and thermody-
namic properties have been estimated. PRO/II has extensive procedures
for translation of petroleum stream laboratory assay data into
pseudocomponents.
Pseudocomponents are based on boiling point or cutpoint ranges on the
true boiling point (TBP) distillation for the stock. The normal boiling point
for a pseudocomponent is defined as the weighted average temperature of
its cutpoint range. The TBP distillation must often be derived from another
type of laboratory distillation, using a conversion procedure. PRO/II
accepts the following types of laboratory distillations: TBP, ASTM D1160,
ASTM D86, and ASTM D2887. While laboratory distillations are usually
reported on a 760 mm Hg basis, PRO/II has procedures to correct distilla-
tions for other laboratory pressures.
Estimated values for the standard liquid gravity and molecular weight
for each pseudocomponent are also needed for the characterization
process. The standard liquid gravity for each pseudocomponent is
derived from the gravity curve for the stream, in similar fashion to the
normal boiling point. The gravity curve for the stream is often not
available, and it must be estimated, based on the average stream gravity
and the distillation curve. The molecular weight curve is seldom
available, and the molecular weight for each pseudocomponent is
usually predicted from its normal boiling point and standard liquid
gravity. All other required physical and thermodynamic properties may
be estimated from the normal boiling point, standard liquid gravity, and
molecular weight.
The use of assay data in PRO/II is divided into two logical steps. The
first step involves the definition of the cutpoint ranges and selection of
the characterization options used in development of the pseudocompo-
nents. Characterization options include distillation curve fitting and
conversion methods, gravity curve generation procedure, methods for
prediction of molecular weight, and methods for estimation of critical
properties and ideal gas enthalpies. If the default cutpoint ranges and
methods furnished by PRO/II are acceptable, this step may be omitted.
The properties for all pseudocomponents derived from the same
cutpoint set are averaged, based on the stream flows, to develop a common
set of blend components. This technique provides reasonable results when
the streams have similar chemical natures. For example, all of the assay
5pccifyii 0cmpcicit,T|crmcdyiamic aid 5trcam Lata FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
8-8
streams are products from the crude distillation unit. However, when
assay streams are dissimilar chemically, such as virgin materials and
cracked materials, there may be serious errors in the characterizations
for the streams when a single set of blend components is used.
For this reason, you are allowed to define additional cutpoint sets. For
example, an additional cutpoint set may be defined to represent the
products from an FCC reactor. Note that it is not necessary or desirable
to define a separate cutpoint set for each assay stream. Similar streams
may be grouped by using the same cutpoint set without a serious loss of
accuracy. This also minimizes the number of components in the simula-
tion, keeping calculation times smaller.
The second step is supplying the petroleum stream laboratory assay
data to PRO/II. This step is accomplished in the setup of initial feed
streams and is discussed in the Stream Data section of this chapter.
T8F 6uIpoInI 8aIs
TBP cutpoint sets are defined in the Assay Cutpoints and Characteriza-
tion main data entry window. This window may be reached from the
PFD main window in two ways:
Click the Assay Characterization icon with the distillation pseudo-
component curve on the toolbar, or select the menu bar item Input,
then select the menu item Assay Characterization.
A Primary Cutpoint Set is always provided as a default by PRO/II.
This set has the following cutpoint definitions:
6uIpoInI anga, ag F 6uIpoInI anga, ag 6 ho oI 6uIs
1OO 8OO 88 427 28
8OO 12OO 427 G4O 8
12OO 1GOO G4O 871 4
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 5pccifyii 0cmpcicit,T|crmcdyiamic aid 5trcam Lata
8-9
The default cutpoint ranges are usually reasonable for crude oil
problems. They may be modified in the Assay Data Primary TBP
Cutpoints Definition window which is accessed by clicking the Modify...
button on the Assay Cutpoints and Characterization main data entry
window. A convenient tabular form is provided for editing of the primary
cutpoint set.
Additional or Secondary cutpoint sets may be added to the problem by
clicking the Define New Cutpoint Set... button on the Assay Cutpoints
and Characterization main data entry window to access the Assay Data
Secondary Set of TBP Cuts. A cutpoint set name is supplied on this
window and a tabular entry form is provided for definition of the
cutpoints. This window is also used to modify existing secondary
cutpoint sets and is presented when the Modify button on the Assay
Cutpoints and Characterization main data entry window is clicked and a
secondary cutpoint set has been highlighted in the Defined Secondary Sets
list box on the Assay Cutpoints and Characterization main data entry
window.
Highlighted secondary cutpoint sets in the Assay Cutpoints and Char-
acterization main data entry window may be deleted by clicking the
Delete... button. This action removes the secondary cutpoint set from
the problem.
The Default Cutpoint Set is used for all streams for which a cutpoint set
is not specified. Initially, it is defined as the Primary Cutpoint Set by
PRO/II. After one or more Secondary cutpoint sets have been defined,
the default cutpoint set may be changed via the drop-down list box on
the Assay Cutpoints and Characterization main data entry window. It
is convenient to define the cutpoint set which is used the most often as
the default cutpoint set.
kssay 6hararIarItaIIon pIIons
Assay characterization options are selected on the Assay Characteriza-
tion Options window which is reached by clicking the Characterization
Options button on the Assay Cutpoints and Characterization main data
entry window. Several groupings of options are shown in this window,
with all options selectable with radio buttons. The option groups are as
follows:
6rIIIraIs, IdaaIas LnIhaIpy. SIMSCI (Twu) method (the default), Cavett
method, or Lee-Kesler method.
MoIaruIar WaIghI. SIMSCI (Twu) method (the default), Old (1967) API
method, or Extended 1980 API method.
5pccifyii 0cmpcicit,T|crmcdyiamic aid 5trcam Lata FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
8-10
ravIIy 6urva anaraIIon MaIhod. Constant Watson K from TBP Curve
(default), or Constant Watson K from D86 Curve.
B6lT8F 6onvarsIon MaIhod. API 1987 (the default), API 1963, API 1994,
or Edmister-Okamoto.
IsIIIIaIIon 6urva FIIIIng Froradura. Cubic Spline (default), Quadratic
Polynomials, or Probability Density Function (PDF).
IsIIIIIaIIon 8oundarIas. Initial Point and End Point percentages.
InrIuda In FF. Include initial boiling point in fit, and/or include end
point in fit.
6aIruIaIIon oI h8F Ior 6uIs. Liquid Volume Average (default) or Tempera-
ture Midpoint.
The characterization options are explained in greater detail in the
PRO/II help text and the online PRO/II Reference Manual accessed via
the Help menu.
TkermaJyaamlc ala
anaraI InIormaIIon
The selection of appropriate thermodynamic methods is an important
and necessary step in the solution of flowsheet problems. PRO/II
provides a wide range of methods to allow solution of the wide variety
of systems which occur in the chemical process industries.
Thermodynamic properties are an integral part of the flowsheet calcula-
tions. The equilibrium K-values (both VLE and LLE) are used to
determine the phase separations. The enthalpies for the streams are used
to determine the energy required to take a system of components from
one set of thermal conditions to another. Entropies are used in the
calculation of the isentropic operations and the Gibbs free energy mini-
mization reactor. Liquid and vapor densities are used in heat transfer,
pressure drop, and column tray sizing.
Transport properties are selected in conjunction with the thermody-
namic methods in PRO/II and are comprised of liquid and vapor
viscosities, liquid and vapor thermal conductivities, and liquid diffusivi-
ties. While not strictly a transport property, liquid surface tension is
also included. Transport properties find use in rigorous heat transfer
calculations, pressure drop determination, and column sieve tray and
packing calculations. Transport properties are also reported in the
stream properties reports and may be requested in Heating/Cooling
Curves reports.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 5pccifyii 0cmpcicit,T|crmcdyiamic aid 5trcam Lata
8-11
In PRO/II, the selection of thermodynamic methods has been simplified
by the concept of the method set. Method sets consist of predefined
thermodynamic methods for K-values (VLE and LLE), liquid and vapor
enthalpies, entropies, vapor fugacities, and densities. Numerous prede-
fined sets are provided. Multiple thermodynamic method sets may be
selected for each flowsheet. For example, a default set may be specified
for the overall flowsheet and other method sets used for individual
units.
A facility is also provided to modify the thermodynamic methods in the
predefined method sets. Certain parameters for some of the thermody-
namic methods may also be supplied.
8aIarIIng FradaIInad MaIhod 8aIs
Selection of thermodynamic method sets is accomplished via the Thermo-
dynamic Data window which may reached from the PFD main window
in two ways:
Click the Thermodynamic Data icon with the phase diagram on the
toolbar or select the menu bar item Input/Thermodynamic Data.
For convenience, several Categories of method sets can be selected in
the list box on the Thermodynamic Data window. The Primary
Method, i.e., the method used for calculation of equilibrium K-values,
for each method set in the selected Category appears in a drop-down
list box and may be selected to add the method set to the Defined
Systems for the problem.
The Defined Systems appear in a list box and each may be selected for
further action by highlighting the desired method and clicking the
buttons: Modify... , Delete... , and Rename... on the Thermody-
namic Data window. The method set for which action is to be taken is
selected (highlighted) in the Defined Systems list box. Delete removes
the selected method set from the problem. The Rename option is used
to change the name of the selected method set. This is useful when it is
desired to use a method set more than one time in a problem, perhaps
with different parameters. Modification of method sets is discussed
later in this section.
The following Categories of method sets are provided:
MosI 6ommonIy sad. These method sets may be used for a wide variety of
problems. Nearly all gas processing and oil refining calculations are
handled satisfactorily. Method sets in this category are: Soave-
Redlich-Kwong (SRK), Peng-Robinson (PR), Grayson-Streed (GS),
Braun K-10 (BK10), Ideal, NRTL, UNIQUAC, and UNIFAC.
5pccifyii 0cmpcicit,T|crmcdyiamic aid 5trcam Lata FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
8-1?
LquaIIons oI 8IaIa. Equations of state are applicable to wide ranges of
temperatures and pressures. They can be used to calculate all ther-
modynamic properties, using the ideal gas state as the reference
state. The cubic equations, in particular, are able to accurately pre-
dict critical and supercritical conditions. Equation of state method
sets are: Soave-Redlich-Kwong (SRK), SRK-Kabadi-Danner
(SRKKD), SRK-Huron-Vidal (SRKH), SRK-Panagiotopoulos-Reid
(SRKP), SRK-Modified-Panagiotopoulos-Reid (SRKM), SRK-
SIMSCI (SRKS), SRK-Hexamer (HEXAMER), Peng-Robinson
(PR), PR-Huron-Vidal (PRH), PR-Panagiotopoulos-Reid (PRP),
PR-Modified-Panagiotopoulos-Reid (PRM), BWRS (BWRS),
Lee-Kesler-Plcker (LKP), and Uniwaals (UNIWAALS).
LIquId krIIvIIy. Liquid activity methods use liquid phase activity coeffi-
cient models to represent the liquid mixture in phase equilibrium
calculations. This approach is useful for modeling strongly non-
ideal liquid solution behavior. Methods available in PRO/II include:
NRTL, UNIQUAC, Wilson, van Laar, Margules, Regular Solution,
Flory-Huggins, UNIFAC, UNIFAC TDep-1, UNIFAC TDep-2,
UNIFAC TDep-3, UNIFAC Free Volume, and Ideal.
anaraIItad 6orraIaIIons. Generalized correlations predict K-values with
semi-rigorous equations. The Grayson-Streed and Chao-Seader
correlations use the Redlich Kwong equation for vapor fugacities
and empirical relationships for the liquid fugacities. Braun K-10 is
based on the convergence pressure concept. A variety of other cor-
relations are used to predict the other properties, i.e., enthalpies, en-
tropies, and densities. Generalized correlations are: Braun-K10
(BK10), Grayson-Streed (GS), Improved-Grayson-Streed (IGS),
Grayson-Streed-Erbar (GSE), Chao-Seader (CS), Chao-Seader-
Erbar (CSE), and Ideal (IDEAL).
8parIaI Farkagas. Special packages are designed to solve a particular
industrial application. Special packages in PRO/II are: Alcohol
(ALCOHOL), Glycol (GLYCOL), Sour Water (SOUR), GPA Sour
Water (GPSWATER), and Amine (AMINE).
kII FrImary MaIhods. This category includes all of the primary thermody-
namic sets that are listed above.
saraddad MaIhods. This category includes all of the 15 user-added
method sets that may be defined by the user.
The PRO/II online help texts provide application guidelines for the
various method sets, as well as a brief description for each method.
More detailed information may also be found in the PRO/II Reference
Manual (also available online). Table 8-1 at the end of this section
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 5pccifyii 0cmpcicit,T|crmcdyiamic aid 5trcam Lata
8-13
gives a detailed list of the composite thermodynamic methods used for
each predefined method set.
ModIIyIng FradaIInad MaIhod 8aIs
Predefined method sets are modified via the Thermodynamic Data-
Modification window which is accessed by clicking the Modify...
button on the Thermodynamic Data window.
The preselected thermodynamic methods for the various thermody-
namic properties may then be changed in this window by following
these steps:
Click on the Current Method drop-down list box corresponding to
the Property type.
Select the replacement thermodynamic method.
Any or all of the thermodynamic methods may be changed for the
method set being modified, including: K-value (VLE), K-value (LLE),
liquid enthalpy, vapor enthalpy, liquid entropy, vapor entropy, liquid
density, vapor density, and vapor fugacity (where applicable).
Some property specific data may also be supplied and/or modified in this
window for the thermodynamic methods by clicking on the Enter Data...
button in the Property-specific Data field. Many of the methods use
specific parameters, such as binary interaction factors, modified acentric
factors, etc. A priority search order may be defined for selection of these
parameters from more than one thermodynamic databank. Note that ther-
modynamic databanks are supplied by SIMSCI and may also be
prepared by the user with the SIMSCI LIBMGR program.
Property specific data which apply only to the liquid activity methods
include: fill options for missing parameters, Henrys Law options, and
Poynting correction options. For the liquid activity methods, a vapor
fugacity method may also be selected.
Other property-specific data which may be modified include the dimen-
sionless residence time correction factor for amines DGA and MDEA
and the key (or dominant) components in each liquid phase for K-value
(LLE) methods. Key component selection is optional and PRO/II will
determine them when not supplied; however, convergence time may be
enhanced by preselection of the key components.
Flll-la Fraerly FreJlcllaa
PRO/II allows missing data to be filled in under several circumstances.
For example, when the composition of an azeotrope and activity coefficient
values at infinite dilution are known for some pair of species, you can use
5pccifyii 0cmpcicit,T|crmcdyiamic aid 5trcam Lata FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
8-14
this option to predict missing activity coefficient values at intermediate
concentrations.
VLE and LLE K-value parameters for liquid activity coefficient
methods may be estimated by the UNIFAC, Temperature-Dependent
UNIFAC, Regular Solution, or Flory-Huggins methods, or they may be
obtained from an azeotrope bank. The choice of fill-in property predic-
tion is entered on the Binary Data Fill Options window, which is
reached by clicking the corresponding Enter Data... button on the
Thermodynamic Property Modification-Property Specific Data window.
Checking the box will fill in missing data from the azeotrope databank.
A method for filling in missing binary parameters (using the UNIFAC,
modified UNIFAC, Regular Solution, or Flory-Huggins methods) may
be selected by choosing the appropriate radio button.
quallaa al 5lale Alka ala
The form to be used for equation of state alphas may be specified on
the Alpha Selection window. This window is reached by clicking the
appropriate Enter Data... button on the Thermodynamic Property
Modification-Property Specific Data window. The source of the alphas
to be used in the equation of state may be designated by selecting the
appropriate radio button.
hearys Law
The Henrys Law window is used to specify whether or not Henrys
Law is to be used in conjunction with a liquid-activity K-value method.
This window is brought up by clicking on the appropriate Enter Data...
button on the Thermodynamic Property Modification-Property Specific
Data window. Checking the box on the Henrys Law window causes
Henrys Law to be used to determine the solubility of certain compo-
nents. Designation of solute components may either be determined by
the program or selected explicitly, by choosing the appropriate radio
button. If the solute components are to be designated explicitly, the
desired solute components must be selected from the list box on the
Henrys Law window.
Fayallag 6arrecllaa
The Poynting Correction window is used to specify the use of the
Poynting correction factor for liquid-phase fugacities. The Poynting
Correction window is brought up by clicking the appropriate Enter
Data... button on the Thermodynamic Property Modification-Property
Specific Data window.
There are three options for the usage of the Poynting correction:
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 5pccifyii 0cmpcicit,T|crmcdyiamic aid 5trcam Lata
8-15
1. Default: This choice specifies that the Poynting correction will
be used only if a vapor fugacity method is chosen.
2. Use Poynting Correction to Liquid Activities: Use the
Poynting correction factor for the liquid phase fugacity.
8. Do Not Use Poynting Correction: Do not use Poynting
correction factor.
If either of the first two options is selected, then the molar volume
calculation method may be selected from the following choices:
Standard (25C) Volumes, Rackett, Rackett One-Fluid, or Library
Density Correlations. The default method is Standard (25C) Volumes.
Amlae eslJeace Tlme 6arrecllaa Faclar
The Amine Residence Time Correction window is available only for the
Amine special data package thermodynamic method for K-values. It is
accessed by clicking the Enter Data... button on the Thermodynamic
Property Modification-Property Specific Data window, then on the LLE Key
Components... button on the LLE K-values window. A value for the
residence time correction factor for systems containing amines MDEA or
DGA may be entered in this window. The default value for this factor is
0.30.
LL key 6amaaeals
The LLE Key Components window can be accessed whenever an LLE
K-Value method is selected, by clicking the appropriate Enter Data...
button on the Thermodynamic Property Modification-Property Specific
Data window, then on the LLE Key Components... button on the LLE
K-value window. Both the light liquid phase and the heavy liquid phase
can either be Determined During Calculations or User-Specified by
selecting the appropriate radio buttons. When the User-Specified radio
button is chosen, a component must be selected in the associated
drop-down list box. This drop-down list contains all available liquid-
phase components. One component may be selected for each key.
8laary laleracllaa Faramelers
A number of methods in PRO/II allow the entry of binary interaction
parameters. These include equations of state for many properties and
liquid-activity-coefficient models for K-values. These parameters are
entered on the Binary Interaction Parameters window, which is reached
by clicking the Enter Data... button next to Binary Interaction
Parameters on the Thermodynamic Property Modification-Property
Specific Data window. For each column of the grid, the two compo-
5pccifyii 0cmpcicit,T|crmcdyiamic aid 5trcam Lata FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
8-16
nents for which the data is being entered must first be selected from the
drop-down list boxes in the first two rows of the grid.
Depending on the thermodynamic method set which has been selected,
one or more parameters characterize the interaction between the two
components. When the Binary Interaction Parameters window is
initially brought up, the box at the top of the window must be checked
in order to enable the grid where individual binary interaction parame-
ters are entered. For the NRTL and UNIQUAC methods, there are
several different forms of the binary interaction equations. For the
NRTL method, the 5-Parameter equation is the default form. For the
UNIQUAC method, the default is the 4-Parameter form of the equation.
For these two methods, a different equation form may be selected for
each component pair from the Equation Format drop-down list box, in
order to enter the data in the most convenient form. Depending on the
selection in the Equation Format list box, the appropriate rows in the
grid become active. For most equation formats, many active parameters
have default values of 0.0, except for the SRK-Modified-
Panagiotopoulos-Reid, PR-Modified Panagiotopoulos-Reid, Glycol,
Sour, GPA Sour Water, and Amine methods, where the default value for
parameters c
ij
and c
ji
is 1.0.
heal al Mlxlag ala
For the Ideal thermodynamic method, an excess enthalpy method may
be specified on the Heat of Mixing window. This window is accessed
by clicking the appropriate Enter Data... button beside liquid enthalpy
on the Thermodynamic Property-Modification Data window, checking
the check box and then clicking on the Enter Data button on the
Thermodynamic Property-Modification-Liquid Enthalpy window beside
the Heat of Mixing data item. Checking the box on the Heat of Mixing
window activates three radio buttons, and the excess enthalpy calcula-
tion method may be selected by choosing the desired radio button. If
either of the Redlich-Kister Excess Enthalpy methods are chosen, then
the Redlich-Kister binary parameters may be entered on the Binary
Redlich-Kister Parameters window, which is accessed by clicking the
Binary Data... button. When entering the Redlich-Kister binary
parameters for any component pair, the A
ij
field is required and the other
parameters have default values of 0.0.
user-aJJeJ TkermaJyaamlc ala
To select a user-added thermodynamic method, select one of the fifteen
user-added methods from the drop-down list box in the Primary
Method field on the Thermodynamic Data window. The User-added
Parameters window allows the input of parameters for user-added
thermodynamic subroutines. For each row of the grid, the parameter
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 5pccifyii 0cmpcicit,T|crmcdyiamic aid 5trcam Lata
8-17
number (from 1 to 2600) is entered in the first column and the
parameter value is entered in the second column.
hale: The User-added Subroutines supplement (an add-on to the stan-
dard PRO/II package) is required for user-added thermodynamic meth-
ods. Contact your local SIMSCI office for more information.
aIInIng TransporI FroparIIas
Transport property methods are selected in the Thermodynamics -
Transport Properties window which is accessed by clicking the
Transport Properties... button on the Thermodynamic System -
Modification window. Transport properties, i.e., viscosities, thermal
conductivities, liquid surface tension, and liquid diffusivities may be
selected on a global basis via radio buttons as: specify individually,
pure-component averages, petroleum based correlations, the TRAPP
method, or user-added methods. Note that the TRAPP method does not
predict liquid surface tension and the petroleum method is used to
predict this property when TRAPP is selected.
Drop-down list boxes may be used to replace any of the global
methods, with these options for the properties:
Vapor vIsrosIIIas. None, pure-component average, petroleum correla-
tions, TRAPP method, user-added.
LIquId vIsrosIIIas. None, pure-component average, petroleum correla-
tions, TRAPP method, API method, SIMSCI method, Woeflin method
user-added.
Vapor and IIquId IharmaI rondurIIvIIIas. None, pure-component average,
petroleum correlations, TRAPP method, user-added.
LIquId surIara IansIon. None, pure-component average, petroleum corre-
lations, user-added.
hale: The None option for the methods above is available only if the
Specify Individually option is selected for the Transport System.
LIquId dIIIusIvIIy. None, Wilke-Chang.
hale: A user-added method is not allowed for liquid diffusivity
calculations.
5pccifyii 0cmpcicit,T|crmcdyiamic aid 5trcam Lata FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
8-18
To select a user-added transport method, choose the User-added
Subroutine option on the Transport Properties window and select one
of the five methods from the drop-down list.
hale: The User-Added Subroutines supplement (an add-on to the
standard PRO/II package) is required for user-added transport meth-
ods. Contact your local SIMSCI office for more information.
The PRO/II online help text provides additional information about the
various transport property methods. More information may also be
found in the PRO/II Reference Manual.
8parIIyIng WaIar aranI pIIons
When a method set which supports two-liquid phase calculations is
selected via the Thermodynamic Data window, the Thermodynamics -
Liquid-Liquid Options window appears. Radio buttons on this window
may be used to specify that a single liquid phase only be used in the calcu-
lations (the default) or that two-liquid phase calculations be performed.
For method sets that support water decant, the user may optionally
select to decant water as a pure phase. The methods used for the decant
water calculations are selected via radio buttons in the Water Options
window which is reached by clicking the Water Options... button on
the Thermodynamic System-Modification window. The following
options are available:
6aIruIaIIon oI WaIar 8oIubIIIIy In honaquaous Fhasa. SIMSCI Method (the
default), Kerosene correlation, Compute from Equation of State (SRK
and PR methods only).
6aIruIaIIon oI aranIad WaIar FroparIIas. Vapor-Liquid Saturation Values,
Steam Tables.
Optionally, the user may also check a check box to use GPSA Data
Book values for calculating the water partial pressure.
More details on decant of free water are given in the online help text
and in the PRO/II Reference Manual.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 5pccifyii 0cmpcicit,T|crmcdyiamic aid 5trcam Lata
8-19
TabIa B1. FradaIInad TharmodynamIr MaIhod 8aIs
MosI 6ommonIy sad.
FrImary MaIhod (kvaIua)
Vapor
LnIhaIpy
LIquId
LnIhaIpy
Vapor
LnIropy
LIquId
LnIropy
Vapor
ansIIy
LIquId
ansIIy
Vapor
FugarIIy
SoaveRedlichKwong (SRK) SRK SRK SRK SRK SRK AF h0hE
FengRobinson (FR) FR FR FR FR FR AF h0hE
0raysonStreed (0S) CF CF CF CF SRK AF h0hE
8raunK1O (8K1O) J0 J0 CF CF BEAL AF h0hE
hRTL (hRTL) BEAL BEAL h0hE h0hE BEAL BEAL BEAL
uh0uAC (uh0uAC) BEAL BEAL h0hE h0hE BEAL BEAL BEAL
uhFAC (uhFAC) BEAL BEAL h0hE h0hE BEAL BEAL BEAL
hote. CF= CurlFit/er method, J0 = Johnson0rayson method, AF= AF Method
LquaIIons oI 8IaIa.
FrImary MaIhod (kvaIua)
Vapor
LnIhaIpy
LIquId
LnIhaIpy
Vapor
LnIropy
LIquId
LnIropy
Vapor
ansIIy
LIquId
ansIIy
Vapor
FugarIIy
8wRS (8wRS) 8wRS 8wRS 8wRS 8wRS 8wRS 8wRS h0hE
FengRobinson (FR) FR FR FR FR FR AF h0hE
FRhuronvidal (FRh) FRh FRh FRh FRh FRh AF h0hE
FRFanagiotooulosReid (FRF) FRF FRF FRF FRF FRF AF h0hE
FRModiliedFanag.Reid (FRM) FRM FRM FRM FRM FRM AF h0hE
SoaveRedlichKwong (SRK) SRK SRK SRK SRK SRK AF h0hE
SRKKabadiBanner (SRKKB) SRKKB SRKKB SRKKB SRKKB SRKKB AF h0hE
SRKhuronvidal (SRKh) SRKh SRKh SRKh SRKh SRKh AF h0hE
SRKFanagiotooulosReid (SRKF) SRKF SRKF SRKF SRKF SRKF AF h0hE
SRKModiliedFanag.Reid (SRKM) SRKM SRKM SRKM SRKM SRKM AF h0hE
SRKSMSC (SRKS) SRKS SRKS SRKS SRKS SRKS AF h0hE
SRKhexamer (hEXA) hEXA hEXA hEXA hEXA hEXA AF h0hE
LeeKeslerFlcker LKF LKF LKF LKF LKF AF h0hE
uniwaals (uhw) uhw uhw uhw uhw uhw uhw h0hE
anaraIItad 6orraIaIIons.
FrImary MaIhod (kvaIua)
Vapor
LnIhaIpy
LIquId
LnIhaIpy
Vapor
LnIropy
LIquId
LnIropy
Vapor
ansIIy
LIquId
ansIIy
Vapor
FugarIIy
8raunK1O (8K1O) J0 J0 CF CF BEAL AF h0hE
ChaoSeader (CS) CF CF CF CF SRK AF h0hE
ChaoSeaderErbar (CSE) CF CF CF CF SRK AF h0hE
5pccifyii 0cmpcicit,T|crmcdyiamic aid 5trcam Lata FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
8-?0
TabIa B1. FradaIInad TharmodynamIr MaIhod 8aIs
0raysonStreed (0S) CF CF CF CF SRK AF h0hE
0raysonStreedErbar (0SE) CF CF CF CF SRK AF h0hE
mroved0raysonStreed (0S) CF CF CF CF SRK AF h0hE
deal (BEAL) BEAL BEAL h0hE h0hE BEAL BEAL h0hE
8parIaI Farkagas.
FrImary MaIhod (kvaIua)
Vapor
LnIhaIpy
LIquId
LnIhaIpy
Vapor
LnIropy
LIquId
LnIropy
Vapor
ansIIy
LIquId
ansIIy
Vapor
FugarIIy
Alcohol (hRTL) SRKM BEAL SRKM SRKM SRKM BEAL BEAL
Amine (AMhE) SRKM AMhE SRKM SRKM SRKM BEAL h0hE
0lycol (0LYC0L) SRKM SRKM SRKM SRKM SRKM AF h0hE
Sour water (S0uR) SRKM BEAL SRKM SRKM SRKM BEAL h0hE
0FA Sour water (0FSwAT) SRKM BEAL SRKM SRKM SRKM BEAL h0hE
LIquId krIIvIIy.
FrImary MaIhod (kvaIua)
Vapor
LnIhaIpy
LIquId
LnIhaIpy
Vapor
LnIropy
LIquId
LnIropy
Vapor
ansIIy
LIquId
ansIIy
Vapor
FugarIIy
hRTL (hRTL) BEAL BEAL h0hE h0hE BEAL BEAL BEAL
uh0uAC (uh0uAC) BEAL BEAL h0hE h0hE BEAL BEAL BEAL
uhFAC (uhFAC) BEAL BEAL h0hE h0hE BEAL BEAL BEAL
wilson (wLS0h) BEAL BEAL h0hE h0hE BEAL BEAL h0hE
van Laar (vAhLAAR) BEAL BEAL h0hE h0hE BEAL BEAL BEAL
Margules (MAR0uLES) BEAL BEAL h0hE h0hE BEAL BEAL BEAL
Regular Solution (RE0uLAR) BEAL BEAL h0hE h0hE BEAL BEAL BEAL
Floryhuggins (FL0RY) BEAL BEAL h0hE h0hE BEAL BEAL BEAL
uhFAC TBe1 (uhFAC TBe1) BEAL BEAL h0hE h0hE BEAL BEAL BEAL
uhFAC TBe2 (uhFAC TBe2) BEAL BEAL h0hE h0hE BEAL BEAL BEAL
uhFAC TBe8 (uhFAC TBe8) BEAL BEAL h0hE h0hE BEAL BEAL BEAL
uhFAC Free volume (uhFAC Free volume) BEAL BEAL h0hE h0hE BEAL BEAL BEAL
deal (BEAL) BEAL BEAL h0hE h0hE BEAL BEAL h0hE
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 5pccifyii 0cmpcicit,T|crmcdyiamic aid 5trcam Lata
8-?1
5lream ala
anaraI InIormaIIon
This section of data is used to specify the thermal conditions and composi-
tions for all feed streams in the flowsheet. It may also be used to furnish
initial estimates of the composition and thermal conditions for recycle tear
streams to enhance recycle convergence. Supplied data for tear streams or
any other streams which are products from unit operations are used as
estimates only and always replaced by the next calculated set of values.
Finally, Reference streams may be defined to eliminate thermal recycles.
Compositional streams may be of two types: composition fully defined
in terms of defined components, or pseudocomponents to be generated
from petroleum assay data. Reference streams are always assigned the
composition of the parent stream.
Compositions may be defined on a mole, weight, standard liquid
volume or vapor volume basis, corresponding to typical laboratory data.
It is necessary to provide both a laboratory distillation and stream
average gravity for petroleum assay streams. Light ends analyses,
gravity curves, and molecular weight curves may optionally be
furnished to improve the characterization of petroleum assay streams.
The stream thermal conditions may be specified in a variety of ways
including: defined temperature and pressure, bubble or dew point
conditions, or fraction liquid. For reference streams, only the tempera-
ture and pressure may be defined.
LnIarIng 8IraamaIa
You can enter data for a stream on the flowsheet. The data entry
window that appears contains any data you previously entered (as well
as default values) for the selected stream.
To enter data for a stream:
Double-click on the stream or right-click on the unit icon and select
Data Entry..., or select the stream and choose Input/Data Entry...
from the menu bar.
Select the desired stream operation.
The stream name automatically assigned by the program is displayed in the
upper left hand corner of this window and may be edited as desired. If the
stream is an intermediate or product stream, a check box appears on this
window so that an initial estimate may be supplied for the stream.
Select the Stream Type.
5pccifyii 0cmpcicit,T|crmcdyiamic aid 5trcam Lata FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
8-??
Figure 8-1: Stream Data Entry Window - Feed Stream
8parIIyIng 6omposIIIon aIInad 8Iraams
Within the Stream Data main data entry window:
Select the Composition Defined radio button.
Click the Flowrate and Composition button to access the Flowrate
and Composition window.
Radio buttons are used to select the stream flowrate basis as: Total
Fluid Rate, or Individual Component Flowrates. A data entry box
adjacent to the Total Fluid Rate button is used to enter the total stream
flow in mole, mass, standard liquid volume, or standard vapor volume
units.
The stream composition is supplied in a drop-down list box, and may
be supplied on a mole, mass, standard liquid volume, or standard vapor
basis. Components not defined are assigned zero flowrates. If the total
fluid rate was not given, the flowrate for the stream is taken as the sum
of the stream composition. PRO/II displays a running total for the
composition as it is entered.
When the total fluid rate is supplied and the composition does not sum
to that rate or a rate of 100.00 1.0 or 1.00 0.01 (indicating composi-
tion percentage or fraction) an error is signaled. Optionally, a check box
is provided to normalize the composition based on the specified total
fluid rate, in which case no error is signaled for the above condition.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 5pccifyii 0cmpcicit,T|crmcdyiamic aid 5trcam Lata
8-?3
8parIIyIng 8IraamTharmaI 6ondIIIon
The thermal condition for all supplied streams except reference streams
must be specified on the Stream Data main data entry window. Two
specifications must be supplied. The first specification is selected as
Temperature or Pressure via the First Specification drop-down list box
and the value entered in an adjacent data entry field.
The second is chosen from the Second Specification drop-down list box
as: Pressure, Bubble Point, Dew Point, Liquid Mole Fraction, Liquid
Weight Fraction, or Liquid Volume Fraction. The pressure and the
liquid fraction specifications have an adjacent data entry field. Thus,
the thermal condition may be:
G Defined temperature and pressure.
G Bubble or dew point (pressure defined, temperature calculated).
G Bubble or dew point (temperature defined, pressure calculated).
G Liquid fraction (pressure defined, temperature calculated).
G Liquid fraction (temperature defined, pressure calculated).
The temperature and pressure may optionally be specified for a
reference stream. If not specified, the thermal conditions for the parent
stream are used.
8parIIyIng FaIroIaumkssay 8Iraams
Within the Stream Data main data entry window:
Select the Petroleum Assay radio button.
Click the Flowrate and Array button to enter the Flowrate and Assay
window.
The flowrate for the assay stream is entered in the data entry field
provided as weight or liquid volume units. The cutpoint set for the
blend may be selected by clicking the hypertext string default set of
TBP cutpoints to retrieve a list of the problem cutpoint sets. The pseu-
docomponent blending option is selected by clicking the text string
included in. This option is the default and includes the pseudocompo-
nents generated for the stream in the assay blending for the cutpoint set.
The excluded from option is used when the assay stream is a recycle
estimate and the effect of its estimated pseudocomponents on the assay
blend properties is not wanted. Entry of the various assay data is
discussed below. More information on the various laboratory tests is
given in the PRO/II help text and the PRO/II Reference Manual.
5pccifyii 0cmpcicit,T|crmcdyiamic aid 5trcam Lata FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
8-?4
Laharalary lsllllallaa
Click the Define/Edit Assay... button on the Petroleum Assay
Stream window to enter the Assay Definition window. This win-
dow is used to enter the laboratory assay data for the petroleum
stream.
Select the type of distillation via radio buttons as: True Boiling
Point (TBP), ASTM D86, ASTM D1160, or ASTM D2887.
The basis for the distillation may be chosen as: Liquid Volume or
Weight. Liquid Volume is the default for all distillations except the
ASTM D2887 which is defaulted as weight. Note that gravity and
molecular weight curves must be on the same basis, volume or weight,
as the distillation curve. The distillation data for TBP, ASTM D86, and
ASTM D1160 are assumed to be at a pressure basis of 14.696 psia. If
not, enter the laboratory pressure in the data field provided. For ASTM
D86 distillations, a Correct for Cracking check box is provided for
application of the API Data Book cracking correction to the distillation
temperatures.
The distillation data are entered in the table provided. At least two
points are required when the cubic spline fitting method is used. When
only two points are given, PRO/II uses a probability density function to
fill in the curve. For the quadratic fitting option, at least three points
must be given for TBPs and five points for other types of distillations.
PRO/II needs the entire distillation curve from zero percent to one
hundred percent and extrapolates and interpolates as necessary. Wise
engineers perform their own extrapolations outside of PRO/II, using
their knowledge of the stream being characterized.
ravlly ala
The type of gravity data is denoted by radio buttons on the Assay
Definition window as: API Gravity, Specific Gravity, or Watson
K-Factor. The stream average value must be supplied in the data entry
window provided. Optionally, a gravity curve for the stream may be
given by clicking the Gravity Curve... button on this window to access
the Assay Gravity Curve window which provides a convenient tabular
form for entry of the gravity curve.
Malecular Welgkl ala
A molecular weight curve may be optionally given by clicking the
Molecular Weight... button on the Assay Definition window to access
the Assay Molecular Weight Data window. This window provides a
tabular form for entry of the molecular weight curve. Optionally, the stream
average value may also be supplied in this window.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 5pccifyii 0cmpcicit,T|crmcdyiamic aid 5trcam Lata
8-?5
LlgkleaJs ala
Lightends data may be optionally provided by clicking the
Lightends... button on the Assay Definition window to access the
Assay Lightends Data window. The lightends composition may be
entered on a mole, mass, standard liquid volume, or standard vapor
volume basis. Any library component or petroleum component that was
defined as a PETRO component may be designated as a lightend.
Several choices are available for specification of the total lightends
flow. These choices are selected via radio buttons and are:
MaIrh Io T8F 6urva. The lightends rate is determined such that the normal
boiling point for the mid percent of the highest boiling lightend exactly
matches the TBP curve. The lightend components are kept in the same
proportions as the supplied composition (the default).
FrarIIon oI kssay. The lightends rate is a specified fraction of the total
stream rate. A basis of liquid volume or weight may also be selected in
the Basis drop-down list box. If no basis is selected, the basis for the
distillation curve is assumed. When this option is chosen and the
lightends composition does not add to the specified fraction or to 100.0
1.0 or 1.00 0.01 (indicating composition percentage or composition
fraction) an error is signaled.
FarranI oI kssay. The lightends rate is a specified percent of the total
stream rate. A basis of liquid volume or weight may also be selected in
the Basis drop-down list box. If no basis is selected, the basis for the
distillation curve is assumed. When this option is chosen and the
lightends composition does not add to the specified percent or to 100.0
1.0 or 1.00 0.01 (indicating composition percentage or composition
fraction) an error is signaled.
sa 6omposIIIons as krIuaI aIas. The supplied composition is assumed to
be component flows, not fractional composition or percentage composi-
tion.
LIghIands aIa. The lightends rate is supplied directly in the data entry field
provided. When this option is chosen and the lightends composition does
not add to 100.0 1.0 or 1.00 0.01 (indicating composition percentage
or composition fraction) an error is signaled.
Optionally, a check box is provided to normalize the composition based
on the specified total lightends rate, in which case no error is signaled
for a composition total which does not equal fraction, percent or a supplied
rate and does not add to 100.0 1.0 or 1.00 0.01.
5pccifyii 0cmpcicit,T|crmcdyiamic aid 5trcam Lata FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
8-?6
5lreamTkermal 6aaJlllaas
The thermal conditions for petroleum assay streams are specified in the
same fashion as that already discussed for compositionally defined
streams.
8parIIyIng aryrIa 8Iraams
The PRO/II calculation engine recognizes recycle loops and automati-
cally sets up loop calculations as needed. For many problems, the
default techniques are satisfactory. For complicated flowsheets with
nested recycle loops, the user may prefer to define the loop calculation
details. Acceleration techniques can also be applied to speed closure of
the recycle tear streams.
5elllag ecycle 6aavergeace llaas
Recycle convergence options are entered in the Problem Recycle
Convergence and Acceleration Options window which may be reached
from the PFD main window by clicking the Recycle Convergence icon
on the toolbar.
The following Recycle Convergence Options can be selected with radio
buttons:
6onvarga aII 8Iraams. Convergence is not attained until all flowsheet
streams are converged within the recycle tolerances. This is the default.
6onvarga onIy Taar 8Iraams. Convergence is reached when all tear streams
are converged. This is the option used by the SIMSCI PROCESS
Simulation Program.
Global recycle tolerances may be set in this window. These tolerances
are used for all loops except user specified loops in which tolerances
are supplied. Tolerances may be specified as relative or absolute via
drop-down list boxes. Tolerances are:
6omponanI. Permissible change in a stream component rate from one
iteration to another. The default is 0.01 on a relative basis.
TamparaIura. Allowable change in a stream temperature from one
iteration to another. The default is + 1.0F or equivalent.
Frassura. Allowable change in a stream pressure from one iteration to
another. The default is 0.01 on a relative basis.
The smallest stream component mole fraction to test for convergence
may be changed from the default value of 0.01 by clicking on the
linked text numeric value. Note that for some problems such as amine
plants, this threshold must be lowered to test the residual acid gas
components in the recycle amine solution.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 5pccifyii 0cmpcicit,T|crmcdyiamic aid 5trcam Lata
8-?7
Frequency of intermediate printed results for recycle calculations may
be selected by clicking the underlined value in the print statement:
Print recycle stream composition every 0 recycle iterations.
The number of recycle trials to allow before non-convergence is
signaled may be entered by clicking the underlined value in the trials
statement: Set default maximum number of trials for each recycle loop
to 20. Note that this is a global value which may be superseded for a
user specified loop.
Acceleration options are chosen via radio buttons:
IrarI 8ubsIIIuIIon (ho krraIaraIIon). This is the default.
kppIy WagsIaIn krraIaraIIon. Use the Wegstein acceleration method. The
following additional options may be chosen with Wegstein by clicking
underlined default values: first iteration to accelerate (default is 2),
iteration interval for acceleration (default is 1), Wegstein lower and
upper factors (defaults are -5.00 and 0.00)
kppIy 8roydan krraIaraIIon. Use the Broyden acceleration method. When
this option is selected, the first iteration to accelerate may also be
supplied by clicking the underlined (linked text) default value of 2.
Ordinarily, all recycle tear streams are accelerated. Click the
Accelerated Tear Streams... button to access the Accelerated Tear
Streams window. This window has two options available:
krraIaraIa kII Taar 8Iraams. This is the default.
krraIaraIa sarsparIIIad Taar 8Iraams. When this option is selected, tear
streams are selected in a drop-down list box and moved to the Acceler-
ated Streams list box. Acceleration is only applied to these tear streams
in the Accelerated Streams list box.
user-secllleJ ecycle Laas
To select user-specified recycle loops, the user must first select the
Alternate or Explicitly Defined by User calculation sequence methods
in the Problem Calculation Sequence window.
Click the User-specified Recycle Loops button on the Problem
Recycle Convergence and Acceleration Options window to reach
the User-specified Recycle Loops window.
Then, click on the check box beside User-specified Recycle Loops.
5pccifyii 0cmpcicit,T|crmcdyiamic aid 5trcam Lata FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
8-?8
A tabular form is used to supply recycle loop information. Each line in
the table has drop-down list boxes which are used to select the Starting
Unit and the Ending Unit for each loop. The adjacent Enter Data...
button is clicked to enter additional recycle information via the Indi-
vidual Recycle Loop Data window.
Information which may be entered in this window includes:
humbar oI TrIaIs. Number of iteration trials before non-convergence is
signaled. If not supplied, the global value is used.
aryrIa 8Iraam 6onvarganra ToIaranras. Tolerances may be supplied for the
Component, Temperature, and Pressure changes. A threshold
component level may be supplied by clicking the underlined (linked
text) default. Note that the global defaults are used when values are not
supplied in this window.
krraIaraIIon pIIons. The Direct Substitution, Wegstein Acceleration, or
Broyden Acceleration methods may be selected for acceleration of the tear
stream. The following additional options may be chosen with Wegstein by
clicking highlighted default values: first iteration to accelerate (default is
2), iteration interval for acceleration (default is 1), Wegstein lower and
upper factors (defaults are -5.00 and 0.00). For Broyden, the first
iteration to accelerate may also be supplied by clicking the highlighted
default value of 2.
8raIIng FrodurI 8Iraams
eaeral lalarmallaa
Scaling provides an easy way to ratio all of the results in a simulation
such that the flow of one of the products is equal to a specified flow.
For example, it may be desired to build a plant which produces a
specified quantity of product, but the exact quantity of feed required is
not known. Instead of making multiple runs with different feed rates,
one run may be made and the complete result scaled, including the feed
rate such that the desired product rate is achieved.
To use the scaling feature:
Select the menu option Output from the menu bar of the PRO/II
main window.
Select the Report Format item from the Output menu.
Select Miscellaneous Data from the Report Format menu to access
the Miscellaneous Report Options window.
Click the Product Stream Scaling button to display the Product
Stream Scaling window.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 5pccifyii 0cmpcicit,T|crmcdyiamic aid 5trcam Lata
8-?9
Click the check box beside Scale Stream Flowrate.
Then pick the stream to be scaled in the Stream Name drop-down
list box in the Product Stream Scaling window and select the
stream components on which the scaling rate is based with the ra-
dio button provided. The default is All Components. If a Range of
Components is selected, the starting and ending components are
chosen in drop-down list boxes and the scaling rate is applied to the
total of all components in this range.
The rate for the scaled product stream, either the total stream or a specified
range of components, is supplied in the data entry field provided. The Units
of Measure feature may be used to supply the scaling rate as moles, mass,
standard liquid volume units, or standard vapor volume units.
haa-scaleahle uall erallaas
Some unit operation results are not scaleable, that is, the calculated results are
dependent on the absolute flowthrough the unit. For example the calculated
pressure drop through a pipe of specified diameter depends on the flowthrough
the pipe and may not be directly scaled for other flowrates. PRO/II disables the
scaling option when unit operations are present which are non-scalable. The
following unit operations are non-scalable:
Column Hydraulics, Rigorous Heat Transfer, Pipe, Depressuring,
Plug Flow Reactor.
8parIIyIng aIaranra 8Iraams
A reference stream is a stream of identical composition to its parent
stream. When the composition of the parent stream changes, the
composition of the reference stream is immediately updated to be the
same as the parent stream. This concept is very useful in eliminating
thermal recycles in flowsheets.
Reference streams are designated by double-clicking the stream on the
PFD to retrieve the Stream Data main data entry window, selecting the
radio button Referenced to Stream, and choosing the parent stream in
the drop-down list box. Optionally, a rate may be supplied for the
reference stream. If not supplied, the rate of the parent stream is
assumed.
Optionally, a temperature and pressure may be specified for the
reference stream. If not specified, the thermal conditions of the parent
stream are used.
5pccifyii 0cmpcicit,T|crmcdyiamic aid 5trcam Lata FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
8-30
6opyIng 8IraamaIa
PRO/II allows you to copy the thermal and composition data for a
selected stream. Process data for a selected stream can be copied to a
new flowsheet stream or can be used to replace (overwrite) the
currently existing data in another selected stream.
6reallag a hew5lreamlramaa xlsllag 5lream
In the PRO/II main window:
Select the desired stream to copy by clicking on the stream label
with the mouse.
Choose Copy on the Edit menu.
Click the left mouse button on an unoccupied area of the PFD main
window or choose Select None on the Edit Menu to deselect the se-
lected stream.
The data for the selected stream can now be copied to a new stream as
follows:
Choose Paste on the Edit Menu.
The cursor will change to an arrow with a small s visible to indicate
that the PFD is now in stream mode.
Create a new stream by clicking the left mouse button on an unoc-
cupied area of the PFD main window or on one of the available exit
ports for a unit icon.
Drag the mouse to the desired unoccupied area of the PFD or feed
port of another unit.
Release the mouse button to complete the creation of the stream.
Create additional duplicate streams if desired, or
Click the right mouse button or press <Esc> to exit stream mode.
The newly created stream(s) will have the same thermal conditions,
composition, and description as the original source stream.
6aylag ala Framae xlsllag 5lreamla Aaalker xlsllag 5lream
In the PFD main window:
Select the desired stream to copy by clicking on the stream label
with the left mouse button.
Choose Copy on the Edit menu.
Click the left mouse button on an unoccupied area of the PFD main
window or choose Select None on the Edit menu to deselect the
selected stream.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 5pccifyii 0cmpcicit,T|crmcdyiamic aid 5trcam Lata
8-31
The data for the selected stream can now be copied to one or more
existing streams as follows:
Select the desired destination stream(s) with the left mouse button.
Choose Paste on the Edit menu.
The data from the original source stream will be copied to the destina-
tion stream(s), overriding any existing.
For compositionally-defined streams containing calculated data, PRO/II
allows the user to copy the calculated data (temperature, pressure, and
one of total composition, liquid composition, or vapor composition)
into the designated stream(s).
Select the desired compositionally-defined stream to copy by click-
ing on the stream.
Choose Copy on the Edit menu.
Select the desired destination stream(s) with the left mouse button.
Choose Paste Special on the Edit menu.
You may chose to paste only the input data of the selected stream or
paste the input data and calculated data (using the total composition, or
vapor composition, or liquid composition).
hale: For assay or reference streams, the Paste Special option is not
allowed.
6aylag laul 5lreamala Acrass 5lmulallaa alahases
The Stream Data Link feature described previously will only transfer
calculated data from the source stream to the input data slots of the
destination stream. To copy input stream data from one simulation
database to another, you must use the Windows Clipboard.
To transfer input stream data from one database to another:
Select the File/Open menu option to open the first database.
Highlight the stream of interest and copy the input data of this
stream to the Windows clipboard by using the Edit/Copy menu
option.
Open up the second database using the File/Open menu option.
Paste the clipboard data into the destination stream using the
Edit/Paste Special menu option.
5pccifyii 0cmpcicit,T|crmcdyiamic aid 5trcam Lata FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
8-3?
LInkIng 8IraamaIa krross 8ImuIaIIon aIabasas
The Stream Data Link feature allows for the transfer of calculated
stream data across PRO/II simulation databases. By using this feature,
you can copy calculated stream data from a source database to the input
data of a destination database. When modeling a large flowsheet, this
practical feature enables you to:
G Quickly make use of stream data previously calculated in an
upstream section of the plant
G Avoid possible simulation errors due to manual re-entry of
stream data
G Easily model each section of the flowsheet as a separate simu-
lation, with each section connected by a stream data link.
To define a Stream Data Link:
Highlight the stream to be linked to a previous database by clicking
on it.
Select the Define Stream Data Link option from the Input menu.
This brings up the Define Stream Data Link window as shown in Figure
7-15. In this window you must select both the name of the
previously-run database file, and the stream from that simulation to be
linked to your current simulation.
Click on the Define Link check box.
Enter the name of the previously-run database file, or click on the
Browse button to select from a list of available database files.
Enter the name of the stream from the previously-run database to
be linked to the stream in your current simulation, or click on the
Browse button to select from a list of available streams.
Click the Assay Characterization icon to return to the main PFD.
hale: You can link a stream in the current flowsheet to another stream
in the same flowsheet. This includes linking the input of the currently
selected stream to the calculated output data for that stream.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 5pccifyii 0cmpcicit,T|crmcdyiamic aid 5trcam Lata
8-33
pdaIIng 8IraamaIa LInks
You may update a stream data link while defining that link, or you may
update all defined links at a later time via the Input menu.
To update a Stream Data Link while defining that link:
Check the Update Now check box in the Define Stream Data Link
window.
Click the Modify button.
To update all defined Stream Data Links:
Select the Update Stream Data Links menu option from the Input
menu.
hale: If the components are different in the two simulation databases,
some component rate information may be discarded during the data
transfer. If the source stream has rate information for a component
which is not present in the second database, that rate information will
be ignored. If the source stream contains assay pseudocomponents, no
component data will be copied to the target stream unless an identical
assay exists in the current (target) simulation.
hale: All stream data link information will be lost if you export the
simulation data to a PRO/II keyword file and then re-import the key-
word file.
ellaery lasecllaa aaJ user-JellaeJ Fraerlles
Refinery Inspection Properties and User-defined Special Properties are
available in PRO/II for calculating bulk stream properties. The stream
values of the properties can be included in the PRO/II output and can be
used in performance specifications.
Refinery Inspection Properties comprises fifty-three predefined prop-
erties, commonly used by refineries for measuring and specifying unit
operation performance. Examples are cetane index, sulfur content,
pour point, kinematic viscosity.
User-defined Special Properties can be defined for any other property
for which component data or assay data can be provided. Possible
examples include autoignition temperature, color, $/tonne.
5pccifyii 0cmpcicit,T|crmcdyiamic aid 5trcam Lata FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
8-34
sIng aIInary InsparIIon FroparIIas and sardaIInad 8parIaI
FroparIIas In a FIoWshaaI
Refinery Inspection Properties and User-defined Special Properties are
used in the following ways:
lahally Tkraugk lke 6amaaeal Fraerlles WlaJaw
Global property data for each component in the flowsheet are entered
through the Component Properties window. Values entered here are
used everywhere in the flowsheet unless overridden through the Ther-
modynamic Data window, as described below.
Tkraugk lke 5lreamala WlaJaw
For streams that are to be defined in terms of assay curves, stream
values of Refinery Inspection Properties and User-defined Special
Properties can be entered either as curves or as average values or both.
Tkraugk lke TkermaJyaamlc ala WlaJaw
The properties that are to be used are specified in the Thermodynamic
Data window. If there is more than one thermodynamic system in the
flowsheet, some properties may be specified for use in one system and
others in another.
Component data for each specified property can also be entered for
each thermodynamic system. Any component data entered for a ther-
modynamic system will be used in preference to the data provided
globally wherever that thermodynamic system is invoked.
hale: A property is available only if it has been specified for a thermody-
namic system through the Thermodynamic Data window and is available
only in those unit operations where that thermodynamic system is used.
LnIarIng IobaI aIa Through Iha 6amaaeal Fraerlles WIndoW
Global component data are entered for each component through the
Component Properties window of PRO/II. Values entered here are used
everywhere in the flowsheet unless overridden through the Thermody-
namic Data window.
ellaery lasecllaa Fraerlles
To enter component refinery inspection property data globally:
Click on the Component Properties icon on the toolbar or select the
Input/Component Properties.... The Component Properties win-
dow appears.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 5pccifyii 0cmpcicit,T|crmcdyiamic aid 5trcam Lata
8-35
Click on the Refinery Inspection Properties button to bring up the
Component Property Selection for Refinery Inspection Properties
window.
Select a property from the Property Name drop-down list box.
Click the Enter Data... button to enter global values. If the prop-
erty is Kinematic Viscosity, the Component Data Entry for Kine-
matic Viscosity window will open. Otherwise the Component Data
Entry for Refinery Inspection and User-defined Special Properties
window will open.
For each component enter either a Data value or an Index value.
For some properties the index method is not applicable and no in-
dex values may be entered. If the property is Kinematic Viscosity,
enter values at two temperatures.
The stream property value is calculated from the individual component
values using a chosen stream mixing method.
hale: The SIMSCI databank contains Refinery Inspection Properties
for some components; these data will be used if no value is entered in
the input. If no data are present for a component, a fill method can be
chosen through the Thermodynamic Data window (see below).
sardaIInad 8parIaI FroparIIas
To enter component user-defined special property data globally:
Click on the Component Properties button on the toolbar or select
Input/Component Properties... from the menu bar. The Component
Properties window appears.
Click User-defined Special Properties to access the Component
Property Selection for User-defined Special Properties window.
Enter the name of a new Special Property in the Property Name
drop-down list box or select a special property from the list.
Click the Enter Data... button to enter global values. The Compo-
nent Data Entry for Refinery Inspection and User-defined Special
Properties window will open.
For each component enter either a Data value or an Index value.
LnIarIng kssay aIa Ihrough Iha 8IraamaIa WIndoW
For streams that are to be defined in terms of assay curves, stream
values of Refinery Inspection Properties and User-defined Special
Properties can be entered either as curves or as average values.
5pccifyii 0cmpcicit,T|crmcdyiamic aid 5trcam Lata FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
8-36
ellaery lasecllaa Fraerlles
To enter assay data for refinery inspection properties:
Double-click on the stream on the PFD. The Stream Data window
appears.
In the Stream Data window, click the Petroleum Assay radio button
and then click the Flowrate and Assay button to access the
Flowrate and Assay window.
In the Flowrate and Assay window, click Define/Edit Assay... to
access the Stream Data - Assay Definition window.
In the Stream Data - Assay Definition window, first click the ap-
propriate distillation method radio button and then click
Refinery Inspection Properties to access the Assay Property
Selection for Refinery Inspection Properties window.
Select a property from the Property Name drop-down list box.
Click the Enter Data... button to enter global values. If the Prop-
erty is Kinematic Viscosity, the Assay Data Entry for Kinematic
Viscosity window will open. Otherwise the Assay Data Entry for
Refinery Inspection and User-defined Special Properties window
will open.
Enter the property value(s) as either a stream average, curve against
Percent Distilled or both. If the property is Kinematic Viscosity,
enter values at two temperatures.
user-JellaeJ 5eclal Fraerlles
To enter assay data for user-defined special properties:
Double-click on the stream on the PFD. The Stream Data window
appears.
In the Stream Data window click Flowrate and Assay to access
the Flowrate and Assay window.
In the Flowrate and Assay window click Define/Edit Assay... to
access the Stream Data - Assay Definition window.
In the Stream Data - Assay Definition window click
User-defined Special Properties to access the Assay Property
Selection for User-defined Special Properties.
Enter the name of a new Special Property in the Property Name
drop-down list box or select a special property from the list.
Click the Enter Data... button to enter global values. The Assay
Data Entry for Refinery Inspection and User-defined Special
Properties window will open.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 5pccifyii 0cmpcicit,T|crmcdyiamic aid 5trcam Lata
8-37
Enter the property value(s) as either a stream average, curve against
Percent Distilled or both.
kssIgnIng aIInary InsparIIon FroparIIas and sardaIInad 8parIaI
FroparIIas Io TharmodynamIr 8ysIams
The properties that are to be used in the simulation must be specified
through the Thermodynamic Data window. If there is more than one
thermodynamic system in the flowsheet, some properties may be
specified for use in one system and others in another. A property is
available only if it has been specified for a thermodynamic system and
only in those unit operations where that thermodynamic system is used.
Component data for each specified property can also be entered for
each thermodynamic system. Any component data entered in a thermo-
dynamic system will be used in preference to the component Global
data wherever that thermodynamic system is invoked.
To assign refinery inspection properties to a Thermodynamic
System:
Click on the Thermodynamic Data button or select Thermodynamic
Data... on the Input menu bar item. The Thermodynamic Data
window appears.
Select the system for which modifications are to be made in the
Defined Systems box.
Click the Modify... button to access the Thermodynamic Data -
Modification Window.
Click the Refinery Inspection Properties button. The Thermody-
namic Method Selection for Refinery Inspection Properties window
appears. This window has a table in which properties and associ-
ated parameters and data will be entered. To eliminate the need to
enter standard sets of properties repeatedly, predefined lists of
properties have been set up.
To load the table with a predefined list of properties, select from
the Predefined Lists list. Selecting None in this list removes all
properties from the table.
Select a property from a Property Name drop-down list box in the
table. The available options and their default selections, deter-
mined by the property selected, are presented. Change these as
required. The options are:
5pccifyii 0cmpcicit,T|crmcdyiamic aid 5trcam Lata FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
8-38
G Stream Method, which defines the method used to mix the
component property values to produce a value for the stream.
The available options are:
Summation: The stream property value is determined by
summing the product of the component property value and
the component fraction. The fraction may be molar, weight
or liquid volume and is calculated from the total stream dry
composition except for kinematic viscosity when it is from
the dry liquid part of the stream. Any Index data supplied
for the property will be converted to property values before
the summation using the equation:
Value ReferenceValue
Index
Reference Index
=

Index: The stream property index is determined by sum-


ming the product of the component property index and the
component fraction. The fraction may be molar, weight or
liquid volume and is calculated from the total stream dry
composition except for kinematic viscosity when it is from
the dry liquid part of the stream. Before the summation,
any supplied property values will be converted to index
values using the equation:
Index Reference Index
Value
ReferenceValue
=

This equation is then used to convert the stream index value


to the stream property value.
User-Formula: The stream property value is determined
from the equation in a user-added subroutine which is
linked into PRO/II. Data values may be entered for each
component and up to 20 real and integer data values may
also be supplied.
User-Index: The stream property value is determined by a
user-added subroutine which is linked into PRO/II. The
same data as for the Index method is available to the user-
added subroutine.
SIMSCI: This method is only available for cloud point and
kinematic viscosity. It is an index method but uses specific
index equations.
API: API procedures may be used to calculate flash point,
cetane index, mean average boiling point, cubic average
boiling point, molal average boiling point or net heating
value. The API method requires no component data.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 5pccifyii 0cmpcicit,T|crmcdyiamic aid 5trcam Lata
8-39
Nelson: This is an alternative correlation to calculate flash
point and no component data are required.
G Stream Basis, which specifies whether the component values will
be mixed using their mole, weight or liquid volume fractions.
G Component Fill, which specifies the action to be taken when
component values are missing for petroleum fractions in the
stream. The available options are:
Zero: This option sets the property value to 0.0.
No fill: This produces warning messages for missing data
and set to 0.0.
SIMSCI: This option estimates missing data by SIMSCI
correlations for kinematic viscosity, smoke point, hydrogen
content, carbon content or carbon-hydrogen ratio.
API: This estimates missing data by API methods for kine-
matic viscosity, pour point or refractive index.
Nelson: This option estimates missing data by Nelson
method for smoke point.
G Component Blend, which defines the way in which missing
data are handled when calculating properties from blended
assay streams. The options are:
Zero: The property value for the cuts in the assay with no
data are set to 0.0.
Exclude: The property is calculated by blending only those
assays which have data for this property.
Missing: For this option, the blended property is not
calculated and is reported as Missing.
Click the Data... button to enter data for this property for this
thermodynamic system. If the Stream Method is defined as User-
Formula, the User Formula Data Entry window opens. Otherwise,
if the property is Kinematic Viscosity, the Kinematic Viscosity
Data Entry window will open and for other properties the Refinery
Inspection and User-defined Special Properties Data Entry window
will open.
In the Kinematic Viscosity Data Entry window or the Refinery
Inspection and User-defined Special Properties Data Entry
window, for each component enter either a Data value or an Index
value. For each component enter either a Data value or an Index
value. If an Index value is entered, Reference Index Data must
also be entered. For some properties the Index method is not appli-
cable and neither Index values nor Reference Index Data may be
entered. If the property is Kinematic Viscosity, enter values at two
temperatures.
5pccifyii 0cmpcicit,T|crmcdyiamic aid 5trcam Lata FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
8-40
In the User Formula Data Entry window, for each component enter a
Data value, which will be passed to a linked User-added Subroutine. Up
to twenty real and integer values an also be passed to the subroutine. The
meaning of the data are determined by the calculation subroutine.
sardaIInad 8parIaI FroparIIas
To assign user-defined special properties to a Thermodynamic
System:
Click on the Thermodynamic Data icon or select Thermodynamic
Data... on the Input menu bar item. The Thermodynamic Data
window appears.
Select the system for which modifications are to be made in the
Defined Systems list box.
Click the Modify... button to access the Thermodynamic Data
Modification Window.
Click the User-defined Properties button. The Thermodynamic
Method Selection for User defined Properties window appears.
This window has a table in which Properties and associated
parameters and data will be entered.
Enter the name of a new Special Property in the Property Name
drop-down list box or select a special property from the list.
Change the available options and their default selections as
required. The options are:
G Stream Method, which defines the method used to mix the
component property values to produce a value for the stream.
G Stream Basis, which specifies whether the component values will
be mixed using their mole, weight or liquid volume fractions.
G Component Blend, which defines the way in which missing
data are handled when calculating properties from blended
assay streams.
Click the Data... button to enter data for this property for this
thermodynamic system. If the Stream Method is defined as User-
Formula, the User Formula Data Entry window opens. Otherwise
the Refinery Inspection and User-defined Special Properties Data
Entry window will open.
In the Refinery Inspection and User-defined Special Properties
Data Entry window, for each component enter either a Data value
or an Index value. If an Index value is entered, Reference Index
Data must also be entered.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 5pccifyii 0cmpcicit,T|crmcdyiamic aid 5trcam Lata
8-41
In the User Formula Data Entry window, for each component enter
a Data value, which will be passed to a linked User-added Subrou-
tine. Up to twenty real and integer values an also be passed to the
subroutine. The meaning of the data are determined by the calcula-
tion subroutine.
hale: If you have assigned Refinery Inspection Properties to a
Thermodynamic method set, the standard Stream Data Report will in-
clude these Refinery Inspection properties.
FrInIIng aIInary InsparIIon FroparIIas and sardaIInad 8parIaI
FroparIIas
Refinery Inspection Properties and User-defined Special Properties can
be included in PRO/II output reports.
Select Report Format fromthe Output menu. Then select the Miscellaneous
Data... menu option. The Miscellaneous Report Options windowappears.
In the Refinery Inspection and User-defined Special Properties box
check one or both of the following options: Include Input Data for a
printout or data that has been input and/or Input Program Data for a
printout of data generated by PRO/II.
For output of kinematic viscosity data:
Select Report Format from the Output menu. Then select the
Stream Properties... menu option. The Stream Property Report
Options window appears.
Enter two temperatures at which the kinematic viscosity results are
required.
5pccifyii 0cmpcicit,T|crmcdyiamic aid 5trcam Lata FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
8-4?
8vL (vallJallag qulllhrlum ala)
Tables and plots of binary equilibriumdata for given pairs of components may
be generated in order to ensure that they are valid in the required range of
operation. Any thermodynamic VLE or VLLE K-value method may be used.
For liquid activity thermodynamic methods (e.g., NRTL or UNIFAC)
the following are calculated:
G K-values,
G Liquid activity coefficients,
G Vapor fugacity coefficients,
G Vapor pressures, and
G Poynting correction.
For non-liquid activity methods, such as equations of state or
generalized correlations, the following are determined:
G K-values,
G Liquid fugacity coefficients, and
G Vapor fugacity coefficients.
The validation is carried out in the PRO/II - Binary VLE/VLLE Data
window which is opened by selecting the Binary VLE option from the
Tools menu or by clicking on the BVLE toolbar button. This window is
only available when at least two components and a thermodynamic
method have been selected.
To generate a BVLE plot or table:
Select the Binary VLE option from the Tools menu or click on the
BVLE toolbar button to bring up the PRO/II - Binary VLE/VLLE
Data window.
Select the required components for the equilibrium calculations
from the drop-down lists.
Then, select constant pressure or temperature operation and enter
the value.
Finally, click on the Calculate button to generate plots (by
default, all available plots will be generated). If Excel is selected on
the Plot Setup option on the Options menu, tabular data are avail-
able in the spreadsheet. Otherwise, only the plots are shown.
hale: For complete technical details see the Utilities topic in the
PRO/II Reference Manual.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 5pccifyii 0cmpcicit,T|crmcdyiamic aid 5trcam Lata
8-43
This page intentionally left blank.
5pccifyii 0cmpcicit,T|crmcdyiamic aid 5trcam Lata FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
8-44
6kaler 9
uall erallaas aaJ ullllly MaJules
This chapter describes how to use unit operation models. Also
described are the use of utility modules such as the Calculator,
Controller, Flowsheet Optimizer and similar functionalities.
For ease of reference, both the unit operation models and the utility
modules are presented together in alphabetical order:
6alculalar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
6aluma, 8alck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
6aluma, lsllllallaa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
6aluma, LlqulJ-LlqulJ xlracllaa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
6aluma, 5lJe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
6amressar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42
6aalraller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45
6ryslalllzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48
6yclaae . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51
eressurlzlag uall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57
lssalver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52
xaaJer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53
Flask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55
Flask wllk 5allJs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59
Flawskeel llmlzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-70
heal xckaager, Lh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-75
heal xckaager, lgaraus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-77
heal xckaager, 5lmle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-85
heallag/6aallag 6urves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-89
Mlxer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-93
Mulllvarlahle 6aalraller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-94
Fkase avelae . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-97
Fle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-99
FraceJure ala . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-105
Fum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-113
eacllaa ala . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-114
eaclar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-118
eaclar, 8alck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-128
eaclar, Falymer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-104
5allJs 5earalar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-129
5llller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-130
5lream 6alculalar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-132
5F6/vA/Flh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-135
user-AJJeJ erallaas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-151
valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-153
WleJ Fllm vaaralar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-154
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-1
6AL6uLAT
anaraI InIormaIIon
The Calculator is a versatile utility module useful for a variety of
purposes in flowsheet simulation. Parameters may be retrieved from
the flowsheet and calculations performed using a FORTRAN-like
language. Parameters may be returned to the flowsheet for use by other
unit operations. Some uses for the Calculator include:
G Calculating special stream properties
G Simulating special processing units such as reactors
G Determining operating conditions for other unit operations
G Performing design calculations using flowsheet information
G Producing special output values for reports
G Computing utility costs and economic functions
G Calculating target values for Controllers or objective functions
for Flowsheet Optimizers
This is by no means an exhaustive list; the usefulness of this module is
limited only by the ingenuity of the user.
All Calculators have two main sections: Setup and Procedure. In the
setup section, unit and stream parameters are retrieved from the flowsheet,
constants are defined, names are assigned to calculated results, a sequence
table is set up for the streams used for input and output, and the dimensions
for the various working arrays may be expanded if desired.
The Procedure section is where all calculations are performed, using a simple
language based on FORTRAN77. The language permits the use of mathe-
matical functions, branching and looping, and assignment statements
commonly used in programming. Special intrinsic functions are available for
retrieving flowsheet component and streaminformation. Special subroutines
are provided for storing calculated results directly in flowsheet streams. Calcu-
lated results may also be stored in the Results array, making themavailable to
the other unit operations in PRO/II. Aspecial solution flag is provided for
use when a Calculator models a unit operation.
6aIruIaIor 8aIup
Start Setup by clicking the Edit/View Declarations button on the
Calculator main data entry window to open the View Area:
Click the Parameters button to retrieve flowsheet parameters
into the Calculator. These variables are accessed in the Calculator
procedure as elements of array P. Click the Calculator parameter
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-?
linked text to open the Definition window where you can specify
the stream or unit flowsheet parameter to be retrieved. The format
for this window is identical to that used for the DEFINE and is de-
scribed in the SPEC/VARY/DEFINE section of this chapter. There
you will also find a list of the unit and stream parameters that may
be retrieved via DEFINE.
linked text to open the Definition window where you can specify
the stream or unit flowsheet parameter to be retrieved. The format
for this window is identical to that used for the DEFINE and is de-
scribed in the SPEC/VARY/DEFINE section of this chapter. There
you will also find a list of the unit and stream parameters that may
be retrieved via DEFINE.
Click the Constants button to enter the constant values. These
variables are accessed in the Calculator procedure as elements of
array C. Although you can enter constants directly in the proce-
dure, this array provides a means for collecting constants that need
to be updated occasionally into a common location.
Click the Results button to enter names for the Calculator re-
sults. These values are accessed in the Calculator procedure as ele-
ments of array R. These names will be used in the output report.
Click the Stream Sequence button to define an ordered table of
flowsheet streams. There are two functions for this table. First, it
provides a necessary link between the procedure and the flowsheet
streams for information flow. Second, a calculation loop may be
performed in the procedure for a range of streams, using the posi-
tions of the streams in the table to control the loop order.
Click the Arrays button to declare the length of the storage ar-
rays used by the Calculator. These arrays include the P, C, R arrays
defined above, and the IS array that is used to hold stream vari-
ables. This array is described in the Calculator Procedure discus-
sion. Two additional arrays appear here. In earlier versions of the
Calculator, all local variables had to reside in one of these arrays, V
for real variables and IX for integers. Now that any valid FOR-
TRAN variable name can be used, these arrays are no longer
needed. Nonetheless, they are still available so that older Calcula-
tors will work without rewriting.
Once Setup is complete, click the Hide Declarations button to close
the View Area.
6aIruIaIor Froradura
hale: The PROCEDURE section is required and must end with a RE-
TURN statement.
The FORTRAN procedure is entered directly into the Procedure field
on the Calculator main data entry window. The procedure may be
checked as is it composed by clicking the Check Procedure button.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-3
The supported features of the language are discussed in the sections
following.
The supported features of the language are discussed in the sections
following.
LIamanIs oI Iha Languaga
Each statement may contain up to 80 characters. The ampersand (&) at
the end of a line denotes continuation of a statement on the following
line. Note than an asterisk (*) is not valid as a continuation marker,
since it signifies multiplication.
All lines of code except the PROCEDURE statement may be preceded by
a unique numeric label from 1 to 99999 (shown as nn in this
manual).
A dollar sign ($) causes all following characters on the remainder of the
line to be interpreted as a comment rather than as code. Unlike in
FORTRAN, a C in column one does not designate a comment
statement.
Predefined Variables
Definitions of predefined variables, including default dimensions for
arrays, appear in the following table. Use a DIMENSION statement in the
Calculator setup section to reset the number of elements in each array.
Arrays C, P, V, and R store values in floating-point form. Array IX stores
integer values. Forms of use include:
An
where A is any of C, P, V, R, or B and n is an integer indicating a single
element of the array.
A(index)
where A is any of C, P, V, R, or B and (index) is an expression, such as
(IX2 * 5). The parentheses are required. A(n) denotes the same element
as An.
Instead of, or in addition to, the supplied V and IX arrays, standard
FORTRAN variables may be used. They may be up to 8 characters long
and may not duplicate the names of any supplied variables; otherwise
they follow the conventional FORTRAN rules. The introduction of this
feature in PRO/II 5.0 means that the V and IX arrays need not be used. If
this is the case, the arrays can be dimensioned to one word each to save
memory.
Array IS normally is used as the index of a DO loop to step through a
sequence of streams in the order defined on the SEQUENCE statement.
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-4
It may serve as the stream index in PRO/II intrinsic functions. The only
form allowed is ISn. IS(index) is never valid.
Predefined Variables
Variable Name
and Form
Default Dimension
(for arrays)
Description and Comments
Cn or 6(index) 1=n=5O Constant values delined in the setu section. used only
on the right hand side ol assignment statements
Pn or F(index) 1=n=5O Flowsheet arameters set by BEFhE statements. used
only on the right hand side ol assignment statements.
Vn or V(index) 1=n=2OO A lloatingoint work array used on either the lelt or
right hand side ol assignment statements. These ele
ments are initiali/ed to a large negative value and are
not available outside the calculator.
Rn or (index) 1=n=2OO The array ol calculator results, used on either side ol as
signment statements. This results vector is available to
other llowsheet modules external to the 0a|c0|atcr. These
elements are initiali/ed to a large negative value.
IXn or IX(index) O=n=O An array ol integer values. The lorm"X(index) is invalid
on a B0 statement. t may be used on either side ol as
signment statements.
ISn O=n=O An array ol elements used as indices ol B0 loos lor ste
ing through a series ol streams in the order delined on
the SE0uEhCE statement.
I8LVL This variable indicates whether or not the Calculator
solved. t is initiali/ed to O uon each entry into the cal
culation rocedure. The user assigns all subsequent
values using an assignment statement.
O The 0a|c0|atcr has not yet executed (delault) or has
solved successlully.
1 The 0a|c0|atcr solved.
2 The 0a|c0|atcr did not solve, but continue llow
sheet calculations within a recycle loo.
8 The 0a|c0|atcr did not solve, all calculations sto
unconditionally.
4 The 0a|c0|atcr solved, but sto all subsequent
llowsheet calculations. This sets the llowsheet
solution llag to 'S0LvEB'.
MkX6 Total number ol comonents in the roblem.
MkX8 Maximum number ol streams in the roblem.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-5
FTAh 5lalemeals
PROCEDURE
This statement marks the start of the FORTRAN-based procedure
section of the Calculator. It is required.
arIaraIIon 8IaIamanIs
REAL rname1, rname2(i), rname3(j,k) ...
INTEGER iname
1
, iname
2
(i), iname
3
(j,k) ...
DIMENSION name
1
(i), name
2
(j,k) ...
These statements are used to define local scalars and arrays for use in
the code. Each subscript may be an integer constant, or two integer
constants separated by a colon to specify both the lower and upper
array bounds. When defined by the DIMENSION statement, variables
assume the normal FORTRAN convention that assigns names starting
with I through N as integers, and all others as real. Name lengths may
be 8 characters long. Variables defined here may be changed in the
code. Variables not defined here are assumed to be real or integer
according to the first character.
Variable names must not conflict with any reserved words or predefined
variables (see table entitled Predefined Variables).
Examples:
DIMENSION A(20,20), B(20), X(20)
REAL MASS
INTEGER COUNT, TAB(100)
REAL REVENU(1990:1995), PROFIT(1990:1995),
LOSS(1990:1995)
hale: A variable may only appear once in these statements. The follow-
ing is valid in standard FORTRAN, but not in a Calculator Procedure:
REAL MOLWT
DIMENSION MOLWT(50)
Both standard FORTRAN and the Calculator accept this equivalent
form:
REAL MOLWT(50)
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-6
kssIgnmanI 8IaIamanIs
nn variable =expression
The expression is governed by standard FORTRAN conventions. The
operations on a given statement are executed in the following order:
1. Expressions within parentheses ( )
2. Functions
3. Exponential (**)
4. Multiplications and divisions (*,/)
5. Additions and subtractions (+,-)
With the exception of exponentiation, calculations with the same prece-
dence are evaluated from left to right. Multiple exponentiations without
parentheses to explicitly specify the evaluation order are not permitted.
For example, the following is invalid:
BADVAL = A**B**C
|ctc: The Calculator-supplied arrays C and P may not appear on the
left side of an assignment statement.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-7
FORTRANIntrinsic Functions
The FORTRAN intrinsic functions tabulated below can be used in
expressions:
FORTRAN Intrinsic Functions
Function Description Arguments Type of Result
humber Tye
A8S
BM
EXF
hT
L00
L001O
Mh
MAX
M0B
hhT
S0RT
Sh
C0S
TAh
ASh
AC0S
ATAh
Shh
C0Sh
TAhh
Absolute value
Fositive Billerence
Exonential e
Truncation
hatural Logarithm
Common Logarithm
Minimum value
Maximum value
Remainder
hearest integer
Square Root
Sine (radians)
Cosine (radians)
Tangent (radians)
Arc Sine (radians)
Arc Cosine (rad)
Arc Tangent (rad)
hyerbolic Sine
hyerbolic Cosine
hyerbolic Tangent
1
2
1
1
1
1
>=2
>=2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
real
real
real
real
real
real
real
real
real
real
real
real
real
real
real
real
real
real
real
real
real
real
real
integer
real
real
real
real
real
integer
real
real
real
real
radian
radian
real
real
real
real
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-8
PRO/II Intrinsic Functions
The following table lists special functions that allow direct retrieval of
stream and component properties. In the table, cno represents an
integer component number which is an integer constant or variable,
sid is a stream identifier or ISn value. This identifier must appear on
the SEQUENCE statement to be used by a PRO/II intrinsic function.
Property values are retrieved in the UOM used for problem input.
PRO/II Intrinsic Functions
Function Description of Property
Fura 6omponanI FroparIIas
CMW(cno)
6h8F(cno)
68F(cno)
6T6(cno)
6F6(cno)
6V6(cno)
6MLk(cno)
Molecular weight
hormal boiling temerature
Secilic gravity (GOF/GOF)
Critical temerature
Critical ressure
Critical volume, cc/gmmole
Acentric lactor
FroparIIas oI 6omponanIs In 8Iraams
SCMF(cno,sid)
SCWF(cno,sid)
SCVF(cno,sid)
SCMR(cno,sid)
SCWR(cno,sid)
SCLVR(cno,sid)
SCGVR(cno,sid)
Molar lraction ol comonent in stream
weight lraction ol comonent in stream
Standard liquid volume lraction
Molar rate ol comonent in stream
weight rate ol comonent in stream
Standard liquid volume rate ol comonent
Standard gas volume rate ol comonent
8Iraam FroparIIas
SMR(sid)
SWR(sid)
SLVR(sid)
SGVR(sid)
STEMP(sid)
SPRES(sid)
Mole rate ol stream
weight rate ol stream
Standard liquid volume rate ol stream
Standard gas volume rate ol stream
Stream temerature
Stream ressure
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-9
StreamProperty Storage Subroutines
nn CALL SRXSTR(type, value, sid) A call to SRXSTR stores a Calculator
vector element as a property of stream sid. Values being stored must
be computed in the dimensional units used for data input. The resulting
stream is flashed at the new conditions to determine its thermodynamic
state.
type This entry identifies the stream property to store. Available
options are tabulated below.
Stream Properties Stored by SRXSTR
type= Description
SMR
SWR
SLVR
SGVR
STEMP
SPRES
mole rate ol stream
weight rate ol stream
standard liquid volume rate
standard gas volume rate ol stream
stream temerature
stream ressure
value This argument supplies or identifies the value of the property
to store. It can be a real constant or variable.
sid The sid entry identifies the stream in which to store the property.
It may be any stream identifier listed on the SEQUENCE statement of
the setup section, or an element of array IS in the form Isn. For exam-
ple:
CALL SRXSTR(STEMP, R(14), SR4)
stores the value of element 14 from array R as the temperature of stream
SR4.
nn CALL SRVSTR(type, array, sid, i, j) A call to SRVSTR stores a range
of values representing component stream properties from a Calculator
array into a stream. The resulting stream is flashed at the new condi-
tions to determine its thermodynamic state.
type This entry identifies the component property to store in the
stream. Available options are listed in in the following table.
Stream Component Properties Stored by SRVSTR
type= Description
SCMR
SCWR
SCLVR
SCGVR
molar rate ol comonent in stream
weight rate ol comonent in stream
comonent standard ol liquid volume rate
comonent standard gas volume rate
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-10
array The initial element of a real Calculator array containing val-
ues to store as properties of components in a stream.
sid The sid entry identifies the stream in which to store the property.
It may be any stream identifier listed on the SEQUENCE statement of
the setup section, or an element of array IS in the form ISn.
i, j These two entries are component id numbers. They indicate the
first and last components, respectively, for which the property is stored.
For example, the statement
100 CALL SRVSTR( SCWR, V(12), FD1, 2, 5 )
stores elements V(12) - V(15) as the weight flow rates of components
2 through 5 in stream FD1. Stream FD1 is re-flashed using the new com-
position with the previous temperature and pressure.
6aIruIaIIonaI FIoW6onIroI Statements
nn GOTOmm This is the standard FORTRAN statement that
branches to label mm unconditionally. GO TO written as two words is
also supported.
nn CONTINUE This statement serves as a branch destination or the
end of a DO loop. It performs no calculations.
IF Statements
nn IF (expression) conditional clause This statement allows logical branch-
ing during calculations and conforms to standard FORTRAN rules for
IF statements. If the parenthetic expression is true, it executes the
conditional clause. The conditional clause may not be one of the fol-
lowing:
REAL
INTEGER
DIMENSION
IF
ELSEIF
ELSE
ENDIF
DO
RETURN
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-11
The following table lists logical operators allowed in the expression.
Logical Operators in IF Statements
Operator Description
.EQ.
.NE.
.LT.
.GT.
.GE.
.LE.
.AND.
.OR.
.EQV.
.NEQV.
.NOT.
equal to
not equal to
less than
greater than
greater than or equal to
less than or equal to
both true
either true
equivalent
not equivalent
true/lalse toggle
nn IF (expression) THEN
ELSEIF (expression) THEN
ELSE
ENDIF
These statements conform to standard FORTRAN IF-THEN-ELSE state-
ments, allowing for structured branching of code. ELSE IF and
END IF written as two words are also accepted. Block IF constructs
may be nested.
DOLoops
nn DOmminame= i, j, k This statement defines the beginning of a DO
loop having a range extending through statement label mm. i and j
are initial and final indices respectively. The increment step k is op-
tional and defaults to 1.
nn DO mm ISn= sid1, sid2 This statement defines the beginning of a
stream DO loop having a range extending through statement label mm.
ISn is a stream variable, and sid1 and sid2 must be stream ids appearing
on the SEQUENCE statement. No incremental step index (comparable
to k) is allowed.
FLh 8IaIamanI
nn OPEN(FILE=fileide, ACCESS=OVERWRITE or APPEND)
The OPEN statement opens a file for CALCULATOR output. For PC,
VAX, and UNIX platforms, the default output name is fileid.CAL, where
fileid is the current input file name. A unique filename of up to 12 charac-
ters, can be specified, if necessary. It must, however, have a .CAL
extension. Underscore characters are not allowed (e.g., FILE_01). Any
OPEN statement automatically closes the previously opened file.
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-1?
WITL and FMkT 8IaIamanIs
nn WRITE (*, format) expression, expression, ...
nn FORMAT (item, item, ...)
These statements allow output using full FORTRAN format control.
Output will be to the file most recently opened with the OPEN
statement. The WRITE statement list may include constants, variables,
expressions, or array names. Specifying an array name causes all
elements of the array to be written.
The WRITE statement refers to a FORMAT statement defining the output
format. The following standard FORTRAN format items are supported.
Format Items Function
nIw.d Output integer data
nFw.d, nEw.dEe, nDw.d, nGw.dEe Output real data
xxxxx, nHxxxxx Output character constants
Tn, TLn, TRn, nX Tab control
kP Scale factor
S, SS, SP Control of sign output
/, : Line control
n(...) Grouping
TFT 8IaIamanI
nn OUTPUT {R( i : j ), P( i : j ), C( i : j ), V( i : j ), IX( i : j ), IS ( i : j )}
This is a special OUTPUT statement provided with PRO/II. It outputs
calculator-supplied arrays or portions of these arrays to the currently
open file. Entries i and j refer to the first and last elements of the
array to be output. If they are absent, the entire array will be output.
I8FLkY 8IaIamanI
nn DISPLAY {R( i : j ), P( i : j ), C( i : j ), V( i : j ), IX( i : j ), IS( i : j )}
The DISPLAY statement prints out calculator-supplied array values to
the standard report file during calculations. Entries i and j are
defined in the same way as the OUTPUT statement.
Tk6L 8IaIamanI
nn TRACE option
TRACE statements control printing an historical trace as calculations
proceed to facilitate debugging the code in the procedure. Options are:
ON Prints line number, statement number, and (action taken/new
variable value) as each statement executes.
BRANCH Prints TRACE information only for branching statements
such as IF, GOTO or DO.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-13
OFF Turns off all TRACE options.
Examples:
TRACE BRANCH Traces branching only.
TRACE OFF No trace at all.
TRACE ON Traces every statement.
Calculation Termination Statements
nn STOP This statement stops all flowsheet calculations and proceeds
directly to the output report. The solution flag for the entire flowsheet
is set according to the user-defined value of ISOLVE.
nn RETURN The RETURN statement signals the end of the calculation
procedure of the Calculator and must appear as the last statement in the
procedure section. Only one RETURN statement is allowed. The solu-
tion flag for the Calculator is set according to the user-defined value of
ISOLVE. RETURN always sets TRACE to OFF.
5amle 6alculalar FraceJures
Example 1: Determination of Flash Point
Use Nelsons method to estimate the flash point from D86 distillation
characterization data. This sample shows how to calculate the flash
points of streams V1, V2, V3, V4, V5, and V6 using the formula:
P= 0.64 * (D86(10)+D86(ip))/2.0 - 100.0
where the D86 points are in F. The final results in C are stored in R(1)
through R(6).
Before entering the procedure FORTRAN code, it is necessary to
specify the streams (V1 through V6) and establish the two pertinent
parameters (the D86 10% and IBP temperatures) for each stream:
Open the Calculator main data entry window by double-clicking on
the Calculator icon on the PFD.
Click on the Edit/View Declarations button to display the View
Area box. Click on the Parameters buttons to display the Pa-
rameters data entry table.
Enter a number in the Parameter Number data entry field to enable
the Calculator Parameter linked text. Click on the linked text to
opens Definitions window.
Check the Set Up Definition for Calculator Parameter P(1) box to
enable the Calculator Parameter = Parameter linked text.
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-14
Click the Parameter hypertext to open the Parameter window
where you can specify whether the parameter will be a constant, a
stream parameter or a unit parameter. The Constant/Stream/Unit
list box displays a list with the options Constant, Stream and
the various types of unit operations that have been placed on the
flowsheet.
For this sample problem, select the Stream option and choose V1
from the Stream Name: drop-down list box. Choosing a stream
name enables the Parameter hypertext.
Click the linked text to open the Parameter Selection data entry
window.
For this sample, choose Distillation Curve from the options in the
Parameter window. The center window will now display the avail-
able distillation curve options. Select D86 from the distillation
curve options and choose the desired cut point (here, 10%) from the
Volume Percent Distillate drop-down list box.
This completes the parameter specification for the D86(10%) point of
the first stream, V1. Repeat these steps to define the D86(Initial Point)
for the first stream, V1, then define the D86(10%) and D86(Initial
Point) for the remaining five streams.
Enter the following code into the Procedure window (at this point
this window should still be outlined in red).
DIMENSIOND8610(6), D86IP(6)
DO10 I = 1, 6
$
$ COPY PARAMETERS TOLOCAL ARRAYS,
$ CONVERTINGTODEGF
D8610(I) = P(2*I-1) * 1.8 + 32.
D86IP(I) = P(2*I-1) * 1.8 + 32.
$
$ EVALUATE FORMULA
D86AVG = (D8610(I) + D86IP(I)) / 2.
FP = (D86AVG* .64 - 100.
$
$ CONVERT BACKTODEGCANDSTORE
R(I) = (FP - 32.) / 1.8
10 CONTINUE
RETURN
Commit the code by clicking the OK button.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-15
Example 2: Material Balancing with the Calculator
This sample demonstrates the use of the Calculator to compute the
material balance of hydrogen (component 2) about a recycle loop. We
will set the solution flag to indicate unit not solved if the hydrogen
balance is not met to within 0.01% based on the overall feeds. This
specification forces the recycle to continue iterating, even if the flowing
streams have changed less than the flowsheet stream tolerance. See the
ISOLVE and ISn entries in the Predefined Variables table on page 9-5 for
a listing of solution flags and for an explanation of the use of the ISn
variable in SEQUENCE statements.
Before entering the procedure code, we must:
G Establish the Stream Sequence for the recycle loop.
G Provide a label for the Result.
Establishing the Stream Sequence:
The streams pertinent to this example are a hydrogen feed stream
(H2FD), two feed streams (FD1, FD2), a purge gas stream (PURG),
and vapor and liquid product streams (PRDV, PRDL).
To set up the stream sequence that will be used by the Calculator, carry
out the following steps:
Open the Calculator main data entry window by double-clicking on
the Calculator icon.
Click on the on the Stream Sequence button to display two win-
dows, one containing a list of Available Streams and the other a list
of Selected Streams.
Add the streams H2FD, FD1, FD2, PURG, PRDV and PRDL in the
given order. If you add the streams in the wrong order, you can eas-
ily change their sequence by removing the improperly positioned
stream from the Selected Streams window and reinserting it before
or after the appropriate stream that you have highlighted in the Se-
lected Streams window.
Labeling the Result:
When you have established the desired stream sequence, click on
the Results button to display the Result Number and Print Name
data entry table.
Enter 1 in the Result Number field of the first row to enable the
Print Name entry field. This integer is stored in the first position of
the R() array. For this sample problem, call the result Relative
MB.
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-16
Enter the following code into the Procedure window, which should
still be outlined in red at this point:
$ SUMUP H2 INFEEDSTREAMS
$ HYDROGENIS THE SECONDCOMPONENT INTHE COMPONENT LIST
$ SCMR(2, n) IS THE MOLARFLOWRATE INTHE nth STREAM
$
H2FEED = 0.0
DO10 IS1 = H2FD, FD2
H2FEED = H2FEED+ SCMR(2,IS1)
10 CONTINUE
$
$ CHECKIF ANY H2 INFEED. IF NOT, SET NOT SOLVED FLAG.
$
IF (H2FEED.LT. 0.0001) THEN
R(1) = 0
ISOLVE = 2
GOTO99
ENDIF
$
$ SUMUP H2 INPRODUCTS
$
H2PROD= 0.0
DO20 IS1 = PURG, PRDL
H2PROD = H2PROD+ SCMR(2, IS1)
20 CONTINUE
$ CALCULATE IMBALANCE
$
R(1) = (H2FEED- H2PROD) / H2FEED
$
$ CHECKIF INBALANCE. IF SO, RETURN.
$ IF NOT, SET NOT SOLVED FLAG.
$
IF(ABS(R(1)).LE.0.001) THEN
ISOLVE =1
ELSE
ISOLVE =2
ENDIF
$
99 RETURN
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-17
6LuMh, 8AT6h
anaraI InIormaIIon
The Batch Column unit operation models a wide range of column
operating scenarios. The Batch Column unit may be run in a true batch
simulation mode, with the feedstock charged to the stillpot prior to
distillation and products taken from the accumulator at various times,
or in a semi-batch mode where feedstock may be introduced during
distillation and products drawn from the column or accumulator over
some time interval. Batch distillation calculations may also be inte-
grated into a steady-state process simulation. The unit configuration
automatically considers the presence of implicit holding tanks for
continuous flow streams which provide the time-variant feedstock to
the batch unit. Implicit consideration of holding tanks for all product
streams (as drawn from the accumulator at different times, or as drawn
from the column during distillation) is also made because of the cyclic
operation. A representation of the product continuous flow stream
comes from the amount of product divided by the batch cycle time.
TharmodynamIr 8ysIam
The thermodynamic system for the Batch Column may be specified for
the unit as a whole or for selected trays. Batch Column also allows the
use of electrolyte thermodynamic methods.
aIaIIad InIormaIIon
For detailed information about the use of the Batch Column unit
operation, consult the PRO/II Add-On Modules Users Guide.
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-18
6LuMh, l5TlLLATlh
anaraI InIormaIIon
The Column unit operation may be used to simulate any distillation or
liquid-liquid extraction process. Liquid-liquid extraction units are
described in the Liquid-Liquid Extraction Column section of this
chapter. A column must contain at least one equilibrium stage or theo-
retical tray. For purposes of this discussion, the term trays is used to
denote equilibrium stages. The trays are considered to be linked with
the vapor from each tray entering the next higher tray and the liquid
from each tray feeding the next lower tray. There is no limit on the
number of trays in a column model.
The condenser, when present, is always numbered as tray one and the
reboiler, when present, is assigned the highest tray number in the
model. Any tray may have a feed, product draw, or duty. The top and
bottom trays must have either a feed or a duty.
Distillation columns may simulate vapor/liquid, vapor/liquid/water or
vapor/liquid/liquid equilibrium processes.
Faads and FrodurIs
Column feeds and products are added during the flowsheet construction
in the PFD main window. Click the Column Feeds and Products
button on the Column main data entry window to open the Column
Feeds and Products window.
Feed tray numbers may be added or changed in this window. There is
no limit on the number of feeds a column may have. The feed flash
convention to use for all feeds to the distillation column is selected with
radio buttons as:
Vapor and IIquId Io ba on Iha Iaad Iray. The default.
FIash Iha Iaad adIabaIIraIIy, vapor onIo Iha Iray abova and IIquId onIo Iha Iaad Iray.
For this option, the vapor is placed on the feed tray when the feed tray
is the bottom tray of the column.
For products, the product type, phase, tray number, and flowrate are
supplied in this window. There is no limit on the number of products a
distillation column may have and products may be withdrawn from any
tray of the column. Product types include: Overhead, Bottoms, Fixed Rate
Draw, Total Phase Draw, and Pseudoproduct. Every column must have an
overhead product leaving tray one and a bottoms product leaving the
highest numbered tray. The Sure, Inside-Out (IO) and Enhanced IO algo-
rithms may have a decanted water product from tray one (the condenser).
The Sure algorithm may also have water draws from any tray. For
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-19
vapor/liquid/liquid equilibrium (VLLE) processes, either of the liquid
phases may be drawn from any tray in the column.
You must supply product rates for all fixed rate draw products in molar,
mass, or liquid volume units. You must also provide an estimated value
for either the overhead or bottoms product. For total draw products, the
supplied rate is always assumed to be an estimate. The estimated value
for the overhead or bottoms rate should be as accurate as possible to
enhance convergence. You must use a Performance Specification to set
a desired flow for the overhead or bottoms product.
FsaudoprodurIs
Pseudoproducts are used to create streams corresponding to column
internal streams, making them available for flowsheet calculations.
Define pseudoproducts in the Column Pseudoproducts window which
you may reach by clicking the Pseudoproducts button on the Column
Feeds and Products window. The following types of pseudoproducts
are available:
G Net tray liquid or vapor flow
G Total tray liquid or vapor flow
G Pumparound liquid or vapor bypass flow
G Thermosiphon reboiler feeds and products
Thermosiphon reboiler streams are limited to the Inside-Out algorithm.
6oIumn kIgorIIhm
Select the solution algorithm in the drop-down list box on the Column
main data entry window. The available algorithms are: Inside-Out (the
default), Sure, Chemdist, Liquid-Liquid, Enhanced IO, and Electrolytic.
Detailed information about the column algorithms is available in the
online help.
InsIdauI. The Inside-Out algorithm is the preferred option for most
distillation problems, especially those involving systems of hydrocar-
bons, because of its speed and insensitivity to the estimated solution
profiles.
8ura. The Sure algorithm should be used for columns where free water
exists on multiple trays.
6hamdIsI. The Chemdist algorithm is well suited to highly non-ideal
systems and VLLE processes.
LIquIdLIquId The Liquid-Liquid algorithm is used to model liquid-
liquid extraction units described in the Liquid-Liquid Extraction
Column section of this chapter.
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-?0
Lnhanrad I. The Enhanced IO column algorithm extends the capabili-
ties of the default Inside-Out algorithm. Enhanced IO allows zero
flowrates, water decant off any tray, total draws from trays and pumpa-
rounds.
LIarIroIyIIr. The Electrolytic method is used to model non-ideal aqueous
electrolytic distillation columns involving ionic species. Refer to the
PRO/II Add-On Modules Users Guide for detailed information on this
column algorithm.
aarIIons
Reactions in the column can be modeled by the Chemdist or Liquid-
Liquid extraction algorithms found in the Algorithm drop-down list of
the Column window. Enter pertinent data in the Column - Reaction
Selection window accessible via the Reactions button on the
Column window. In the Column - Reaction Selection window you can
select and modify column reactions, specify stage-wise reacting
volumes, designate non-condensible components, select non-volatile
catalysts and specify data for user-added subroutines or kinetic proce-
dures. The reactions specified here are limited in scope to the simula-
tion of reactive distillation and (reactive) liquid-liquid extraction.
Column - Reaction Selection
To modify reaction sets defined in Reaction Data, select the Include
Reactions in Column Calculations check-box. All the reactions defined
via Input/Reaction Data are now available to the column. Reactions
can be selected from a drop-down list under Reaction Set from Reaction
Data, and a local set-name and description can be assigned. Moreover,
the individual reactions can be modified by in the Reaction Definitions
window accessible the Modify Data button.
The selected reaction sets can also be assigned to individual trays (or
ranges of trays) by selecting reaction sets from a drop-down list under
Column Reaction Set and then entering a tray range, i.e., starting tray to
ending tray.
hale: Although you can modify a local copy of a reaction set in the col-
umn, the original reaction set specified in the Reaction Data section
remains unchanged.
Reacting Volumes
The user can specify volume available for reaction (effective volume)
per stage for both liquid and vapor phase reactions in the Column -
Tray Effective Reaction Volumes window accessible from the Reaction
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-?1
Selection window. A tabulation of tray numbers and the respective
volumes is provided for data entry. This specification is used in calcu-
lating the rate of kinetic reaction.
Non-Volatile Catalyst
Components that catalyse a reaction without volatilizing can be
selected and the quantity of their charge specified as an amount or a
fraction in the Column - Non-Volatile Catalyst for Boiling Pot window
accessible from the Column - Reaction Selection window.
Non-Condensibles
Non-condensing components can be specified in the Column - Non-
Condensing Components window accessible from the Column -
Reaction Selection window.
Subroutine/Procedure Data
Data used for user-added subroutines and kinetic procedures can be
specified in the form of Integer, Real and Supplemental Data entries in
the Column - User Subroutine and Procedure Data window accessible
from the Column - Reaction Selection window via the Subroutine/
Procedure Data button. See the Reaction Data and Procedure Data
sections in this chapter for detailed information on the data require-
ments for these utility modules.
Modify Data (Reaction Data)
All data pertaining to a reaction (in a specified reaction set) can be
modified - except for reaction stoichiometry - in the Column-Reaction
Definitions window accessible via the Modify Data button in the
Column-Reaction Selection window. The calculation method for a
reaction can be modified to follow a user-added subroutine, procedure
or kinetic power-law expression. The reaction type can also be changed
to Kinetic, Equilibrium or Conversion. All reaction data that
completely specify any of the above reaction types (except stoichio-
metry) can be changed in the data entry fields accessible via the
Enter Data button under the Additional Data column for the respec-
tive reaction.
Instructions for entering data for the three types of reactions (Kinetic,
Equilibrium and Conversion) are covered in detail in the Reaction Data
section of this chapter (page 9-114 seqq).
6aIruIaIad Fhasas
Select the appropriate phase system in the drop-down list box on the
Column main data entry window. All distillation algorithms support
the default phase system of vapor/liquid. The Sure and Chemdist algo-
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-??
rithms also support the vapor/liquid/liquid system. In addition, the Sure
and Enhanced IO algorithms support the phase system
vapor/liquid/water that allows a free water phase on any tray of a
column.
humbar oI Trays
Enter the number of trays in the model in the data entry field provided
on the Column main data entry window. Every Column must have at
least two trays. There is no limit on the number of trays in a Column.
humbar oI IIaraIIons
Supply the number of iterations in the data entry field provided on the
Column main data entry window. The number of iterations corresponds
to the number of outer loop trials for the Inside-Out algorithm and the
number of trial solutions for the other algorithms. A non-convergence is
flagged when this number of iterations is performed and the column
equations are not satisfied within the tolerances. The default values are 15
for the Inside-Out algorithm, 10 for the Sure algorithm and 20 for the
Chemdist algorithm.
Frassura FroIIIa
The pressure for every tray in a column model must be defined. All
calculations are performed at the defined tray pressures. Define the
tray pressures in the Column Pressure Profile window which you may
reach by clicking the Pressure Profile button on the Column main
data entry window. Tray pressures may be supplied on an overall or
tray-by-tray mode by choosing a radio button in this window.
For the overall mode, supply the top tray pressure (tray two for columns
with condensers) and either the pressure drop per tray or the total pressure
drop aross the column. A default value of zero is supplied for the pressure
drop per tray and the column pressure drop. All tray pressures are derived
by linear application of the supplied pressure drop.
Individual tray pressures are supplied for the tray by tray mode. Note
that the top and bottom trays must be included when supplying a table
of individual tray pressures. Missing pressures are determined by
linear interpolation of supplied values. This method is useful for
defining the pressure profile for columns with irregular pressure
profiles, such as refinery vacuum units.
6ondansars
The condenser is always a heat sink on tray one. It is defined in the
Column Condenser window which you may access by clicking the
Condenser button on the Column main data entry window. The top
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-?3
products from columns with condensers correspond to the products
from the reflux accumulator drum. The pressure for all types of
condensers is supplied in this window.
The condenser type is selected with the appropriate radio button from
the following options:
FarIIaI. This condenser is an equilibrium stage and may or may not
have a net liquid product as well as vapor product. The net liquid
product, if present, is defined as a Fixed rate liquid draw from tray
one. The condenser temperature is the dew point of the equilibrium
vapor. An optional estimate for the condenser temperature may be
supplied in the Column Condenser window. The condenser pressure and
duty may also be supplied.
8ubbIa TamparaIura. The tray two vapor is cooled to a bubble point liquid
phase and one portion is returned as reflux to tray two and the other
portion withdrawn as the Overhead product from the column. An
optional estimate for the condenser temperature may be supplied in the
Column Condenser window. The condenser pressure and duty may also
be supplied.
8ubrooIad, FIxad TamparaIura. The tray two vapor is cooled below its
bubble point as defined by a subcooled temperature provided in this
window. PRO/II ascertains that the product is subcooled, and, if, not,
signals a non-convergence condition with an appropriate diagnostic
message. The subcooled liquid product is designated the Overhead
product from the column. The condenser pressure and duty may also be
supplied.
8ubrooIad, FIxad TamparaIura rop. This condenser is the same as the
subcooled type described above except that the degrees of subcooling
below the product bubble point is defined, always resulting in a
subcooled Overhead product. The duty and pressure for the
condenser may also be supplied in this window if desired.
If the duty is designated as a parameter to vary, any supplied duty for
any of these condenser options is used as an estimate.
6oIumn aboIIars
Column reboilers are described in the Column Reboiler window which
is entered via the Reboiler button on the Column main data entry
window. The reboiler type is selected with a radio button on this form.
The default type is the Kettle (Conventional) reboiler, which corre-
sponds to a duty on the bottom tray of the column with the equilibrium
liquid withdrawn as the Bottoms product.
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-?4
For the Inside-Out algorithm only, two other reboiler types are available:
G Thermosiphon without Baffles, and
G Thermosiphon with Baffles.
The thermosiphon without baffles type corresponds to the case when
the Column bottom product and reboiler feed are withdrawn from a
common sump.
hale: Thermosiphon reboilers with baffles in which the reboiler return
flows into the reboiler sump and overflows to the product sump are
equvalent to the no baffles type for simulation purposes and should
be modeled as such.
One specification may be selected for thermosiphon reboilers by
choosing the appropriate radio button and entering a value in the field
provided. Choices include:
G Reboiler return liquid fraction
G Return temperature
G Temperature change across the reboiler
G Reboiler circulation rate.
An estimate for the return fluid liquid fraction or circulation rate, as is
applicable, may be given to enhance convergence.
The duty for the reboiler may also be supplied in this data entry
window if desired. If the duty is designated as a parameter to vary, any
supplied duty is used as an estimate.
haaIars and 6ooIars
Side heaters and side coolers may be supplied via the Column Side
Heaters/Coolers window accessible via the Heaters and Coolers
button on the Column main data entry window. Side heaters and
coolers that are associated with a pumparound are not entered with this
window. A negative duty indicates cooling; a positive duty is used for
heating. There are no limits on the number of side heaters/coolers.
For each side heater/cooler, the following information must be
provided: tray number, a reference name, and the duty, with the appro-
priate algebraic sign.
FIash Zonas
The Flash Zone calculation models a fired heater added to a tray in an
Inside-Out column. Flash zones are associated with column heaters
when a feed stream entering the column is heated in a separate furnace.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-?5
The furnace is considered as an additional theoretical stage. Liquid
from the tray above the flash zone or vapor from the tray below the
flash zone could enter the flash zone or they can bypass it. Data entry
fields for flash zones can be accessed through the like-named button on
the Heater data entry window. Specification options include fired heater
efficiency, vapor and liquid by-pass fractions and transfer line tempera-
ture drop.
6oIumn haaI Laaks
Column heat leaks may be modeled by clicking the Heat Leak button
on the Column Side Heaters/Coolers window to open the Column Heat
Leak window. The heat leak may be designated as:
G Overall, or,
G By Individual Trays
For the Overall option, the heat leak duty for all of the trays except the
reboiler and condenser is given on a per tray basis or total column
basis. A heat leak may also be provided for the condenser and the
reboiler, if desired.
For the By Individual Trays option, heat leak duties for ranges of trays
are supplied as tabular input. At least two values must be supplied.
Heat leaks for trays not given, but which lie between trays with defined
heat leaks, are determined by linear interpolation.
Fumparounds and Vapor 8ypassas
Column pumparounds and vapor bypasses may be defined for the
Inside-Out and Sure algorithms in the Column Pumparounds window
which is accessed via the Pumparounds button on the Column main
data entry window. A pumparound may be either a liquid or vapor, with
vapor pumparounds more commonly termed bypasses.
Pumparounds are added and edited in a tabular form by clicking on
hypertext strings. Entries for each pumparound include: phase, pumpa-
round name, draw tray, return tray, return pressure, and two specifica-
tions. Supply these specifications in the Column Pumparound
Specifications window which is entered by clicking the two specifica-
tions hypertext string.
The following specification combinations are selectable via radio buttons:
aIa and uIy. The rate and duty data entry fields are enabled for input.
A reference name may also be supplied for the heater.
aIa WIIhouI haaIar. The rate field only is enabled for input.
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-?6
aIa and aIurn 6ondIIIon. The rate and return condition fields are enabled
for input. The return condition may be the temperature or the tempera-
ture drop or the liquid fraction. A reference name may also be supplied
for the heater.
uIy and aIurn 6ondIIIon. The duty and return condition fields are
enabled for input. The return condition may be the temperature or the
temperature drop or the liquid fraction. A reference name may also be
supplied for the heater.
For the Sure algorithm only, the pumparound rate may be designated as
the total fluid leaving the tray. Total liquid pumparounds must pump
down the column and total vapor pumparounds (bypasses) must flow
up.
InIIIaI LsIImaIas
All column algorithms use an iterative solution technique, starting from
an initial estimate of the tray temperature, flow and composition
profiles. The initial estimate may be produced internally using an
initial estimate generator and/or provided by the user as initial profile
data. User-supplied profiles may also be used to selectively replace
values produced by an estimate generator.
Click the Initial Estimates button on the Column main data entry
window to enter the Column Initial Estimates window. To use an initial
estimate generator, select the generator method from the drop-down list
box. Methods provided are:
8ImpIa. Profiles are determined by a simple material balance.
Temperatures are determined from estimated product compositions.
This model is quick and adequate for simple column configurations.
6onvanIIonaI. A general method designed to produce an adequate
estimate for most distillation problems. Shortcut calculations are used
to estimate the product flows and compositions. The compositions are
used to estimate temperatures. Internal flows are estimated by using
the product flows and a reflux estimate. This method works best for
conventional fractionators with condensers and reboilers in which
classic Fenske techniques provide reasonable results. Special tech-
niques are also included for absorbers and strippers.
aIInary. This method is designed for complex refinery columns which
have bottom steam instead of reboilers such as crude and vacuum
columns, F.C.C. main fractionators, etc. These columns may also have
side columns, pumparound cooling circuits, and decanted water at the
overhead accumulator. A multi-product shortcut technique developed
by SIMSCI is used for these columns. The user-supplied estimates for
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-?7
the product rates are used in the shortcut model. Adjustments in the
profiles are made for side coolers.
6hamIraI. This generator should be restricted to highly non-ideal
chemical distillation problems. The method is time consuming and
uses successive series of adiabatic flashes up and down the column to
establish the tray compositions.
When using an estimate generator, you may optionally provide
temperature estimates for the following trays: condenser, top tray,
bottom tray of column, and reboiler. You may also provide an estimate
for the reflux rate or reflux ratio. When no reflux estimate is provided
by the user, PRO/II supplies a reflux ratio of 3.0 (which solves many
columns). Any supplied data replaces values predicted by the estimate
generator.
When an initial estimate generator is not used, the minimum data which
must be supplied as input profiles are tray temperatures and flows,
either vapor, liquid, or a combination thereof. Note that the minimum
data which may be supplied are the temperatures and flows for the top
and bottom trays for the column. While these are the minimum data
required, they are rarely adequate to produce an acceptable initial
estimate. It may also be desirable to provide solution profiles from a
converged solution to speed future calculations with a column model.
Initial profiles are entered in tables accessed by clicking the following
buttons on the Column Initial Estimates window:
G Net Vapor Rates
G Vapor Composition
G Liquid Composition
G Tray Temperatures
G Net Liquid Rate
Composition estimates may be helpful for highly non-ideal mixtures;
however, they are rarely needed for most problems.
FarIormanra 8parIIIraIIons
Performance specifications or SPECs may be imposed on a column
operation such that product stream flows or properties, column internal
flows, column tray temperatures, etc., are at desired values in the
solution. For each SPEC, a degree of freedom or VARY must be calcu-
lated. For a column, a VARY may be a feed stream rate, heat duty, or
the draw rate for a fixed rate draw. Furthermore, for convergence to
be achieved, there must be a direct effect on all of the SPECs by the
collective set of VARYs.
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-?8
To supply SPECs and define VARYs for a column, click the Performance
Specifications button on the main Column data entry window to access
the Column Specifications and Variables window. SPECs and VARYs are
entered or edited by clicking on the hypertext strings. PRO/II requires that
there be an equal number of SPECs and VARYs. Thus, whenever you add
or delete a SPEC, you are required to add or delete a VARY.
SPECs and VARYs use the general form in PRO/II and are discussed
more fully in the SPEC/VARY/DEFINE section of this chapter. A list of
the stream and column parameters which may be used for SPECs and
VARYs is also given in that section.
6onvarganra aIa
Convergence data include Convergence Parameters, Convergence
Tolerances, Homotopy Options for Convergence Specifications and
Convergence History (printout options) for Column iterations. These
data are entered in the Column Convergence Data window accessible
via the Convergence Data button on the Column main data entry
window.
Convergence tuning parameters
ampIng FarIor. A damping factor of less than unity may be used to
improve convergence when the convergence is oscillating. Refinery
complex fractionators should be given damping factors of 0.8.
Chemdist columns may require more severe damping. A default value
of 1.0 is supplied by PRO/II. Damping cannot be applied to the Sure
algorithm.
ampIng 6uIoII. The damping factor cut-off value is used for the
Chemdist algorithm. The damping factor is only applied when the sum
of the errors is larger than this value. A default value of 10
-8
is
supplied by PRO/II.
Lrror Inrraasa FarIor. This factor limits the increase in the sum of the
errors from iteration to iteration. PRO/II supplies a default value of 1.0
for the Inside-Out algorithm or 100 for the Chemdist algorithm. This
factor does not apply to the Sure algorithm.
6omponanI kvaragIng FarIor. This weighting factor for update of composi-
tions is used for the Sure algorithm. A factor of 1.0 gives equal weight
to the current and last set of compositions; a factor of 2.0 gives double
weight to the last set of compositions, and so forth. A default value of
0.0 is supplied by PRO/II.
kay 6omponanI. In rare circumstances, specifying a key component can
enhance the convergence for the Sure algorithm. The key component is
normally determined by PRO/II but may be specified by the user.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-?9
8Iop II no ImprovamanI aIIar 6 IIaraIIons. The number of consecutive Sure
algorithm iterations allowed without improvement in the solution. You
can change the number of iterations by clicking on the hypertext string.
Changing this parameter rarely, if ever, results in convergence.
hale: The use of tuning factors usually results in an increase in the
time required to solve a distillation problem.
Convergence Tolerances
Tolerances for the column equations may also be changed although this
should rarely, if ever, be done and never as a means to reach a
converged solution. Tolerances are:
8ubbIa FoInI. The maximum bubble point error for each tray. The
default is 10
-3
.
LnIhaIpy 8aIanra. The maximum heat balance error for each tray. The
default is 10
-3
.
LquIIIbrIum kvaIua. The maximum allowable relative change in a
component K-value generated in the outer loop of the Inside-Out
algorithm versus the last value used in the inner loop. The default is
10
-3
.
6omponanI 8aIanra. The maximum relative component balance error for
each tray. Not used for the Inside-Out algorithm. The default is 10
-3
.
Homotopy Options for Convergence on Specification
The homotopy option is an aid to converging simulations where the
specification is difficult to meet by virtue of the value of the specifica-
tion (as opposed to the type of specification). The homotopy option
was designed for Reactive Distillation where convergence is more
complex, but it may be used for any column algorithm.
One example of the use of homotopy is to systematically increase tray
volumes to very large values to determine the equilibrium compositions
for reversible kinetic reactions.
The homotopy option allows you to solve the simulation with an initial
value for the specification and then automatically move to the desired
final value in a set number of steps. The column is converged at each
step.
To use the homotopy option for any specification, you must supply the
initial value of the specification and the number of intervals to use in
moving from the initial value to the final value. you cannot change the
final value in this window.
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-30
The homotopy option may be used for a specification which is varied
by a Controller or Flowsheet Optimizer. If Initially is selected under
the field entitled Apply During Control Loop (the default), the
homotopy iterations will be carried out to meet the given column speci-
fication. If the specification value is then changed by another unit
operation, the column will solve without homotopy iterations. If
Always is selected, the homotopy iterations will be carried out every
time the column is reconverged after the specification has been
changed. In this case, the initial value will be the last converged speci-
fication value, not the supplied value.
Convergence History
Printout of the column iterations is useful in diagnosis of a convergence
failure. History printout for the iterations may be requested by clicking
the Enter Data button and selecting the printout level desired.
Tray hydrauIIrs
Tray hydraulic calculations may be used to size new columns and to
rate existing tray or packed columns. To perform sizing or rating calcu-
lations, click the Tray Hydraulics button on the Column main data
entry window. For sizing and rating purposes the column is divided into
sections of trays or packing on the Column Tray Hydraulics window. Enter
tray sizing and rating information in the Column Tray/Packing Rating or
Column Tray/Packing Sizing windows accessible via the Enter Data
button. The Glitsch valve tray method is used to perform the tray calcu-
lations. The valve tray results are derated by five and twenty percent
respectively, to represent the performance of sieve and bubble cap trays.
For packed columns, random or structured packings are available, as
are various types of metallic and ceramic rings and saddles.
For sizing calculations, column diameter for each tray is sized inde-
pendently to meet the specified or default flooding criteria. The largest
diameter in each section is then selected and the entire section is
re-rated using the largest required standard diameter.
For rating calculations, the percent of flood is calculated for each tray. The
feature of multiple sections of trays is useful in representing existing
columns, which often have a variety of tray and downcomer arrangements.
Tray LIIIrIanrIas
All trays in a column model are treated as equilibrium stages or theo-
retical trays unless one of the tray efficiency models is used. This
implies that the user must apply some type of tray efficiency to the
actual number of trays in the column to determine the number of theo-
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-31
retical trays to use in the model. Engineers typically use overall tray
efficiency factors based on experience to convert actual trays to theo-
retical trays. This is almost always the best manner in which to model
tray efficiency, since generalized correlations for overall tray efficiency
are non-existent in the literature.
For the Inside-Out algorithm, PRO/II provides several tray efficiency
models:
G Murphree
G Equilibrium
G Vaporization.
For the Chemdist algorithm, only the Vaporization model may be used.
However, none of these models predicts the overall tray efficiency. All
of the models use an equation or factor to adjust the equilibrium vapor
composition leaving a tray. The models are useful for tuning a tray or a
few trays in a Column model, but their general application to all trays in
a column is not recommended.
To use tray efficiencies, click the Tray Efficiencies button on the
Column main data entry window to enter the Column Tray Efficiency
window. The efficiency model is selected with a radio button and the
Efficiency Data button is clicked to begin tabular entry of tray effi-
ciencies. Tray efficiencies may be given for all components on a tray or
selected components on a tray. An overall scaling factor may also be
provided to be applied to all tray efficiencies. This factor may be adjusted
by a Controller unit to meet a desired SPEC.
8Ida 6oIumns
A column using the Inside-Out or Sure algorithm may have attached
Side Columns, where a Side Column is a stripper or rectifier. The Side
Column draws feed from the main Column and returns a product to the
main Column. A finished product is withdrawn from the Side Column.
Side Columns are attached as part of the flowsheet construction in the
PFD main window. They may be completed and edited by double-
clicking on the side column icon on the PFD. The side column data
entry windows are identical to the Column main data entry windows
with the exception that irrelevant features are eliminated.
The Inside-Out algorithm merges a side column with the main column
for calculations. This simultaneous approach means that the SPECs
and VARYs for the main column and side columns need not be balanced
provided that the SPECs and VARYs for the total column configuration
are balanced.
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-3?
The Sure algorithm solves side columns as separate columns in recycle.
This approach is more time consuming, and demands that the SPECs
and VARYs for the main column and every side column are balanced.
The Chemdist algorithm does not permit side columns.
FrInI pIIons
Click the Print Options button on the Column main data entry
window to enter the Column Print Options data entry window. Select
the desired report options with the check boxes provided. To request
plotted results, click the Plot Column Results button and select the
desired plots with the check boxes on the Column Plot Options data
entry window.
TharmodynamIr pIIons
A thermodynamic system is required for the equilibrium calculations
on each tray. The thermodynamic system may be changed from the
global default in the Column Thermodynamic Systems data entry
window which is reached by clicking the Thermodynamic Systems
button on the Column main data entry window. A single thermody-
namic system may be defined for the complete column or different
systems may be used in individual sections of the column.
If a vapor/liquid equilibrium thermodynamic system is used for part of
a column with the Chemdist algorithm, additional checks may be
performed to determine which trays have two liquid phases by clicking
the Test for VLLE or VLE Trays check box. The thermodynamic system
is then changed to a vapor/liquid/liquid system for those trays.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-33
6LuMh, Llul-Llul XTA6Tlh
anaraI InIormaIIon
The Column unit operation may be used to simulate any distillation or
liquid-liquid extraction process. Distillation columns are described in
the Distillation Column section of this chapter. Although liquid-liquid
extraction (llex) columns are generally not trayed, the distillation
column nomenclature is used and the term tray denotes an equilibrium
stage. A Liquid-Liquid Extraction Column must contain at least two
trays.
The trays are considered to be linked with the light liquid phase moving
up the column and the heavy liquid moving down. There is no limit on
the number of trays in a liquid-liquid extraction column model. Any
tray may have a feed, product draw, or duty. There must be a feed to
the top and bottom trays.
hale: Side columns may not be used with liquid-liquid extraction columns.
The following distillation column features are not applicable to LLEX
columns and will be disabled:
G Condenser and reboiler
G Pumparounds
G Tray hydraulics
G Tray efficiencies.
Faads and FrodurIs
Column feeds and products are added as part of the flowsheet construc-
tion in the PFD. They may be accessed from the Column Feeds and
Products window accessible via the Feeds and Products icon on the
Column main data entry window.
Feed tray numbers may be added or changed in this window. There is
no limit on the number of feeds a column may have.
For products, the product type, phase, tray number, and flowrate are
supplied in this window. There is no limit on the number of products a
liquid-liquid extraction column may have and products may be
withdrawn from any tray of the column. Product types include:
Overhead, Bottoms, Fixed Rate Draw, and Pseudoproduct. Every
column must have an overhead product leaving tray one and a bottoms
product leaving the highest numbered tray. The product phase may be
Light Liquid (Liquid 1) or Heavy Liquid (Liquid 2).
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-34
Product rates must be supplied for all draw products. Rates may be
supplied in molar, mass, or liquid volume units. An estimated value
must also be provided for either the overhead or bottoms product. The
estimated value for the overhead or bottoms rate should be as accurate
as possible to enhance convergence. It is necessary to use a Perform-
ance Specification to set a desired flow for the overhead or bottoms
product.
FsaudoprodurIs
Pseudoproducts are used to create streams corresponding to column
internal streams, making them available for flowsheet calculations.
Pseudoproducts are defined in the Column Pseudoproducts window
accessible via the Pseudoproducts button on the Column Feeds and
Products window. The following types of pseudoproducts are
available:
haI Iray IIghI or haavy IIquId IIoW
ToIaI Iray IIghI or haavy IIquId IIoW
6oIumn kIgorIIhm
The solution algorithm is selected in the drop-down list box on the
Column main data entry window. The Inside-Out (default), Sure, and
Chemdist algorithms are for distillation columns. To specify a liquid-
liquid extraction column, select the Liquid-Liquid option.
6aIruIaIad Fhasas
When the Liquid-Liquid algorithm is selected, the phase system will
automatically be set to liquid/liquid.
humbar oI Trays
The number of trays in the model is entered in the data entry field
provided on the Column main data entry window. Every Column must
have at least two trays. There is no limit on the number of trays in a
Column.
humbar oI IIaraIIons
The maximum number of trial solutions is supplied in the data entry
field provided on the Column main data entry window. The default
value is 30 for the Liquid-Liquid algorithm.
Frassura FroIIIa
The pressure for every tray in a column model must be defined. All
calculations are performed at the defined tray pressures. The tray
pressures are defined in the Column Pressure Profile window which is
reached by clicking the Pressure Profile button on the Column main
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-35
data entry window. Tray pressures may be supplied on an overall or
tray by tray mode by choosing a radio button in this window.
For the overall mode, the top tray pressure must be supplied and either
the pressure drop per tray or the total pressure drop aross the column.
A default value of zero is supplied for the pressure drop per tray and the
column pressure drop. All tray pressures are derived by linear applica-
tion of the supplied pressure drop.
Individual tray pressures are supplied for the tray by tray mode. Note
that the top and bottom trays must be included when supplying a table
of individual tray pressures. Missing pressures are determined by
linear interpolation of supplied values.
haaIars and 6ooIars
Side heaters and side coolers may supplied via the Column Side
Heaters/Coolers window accessible via the Heaters and Coolers
icon on the Column main data entry window. A negative duty indicates
cooling; a positive duty is used for heating. There are no limits on the
number of side heaters/coolers.
For each side heater/cooler, the following information must be
provided: tray number, a reference name, and the duty, with the appro-
priate algebraic sign.
InIIIaI LsIImaIas
The Liquid-Liquid algorithm uses an iterative solution technique,
starting from an initial estimate of the tray temperature, flow and
composition profiles. By default, the initial estimate is produced inter-
nally using the initial estimate generator. User-supplied profiles may
be used to replace some or all of the values produced by the estimate
generator.
Click the Initial Estimates button on the Column main data entry
window to enter the Column Initial Estimates window.
When using the initial estimate generator, profiles are determined by a
simple material balance. Temperatures are determined from estimated
product compositions. You may optionally provide temperature
estimates for the top and bottom trays which replace values predicted
by the estimate generator as well as an estimate of the ratio of the liquid
flows on tray 1.
When the initial estimate generator is not used, the data which must be
supplied as input profiles are tray temperatures and flows, either light
or heavy liquid, or a combination thereof. Note that the minimum data
which may be supplied are the temperatures and flows for the top and
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-36
bottom trays for the column. While these are the minimum data
required, they are rarely adequate to produce an acceptable initial
estimate. It may also be desirable to provide solution profiles from a
converged solution to speed future calculations with a column model.
Initial profiles are entered in tables accessed by clicking the following
buttons on the Column Initial Estimates window: Net Vapor Rate , ,
Vapor Composition , Tray Temperature , Liquid Composition
and Net Liquid Rate . Composition estimates are rarely needed for
most problems.
FarIormanra 8parIIIraIIons
Performance specifications or SPECs may be imposed on a liquid-
liquid extraction column operation such that product stream flows or
properties, column internal flows, column tray temperatures, etc., are at
desired values in the solution. For each SPEC, a degree of freedom or
VARY must be calculated. For a liquid-liquid extraction column, a
VARY may be a feed stream rate, heat duty, or draw rate. Furthermore,
for convergence to be achieved, there must be a direct effect on all of
the SPECs by the collective set of VARYs.
To supply SPECs and define VARYs, access the Column Specifications
and Variables window via the Performance Specifications button
on the main Column data entry window. SPECs and VARYs are entered
or edited via the hypertext strings. PRO/II requires that there be an
equal number of SPECs and VARYs. Thus, when a SPEC is added or
deleted, you are required to add or delete a VARY.
SPECs and VARYs use the general form in PRO/II and are discussed
more fully in the SPEC/VARY/DEFINE section of this chapter. A list of
the stream and liquid-liquid extraction column parameters which may
be used for SPECs and VARYs is also given in this section.
6onvarganra aIa
Convergence data include algorithm tuning parameters, tolerances, and
history printout options for Column iterations. Open the Column
Convergence Data window via the Convergence Data button on the
Column main data entry window to enter these data. The tuning
parameters are as follows:
ampIng FarIor. A damping factor of less than unity may be used to
improve convergence when the convergence is oscillating. A default
value of 1.0 is supplied by PRO/II.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-37
Lrror Inrraasa FarIor. This factor limits the increase in the sum of the
errors from iteration to iteration. PRO/II supplies a default value of
100.
hale: The use of tuning factors usually increases the solution time.
Tolerances for the liquid-liquid extraction column equations may also
be changed although this should rarely, if ever, be done and never as a
means to reach a converged solution.
Tolerances are:
LIquIdIIquId. The maximum liquid-liquid equilibrium tolerance (equal
to the bubble point tolerance for VLE) for each tray. The default is 10
-3
.
LnIhaIpy 8aIanra. The maximum heat balance error for each tray. The
default is 10
-3
.
6omponanI 8aIanra. The maximum relative component balance error for
each tray. The default is 10
-3
.
Printout of the liquid-liquid extraction column iterations is useful in
diagnosis of a convergence failure. History printout for the iterations
may be requested by clicking the Convergence Data button and
selecting the printout level desired.
FrInI pIIons
Click the Print Options button on the Column main data entry
window to enter the Column Print Options data entry window. Select
the desired report options with the check boxes provided. To request
plotted results, click the Plot Column Results button and select the
desired plots with the check boxes on the Column Plot Options data
entry window.
TharmodynamIr pIIons
A thermodynamic system which supports liquid/liquid equilibrium is
required for the equilibrium calculations on each tray. The thermody-
namic system may be changed from the global default in the Column
Thermodynamic Systems data entry window which is reached by
clicking the Thermodynamic Systems button on the Column main
data entry window. A single thermodynamic system may be defined for
the complete column or different systems may be used in individual
sections of the column.
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-38
6LuMh, 5l
anaraI InIormaIIon
The Side Column unit operation models side strippers and side recti-
fiers associated with a main Column. The Side Column model is
currently restricted to the Inside-Out, Enhanced I/O and Sure algo-
rithms. See Column Algorithm in the Distillation Column discussion
(page 9-35) for further information on these methods.
Side Columns always use the same distillation algorithm as the main
Column. Multiple Side Columns attached to one main Column are
possible and, in fact, are common practice in the petroleum refining
industry.
Faads and FrodurIs
Side Columns are added to the flowsheet with the Side Column unit
icon and attached to the main Column with the feed and product
streams. Every Side Column has at least one external product which
exits the complex column arrangement.
8oIuIIon MaIhods
Solution methods for Side Columns vary with the algorithm. The
Inside-Out (and Enhanced I/O) algorithm merges the Side Column with
the main column and solves the complex column arrangement simulta-
neously. There are three benefits to this approach:
G The simultaneous method results in more precision in the
solution.
G The simultaneous solution is more efficient and uses less
computing time.
G The simultaneous solution provides more flexible product
specifications.
For example, the last benefit permits the use of both a D86 (5%) and a
D86 (95%) specification for a side stripper product. To solve this same
set of specifications with the Sure method requires the use of a Multi-
variable Controller unit wrapped around the main column/side column
units.
The Sure method solves each side column separately from the main
column and uses recycle streams to relate the side column and main
column. While special recycle logic is used to converge the column/
side column recycle problem, this method has three disadvantages
when compared to the Inside-Out column simultaneous treatment:
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-39
G The solution is less precise since a recycle stream tolerance is
used in addition to the column equation tolerances.
G The recycle approach is much slower.
G Main column variables (except the main column draw rate)
cannot be directly related to the side stripper products. This
makes it necessary to use controllers to solve for more than one
specification on a side product.
kddIIIonaI InIormaIIon on 8Ida 8IrIppars
Side strippers are widely used to control the front end volatility (flash
point) of liquid products such as diesel fuel and kerosene. The liquid
product is drawn from the main column and charged to the top tray of
the side stripper which typically has 6 to 10 actual trays. A stripping
medium (usually steam) is fed to the bottom tray of the side stripper to
strip about ten percent of the liquid feed (the lightest material) which is
then returned to the main column for further fractionation together with
the stripping medium. The stripped liquid is withdrawn from the
bottom tray of the stripper as a finished product. Steam side strippers
have an overall tray efficiency of about 25 percent and can be repre-
sented with two theoretical trays.
A variation in side stripper design is the use of a reboiler on the bottom
of the side stripper to "heat strip" the liquid feed. No stripping medium
is used for reboiled side strippers. The advantage of this arrangement is
a smaller stripped vapor return stream to the main column which
reduces the vapor loading for the main column. Reboiled side strippers
have higher tray efficiencies than those which use a stripping medium.
Therefore, three to five theoretical trays are typically used to model
these strippers.
Side strippers do not normally have any other items of equipment such
as condensers, pumparounds, side heaters/coolers, etc. Only the Sure
method permits the use of a condenser on a side stripper. This capa-
bility may find utility when modeling some unusual types of column
configurations.
kddIIIonaI InIormaIIon on 8Ida arIIIIars
Side rectifiers are used to remove heavy materials from vapor draw
products by providing a rectification section. The vapor draw from the
main column is fed to the bottom tray of the side rectifier which may
have a large number of trays. The side rectifier must have a condenser
or cooling duty at the top to condense the liquid reflux which is used to
rectify the vapor product.
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-40
The overhead product from the side rectifier is removed as a finished
product. The liquid from the bottom tray is returned to the main
column for further fractionation.
The side rectifier corresponds to the rectification section of a conven-
tional distillation column. An overall tray efficiency of 45 to 55
percent is reasonable for many applications.
Side rectifiers do not normally have other items of equipment such as
pumparounds, side heaters/coolers, etc. Reboilers are never used for
these columns.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-41
6MF55
anaraI InIormaIIon
The Compressor simulates a single stage isentropic compression.
Outlet conditions and work requirements may be determined using
either an adiabatic or polytropic efficiency. Optional tabular input may
be used to determine performance from supplied curves for outlet
pressure or pressure ratio, head, work, and/or efficiency. An optional
aftercooler calculation may be included. Both VLE and VLLE calcula-
tions are supported. Multi-stage compressors may be modeled by
linking single stage compressor units.
Faads and FrodurIs
A compressor operation may have multiple feed streams, in which case
the inlet pressure is assumed to be the lowest feed stream pressure.
Compressors may have one or more product streams. The product
phase condition for units with one product stream is automatically set
by PRO/II. For compressors with two or more product streams, the
product phases must be specified in the Product Phases window which
is accessed by clicking the Product Phases button on the
Compressor main data entry window. Note that for compressors with
aftercoolers, the products correspond to outlet conditions from the
aftercooler.
Product phases allowable include: vapor, liquid, decanted water, heavy
liquid, and mixed phase (vapor plus liquid). Mixed phase is mutually
exclusive with vapor and liquid products and is not allowed when four
product streams are specified.
Frassura, Work, or haad 8parIIIraIIon
The pressure, work, or head specification is selected from a drop-down list
box in the Compressor main data entry window. At least one specification
must be supplied for every compressor. Options include:
uIIaI Frassura. The outlet pressure from the compressor.
Frassura Inrraasa. The pressure rise across the compressor.
Frassura aIIo. Compression ratio (absolute outlet pressure/absolute
inlet pressure).
Work. Actual work for the compressor.
Frassura 6urva. Click the Enter Curve button to supply a curve
relating volumetric feed rate to outlet pressure in the Compressor
Outlet Pressure Performance Curve window.
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-4?
Frassura aIIo 6urva. Click the Enter Curve button to supply a
curve relating volumetric feed rate to compression ratio in the
Compressor Pressure Ratio Performance Curve window.
kdIabaIIr Work 6urva. Click the Enter Curve button to supply a curve
relating volumetric feed rate to adiabatic work in the Compressor Work
Performance Curve window.
FoIyIropIr Work 6urva. Click the Enter Curve button to supply a curve
relating volumetric feed rate to polytropic work in the Compressor Work
Performance Curve window.
krIuaI Work 6urva. Click the Enter Curve button to supply a curve
relating volumetric feed rate to actual work (efficiency has been applied) in
the Compressor Work Performance Curve window.
kdIabaIIr haad 6urva. Click the Enter Curve button to supply a curve
relating volumetric feed rate to adiabatic head in the Compressor Head
Performance Curve window.
FoIyIropIr haad 6urva. Click the Enter Curve button to supply a curve
relating volumetric feed rate to polytropic head in the Compressor Head
Performance Curve window.
krIuaI haad 6urva. Click the Enter Curve button to supply a curve
relating volumetric feed rate to actual head (efficiency has been applied) in
the Compressor Head Performance Curve window.
LIIIrIanry or TamparaIura 8parIIIraIIon
An efficiency or outlet temperature specification may be selected from
a drop-down list box in the Compressor main data entry window.
Options are:
kdIabaIIr LIIIrIanry. Compressor adiabatic efficiency in percent. This is
sometimes called the isentropic efficiency.
FoIyIropIr LIIIrIanry. Compressor polytropic efficiency in percent.
uIIaI TamparaIura. Compressor outlet temperature. The efficiency is
calculated.
8IngIa kdIabaIIr LIIIrIanry 6urva. Click the Enter Curve button to supply
a curve relating volumetric feed rate to adiabatic efficiency in the
Compressor Efficiency Curve window.
8IngIa FoIyIropIr LIIIrIanry 6urva. Click the Enter Curve button to supply
a curve relating volumetric feed rate to polytropic efficiency in the
Compressor Efficiency Curve window.
MuIIIpIa kdIabaIIr LIIIrIanry 6urva. Click the Enter Curve button to
supply multiple curves at designated Compressor inlet or outlet pressures
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-43
which relate volumetric feed rate to adiabatic efficiency in the
Compressor Multiple Efficiency Curves window.
MuIIIpIa FoIyIropIr LIIIrIanry 6urva. Click the Enter Curve button to
supply multiple curves at designated Compressor inlet or outlet pressures
which relate volumetric feed rate to polytropic efficiency in the
Compressor Multiple Efficiency Curves window.
Selection of an efficiency or temperature specification is optional, and
if none is selected a default value of 100 percent adiabatic efficiency is
used. Note that this corresponds to a perfect isentropic compression.
FMkdjusImanI oI 6omprassor 6urvas
Curves for head, work, and efficiency are usually based on a specific
compressor speed. Therefore, they should be adjusted when the
compressor is operated at a different speed. PRO/II performs adjust-
ments for these curves when values are supplied for the Reference RPM
(curve basis) and the Operating RPM. Adjustments are based on the
fan laws and are as follows:
[ ] Head Head RPM RPM ref reference = /
. 2 0
[ ] Work Work RPM RPM ref reference = /
. 3 0
[ ] Efficiency Efficiency RPM RPM ref reference = /
kIIarrooIar pIIon
An aftercooler may be added via the Aftercooler icon on the
Compressor main data entry window and supplying the cooler outlet
temperature and pressure drop in the Compressor Aftercooler window.
uIIaI TamparaIura LsIImaIa
An estimate for the outlet temperature for the compressor may option-
ally be supplied in the Compressor main data entry window to speed
convergence. Note that this is not the same as the Outlet Temperature
specification.
6aIruIaIIon MaIhod
The method used to calculate the Compressor head may be selected by
clicking the Calculation Method icon on the Compressor main data
entry window to access the Compressor Calculational Mode window.
The method may be chosen with the radio buttons provided, with
choices as follows:
F8k LngInaarIng aIa 8ook. The GPSA Data Book equation is used to
compute head.
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-44
k8ML FoWar TasI 6oda 10. The ASME Power Test Code 10 equation is
used to compute head. This method, the default, is the most rigorous.
The compression ratio above which the head equation is used to
compute the isentropic/ polytropic coefficient may also be supplied in this
window. This entry only applies to the GPSA method, with a default value
of 1.15 supplied. Below this compression ratio, the GPSA temperature
equation is used to compute the isentropic/polytropic coefficients.
aIaIIva 6onvarganra ToIaranra Ior Work 8parIIIraIIons
For compressors with Work specifications, a relative convergence
tolerance may optionally be supplied in the Compressor main data
entry window. A default value of 0.001 is used when no value is
supplied.
MaxImumuIIaI Frassura
For compressors with Work specifications, a maximum outlet pressure
may optionally be supplied in the Compressor main data window. The
outlet pressure will be reset to this value when the supplied work
results in a pressure exceeding this value.
TharmodynamIr 8ysIam
The thermodynamic system of methods to be used for compressor
calculations may be selected by choosing a method from the Thermody-
namic Systems drop-down list box on the Compressor main data entry
window.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-45
6hTLL
anaraI InIormaIIon
The Controller simulates the action of a feedback process controlled by
adjusting an upstream flowsheet parameter to achieve a specified result
for a process stream or unit operation. A controller must have one
SPECification and one VARY, where the SPEC may be a stream
flowrate or property, a unit operating condition, or a Calculator result.
The control variable (VARY) must be a stream or unit operation
flowsheet parameter that is otherwise at a fixed value in the flowsheet.
8parIIIraIIon
The SPECification is supplied via the appropriate underlined hypertext
in the Specification field of the Feedback Controller main data entry
window (accessed by double-clicking on the Controller flowsheet icon).
By clicking the hypertext string Parameter, the Parameter window
appears in which you can select the unit parameter or stream parameter
to use as the SPEC. The SPEC may be a single parameter or a mathe-
matical expression that relates two flowsheet parameters. You may next
enter the value and the tolerance for the SPEC by clicking on the
appropriate linked text. See the SPEC/VARY/DEFINE section of this
chapter for further details on the generalized SPEC form used in
PRO/II.
VarIabIa
The control variable (VARY) is selected by clicking the linked text
string Parameter in the Variable field of the Feedback Controller
window. The Parameter window is used to designate the stream or unit
parameter to use for the VARY in a manner analogous to that used in
selecting the SPEC above. The SPEC/VARY/DEFINE section of this
chapter gives more information on the VARY concept. There you will
also find tables of the flowsheet variables that may be used for SPECs
and VARYs in controller units.
LImIIs and 8Iap 8Itas
Limits and step sizes for the control variable may be supplied by clicking
the Limits and Step Sizes button on the Feedback Controller
window. A maximum value, minimum value, and/or maximum change
in the control variable may be entered in the Limits and Step Sizes
window. Optionally, you may supply a value for the control variable for the
second iteration by selecting the appropriate radio button to replace the
default change of 2.0 percent of the initial control variable value. You may
specify a different percent or value for the second iteration.
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-46
FaramaIars
Several parameters regarding the operation of the Controller may be
supplied on this section of the Feedback Controller window. You may
change the maximum number of iterations from the default value of 10.
Use the radio buttons may to select the action taken when the control
variable exceeds the prescribed limits:
G The value is set to the limit as a solution and flowsheet calcula-
tions continue (the default), or
G Flowsheet calculations are halted.
FrInI asuIIs Ior 6onIroIIar IIaraIIons
The default is to print a summary for each controller iteration. To eliminate
this printout, deselect the check box on the Feedback Controller window.
haxI nII 6aIruIaIad kIIar 6onIroI VarIabIa Is pdaIad
Ordinarily this is the first unit operation in the calculation sequence that
is affected by the control variable and is determined automatically
(calculated) by PRO/II. You may specify a different return unit by
using the drop-down list box on the Feedback Controller window.
honronvarganra oI 6onIroIIars
The controller uses a Newton-Rhapson technique to search for the value of
the control variable that meets the specified flowsheet parameter result.
Therefore, it is important that there be a continuous and monotonic rela-
tionship between the control variable and the specification. Control
functions with discontinuities or localized maxima and minima may fail to
converge or converge to an undesired result.
For some cases, the limits and step sizes entries may keep the control
function within a range of feasible solutions.
6onIroIIars and aryrIa Loops
Controllers always create a recycle loop in the flowsheet, from the
downstream unit at which the specification is evaluated to the first
upstream unit affected by the control variable.
When a controller is located within a recycle loop, PRO/II normally solves
the controller as part of the loop, i.e., the controller iterations and the
recycle iterations are solved simultaneously. Therefore, you must change
the calculation order when it is desired to converge the controller within
each iteration of the overall recycle loop. Note also that it is important that
the tolerance for the controller be tighter than the tolerance for the overall
recycle loop to insure convergence.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-47
65TALLlZ
anaraI InIormaIIon
The Crystallizer unit operation simulates crystallization processes for
the manufacture of organics, inorganics, fertilizers, biochemicals and
polymers. The crystallizer transforms a supersaturated solution into a
mixed solid/liquid crystal slurry.
The crystallizer is modeled as a Mixed Suspension Mixed Product
Removal (MSMPR) crystallizer or Continuous Stirred Tank Crystallizer
(CSTC). These models assume ideal mixing in the unit and that the
product conditions are the same as the bulk conditions. The model also
assumes that breakage or agglomeration of solid particles is negligible.
A feed heat exchanger may be included in the model with recirculation
if required.
The crystallization process depends on phase equilibria as well as
kinetic or non-equilibrium considerations. Solid-liquid equilibrium is
defined in terms of solubility, which is calculated from either the Van't
Hoff equation or user-supplied solubility data.
You must select Design or Rating calculations in the Crystallizer
Calculation Mode window. In design mode, a specification is required
and the volume is calculated. In rating mode, the vessel volume is
defined.
The formation rate relationships are expressed as power law expres-
sions in the Crystallizer Growth and Nucleation Rates window. These
relationships are similar to equations for power law kinetics used for
chemical reactions. Full details of the calculation method can be found
in the PRO/II Reference Manual.
Faads and FrodurIs
The Crystallizer can have any number of feed streams. The inlet
pressure is taken to be the lowest pressure of all the feed streams.
Both an overhead and bottoms product must be specified in the Crystal-
lizer Products window. The bottoms contains the crystals in the
solid/liquid slurry. The overhead contains any vapor generated in the
unit.
nII 8parIIIraIIon
A Crystallizer unit operation is specified by filling in the appropriate
data variables for Solute and Solvent, Crystal Shape Factor, Calculation
Mode, Design Specification (in Design Mode) and Growth and Nuclea-
tion Rates in the appropriate data entry windows that may be accessed
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-48
through the Crystallizer main data entry window that is accessed by
double-clicking on the Crystallizer unit icon.
6ryslal 5kae Faclar
The shape factor defaults to 1.0 which indicates cubic crystals. A value
of /6 indicates spherical crystals.
5alule aaJ 5alveal
Select the solute and solvent components. The solute must be defined
as a liquid-solid component. If there are no liquid-solid components
available in the simulation, a warning message is displayed prior to
opening the Crystallizer main data entry window. To specify a
component as liquid-solid, select Input/Component Selection/
Component Phases.
6alculallaa MaJe
Click on the Calculation Mode button to specify Design or Rating
calculation mode.
In Design mode, a specification is required and the vessel volume is
calculated. Specification options are:
6rysIaI FrodurIIon aIa. Enter the production rate of the crystals in
weight units.
FrarIIon oI 8oIuIa 6rysIaIIItad. Enter the fraction of the total solute in the
combined feeds that is to be crystallized.
Magma ansIIy In Iha 8oIIom FrodurI. Enter the density of the bottom
product as weight of crystals per unit volume of slurry.
8uparsaIuraIIon aIIo. Enter the supersaturation ratio which is defined as:
(Xexit-Xsat)/Xsat
where:
Xexit is the liquid phase mole fraction of the solute in the bottom
product, and
Xsat is the saturation mole fraction of the solute in the bottom prod-
uct.
In Rating mode, the vessel volume is defined.
rawlk aaJ hucleallaa ales
Click on the Growth and Nucleation Rates button to specify Growth
and Nucleation Rates.
6rysIaI roWIh aIa You must supply the Rate Constant for the rate
equation in ft/sec or m/sec. Growth rates are typically in the range
2.0x10
-7
to 2.0x10
-8
m/sec. By default, the rate is directly proportional
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-49
to the Supersaturation Ratio. You may change this by overriding the
default Exponential Factor. Factors are usually in the range 0.0 to 2.5.
6rysIaI hurIaaIIon aIa The Nucleation Rate is the number of crystals
nucleated per unit time per unit liquid volume. You must supply the
Rate Constant for nucleation and specify its dimensional units. By
default, the rate is directly proportional to the Supersaturation Ratio.
You may change this by overriding the default Exponential Factors.
Typical values for the Supersaturation Ratio Factor are in the range 0.5
to 2.5 for secondary nucleation and up to 10 for primary nucleation. If
an exponent is specified for the Impeller Speed, you may need to
change the default value of 100 RPM.
erallag 6aaJlllaas
Click on the Operating Conditions button to specify Crystallizer
Operating Conditions.
By default, the crystallizer operates at the combined feed temperature
and pressure with no recirculation.
Frassura 8parIIIraIIon The pressure may be specified as a drop below the
combined feed pressure or you may specify the pressure value directly.
8arond 8parIIIraIIon If an option other than At Merged Feed Temperature
is selected, the unit is assumed to include a feed heat exchanger. You
may specify either the crystallizer operating Temperature or the Duty of
the exchanger.
arIrruIaIIon FIoWraIa Some of the bottom product may be remixed with
the feed and passed through the feed exchanger. To specify this option,
you must either specify the recirculation Volumetric Rate or the
Temperature Change across the exchanger. A negative change denotes
a temperature drop.
Alternatively, instead of entering a numeric value for the parameters in
this window, they may be referenced using the DEFINE system relative
to any available unit operation or stream parameter calculated
elsewhere in the simulation. See the table of Crystallizer Parameters
available for Cross-Referencing in the online help for more details.
Frlal llaas
Click on the Print Options button to access the Crystallizer Print
Options window.
Check the Include Crystal Size Distribution box to request additional
output including tables of fractions and population densities for the
feed and product streams as functions of the crystal size distribution.
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-50
66Lh
anaraI InIormaIIon
The Cyclone unit operation models the separation of particulate solids
from a solid and gas stream. The particulate collection efficiency is
determined by the solids loading, component characteristics, particle
size distribution, stream flow rate, and cyclone geometry. The Cyclone
unit operation will calculate the collection efficiency for every particle
size range of each solid component as well as the pressure drop through
the unit. The Cyclone is assumed to operate isothermally and mecha-
nisms such as agglomeration and crumbling are discounted.
Faads and FrodurIs
A Cyclone may have up to ten feed streams. Unless otherwise
specified, the inlet pressure will be taken as that of the feed stream with
the lowest pressure. The feed streams may not contain a liquid phase,
and there must be two product streams. The overhead stream will
contain all the gas that comes in as well as any uncollected solids. The
bottom stream will contain only the collected solids. All solid compo-
nents that enter a cyclone must have a particle size distribution. This
distribution may be set by another unit or defined by the user.
nII 8parIIIraIIon
A cyclone unit operation is specified by filling in the appropriate real
and integer data variables for operating mode, geometry, pressure drop
calculations, efficiency calculations, and multiple cyclone configuration
in the Gas/Solid Cyclone main data entry window that is accessed by
double-clicking on the Cyclone unit icon on the PFD.
allag MaJe:
If you select Rating Mode, you must supply the diameter of the
cyclone. The other dimensions of the cyclone will be generated from
the diameter. If you select User Defined Geometry, you must also enter
all of the geometric ratios as described below. In Rating Mode, PRO/II
will calculate: pressure drop, total efficiency, component efficiencies,
grade efficiencies and weight percent solids in the overhead stream.
eslga MaJe:
If you select Design Mode, you do not need to provide the cyclone
diameter. Again, if you select User Defined Geometry, you must enter
all of the geometric ratios as described below. In addition, you must
specify a target for total solids collection (see entry for RPARM(13)
below). You may also wish to override the default maximum pressure
drop of 10 inches of water by entering a value in whatever input
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-51
pressure units you prefer (see entry for RPARM(16) below). In addition
to the normal Rating Mode output, Design Mode will calculate the
number and size of identical cyclones that are necessary to meet the
specification. There may be many cyclone systems that meet the speci-
fication. In all cases, Design Mode will return the system requiring the
fewest cyclones.
Mulllle 6yclaaes
The Cyclone can model a system of identical cyclones that are arranged
either in parallel or in series. In the case of parallel cyclones, the feed
streams are split evenly among the cyclones. The overhead products
from all cyclones merge into one overhead and the bottoms products
from all cyclones merge into one bottom stream. In the case of series
cyclones, the overhead from the first cyclone is the feed to the second
and so on. The overhead product is the overhead product from the final
cyclone while the bottom product is the combined bottom product from
all the cyclones in the system. Both product streams are at the outlet
pressure of the final cyclone in the system. It is not possible to specify
recycle streams inside the unit or to reference intermediate stage data
from the flowsheet. For example, if you wish to set a specification on
the second cyclone in a three-cyclone series or set a recycle from the
second cyclone to the first cyclone, you should model the system as
three separate units. Note that while increasing the number of identical
cyclones will increase efficiency and pressure drop in a series system, it
will decrease the efficiency and pressure drop in a parallel system.
laleger ala lar uall
6aIruIaIIon Moda (IFkM(1)) This input is optional. Options are:
1 Rating (default)
2 Design
LIIIrIanry ModaI (IFkM(Z)) This input is optional. Options for Rating and
Design mode are:
1 Koch & Licht
2 API (default)
3 Lapple
The Lapple model is based on a ratio of particle diameter to cut di-
ameter (the diameter of the particles which are collected with 50%
efficiency). The API method is based on a ratio of particle diameter
to critical diameter (the diameter of particles which would be col-
lected at 100%). The Koch & Licht method is not based on a parti-
cle size ratio.
Frassura ModaI (IFkM(8)) This input is optional. Options for both Rating
and Design mode are:
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-5?
1 Koch & Licht (default)
2 API
If the cyclone is inside another vessel, the API method allows val-
ues for the Inlet Width Ratio and the Superficial Gas Velocity (de-
scribed later in the section titled Real Data for Unit) to be specified.
6yrIona aomaIry (IFkM(4)) This input is optional. Options for both
Rating and Design mode are:
1 Stairmand (default)
2 High efficiency Swift
3 Lapple
4 General purpose Swift
5 Peterson & Whitby
6 User defined geometry
If the user defined geometry is used, values must be specified for
the inlet height ratio, inlet width ratio, cyclone dust outlet diameter
ratio, cyclone gas outlet diameter ratio, gas outlet tube length ratio,
height of cylindrical section ratio, and total cyclone height ratio as
appropriate for the calculation method used as shown.
InIaI Vana FIag (IFkM(6)) This input is optional. Options for both Rating
and Design mode are:
1 No (default)
2 Yes
8hapa oI as InIaI FIag (IFkM(6)) This input is optional. Options for both
Rating and Design mode are:
1 Tangential (default)
2 Scroll or volute
3 Axial
6yrIona Is InsIda VassaI FIag (IFkM(7)) This input is optional. Options for
both Rating and Design mode are:
1 No (default)
2 Yes
For a value of 2, the Inlet Width Ratio and the Superficial Gas Ve-
locity must be specified. Dipleg Size is calculated if the value of 2
is entered.
LIIIrIanry kdjusImanI ua Io LoadIng FIag (IFkM(B)) This input is optional.
Options for both Rating and Design mode are:
1 Adjust (default)
2 Do not Adjust
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-53
kuIomaIIraIIy 8WIIrh Frassura rop ModaI (IFkM(9)) This input is optional.
Options for both Rating and Design mode are:
1 Do not Switch (default)
2 Switch
This entry allows changes to be made automatically in the pressure
drop model between the Koch & Licht and API methods based on
solids loading.
6onIIguraIIon oI MuIIIpIa 6yrIonas FIag (IFkM(10)) This input is optional.
Options for both Rating and Design mode are:
1 Parallel (default)
2 Series
humbar oI IdanIIraI 6yrIonas (8arIas or FaraIIaI) (IFkM(11)) This input is
optional and is for Rating Mode only. The default value is 1 cyclone.
humbar oI FarIIrIa 8Ita Io ba 8parIIIad (IFkM(1Z)) This input is optional and
is for Rating Mode only.
This and the following entry can be used together to specify the
component and PSD size range whose weight fraction in the over-
head will be output to RPARM(64). This latter value can be ac-
cessed by a Controller, MVC or Optimizer.
For example, if a solid with PSD data: 10, 20, 30, 40 (in default in-
put units) is required to have a weight fraction of 0.20 in size range
20 to 30, the value for this entry would be 2 (the second size range)
and the value for a DEFINE statement would be 0.20. The default
value is 1 (the first size range).
humbar oI Iha 6omponanI Io ba 8parIIIad (IFkM(18)) This input is optional
and is for Rating Mode only.
This optional input is the number of the component with particle
size distribution data to be used in the design. The default is the
first solid component with a PSD that the design mode may evalu-
ate.
MaxImum humbar oI 6yrIonas (IFkM(14)) This input is optional and is for
Design Mode only.
The value indicates the number of cyclones in parallel or series as
appropriate based on the value specified above for the Configura-
tion of Multiple Cyclones Flag. The default is 20 for parallel and 3
for series.
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-54
eal ala lar uall
The cyclone geometry is input as the ratio of length divided by overall
cyclone body diameter, so that an inlet height of 0.1 meters on a
cyclone of diameter 0.2 meters would have an inlet height ratio of
0.1/0.2 = 0.5.
IamaIar oI 6yrIona 6yIIndar (FkM(1)) This input is required and is for
Rating Mode only.
InIaI haIghI aIIo (FkM(Z)) This Rating/Design Mode entry is optional.
InIaI WIdIh aIIo (FkM(8)) This Rating/Design Mode entry is optional.
6yrIona usI uIIaI IamaIar aIIo (FkM(4)) This Rating/Design Mode
entry is optional.
6yrIona as uIIaI IamaIar aIIo (FkM(6)) This Rating/Design Mode
entry is optional.
as uIIaI Tuba LangIh aIIo (FkM(6)) This Rating/Design Mode entry is
optional.
haIghI oI 6yIIndrIraI 8arIIon aIIo (FkM(7)) This Rating/Design Mode
entry is optional.
ToIaI 6yrIona haIghI aIIo (FkM(B)) This Rating/Design Mode entry is
optional.
IamaIar oI VassaI housIng (FkM(9)) This Rating/Design Mode entry is
optional.
8uparIIrIaI as VaIorIIy (FkM(10)) This Rating/Design Mode entry is
optional.
Frassura rop Io InIaI (FkM(11)) This Rating/Design Mode entry is
optional. This value is the pressure drop between the feed stream and
the inlet to the cyclone. The default is 0.0.
kbsoIuIa prassura aI ryrIona InIaI (FkM(1Z)) This Rating/Design Mode
entry is optional. For use if cyclone inlet pressure differs from feed
stream pressure. The default is the lowest feed stream pressure.
oaI LIIIrIanry Ior asIgn Moda (WI%) (FkM(18)) This Design Mode entry
is required.
MInImum 6yrIona IamaIar (FkM(14)) This Design Mode entry is
optional. The default is 0.1 m.
MaxImum 6yrIona IamaIar (FkM(16)) This Design Mode entry is
optional. The default is 0.5 m.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-55
MaxImum Frassura rop (FkM(16)) This Design Mode entry is optional.
This value is the maximum pressure drop across cyclones in a unit The
default is 2.488 kPa.
ToIaranra Ior 6yrIona 8ody IamaIar (FkM(17)) This Design Mode entry is
optional. The default is 0.001.
eal humher ulul lram6yclaae
The output values calculated by the Cyclone model are stored in the
indicated locations in the RPARM() array and can be accessed by a
Controller, MVC or Optimizer. All RPARM() outputs are produced in
both Rating and Design modes.
varaII LIIIrIanry (WI%) (FkM(61)) In Design mode, this is an input value
included in the output report for the cyclone unit.
IamaIar I 6yrIona 6yIIndar (FkM(6Z)) In Rating mode, this is an input
value included in the output report for the Cyclone model.
Frassura rop (FkM(68)) This is adjusted for loading by the user.
ToIaI 8oIIds In varhaad (FkM(64)) This is the weight % of the total
overhead stream.
InIaI haIghI ImansIon (FkM(66))
InIaI WIdIh ImansIon (FkM(66))
6yrIona usI uIIaI IamaIar ImansIon (FkM(67))
6yrIona as uIIaI IamaIar ImansIon (FkM(6B))
as uIIaI Tuba LangIh ImansIon (FkM(69))
haIghI oI 6yIIndrIraI 8arIIon ImansIon (FkM(60))
ToIaI 6yrIona haIghI ImansIon (FkM(61))
IpIag dIamaIar (FkM(6Z)) This requires that the cyclone be located
above a fluidized bed, i.e., the cyclone must be located inside a vessel.
This value is output in the cyclone output report only if applicable.
F8 WaIghI IrarIIon In Iha ovarhaad FkM(64) This value is the particle size
distribution weight fraction in the overhead of the size and component
specified. See entries for IPARM(12) and IPARM(13) above. This is the
ratio of weight in the specified size range divided by the weight of the
component in the overhead. This value is output in the cyclone output
report only if applicable.
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-56
F55ulh uhlT
anaraI InIormaIIon
The Depressuring Unit simulates the time-pressure-temperature rela-
tionships that occur when a vessel is depressured through a relief or
control valve. Several different valve models, vessel configurations and
models for heat flow into the unit are available. An optional external
makeup stream may also be specified. The initial phase of the vessel
contents may be either a vapor or a vapor-liquid mixture.
Calculation options include procedures from API Standard 2000, API
Recommended Practice 520, and other industry standards.
InIIIaI aIIaI 6ondIIIons
The initial relief conditions can be based on either a specified inital
time or a specified inital pressure by selecting the appropriate radio
button. The default selection is to start the depressuring calculations at
the beginning of the simulation (time zero.)
hale: This option is only available if the heat input model type Fire
Relief Model is selected.
FInaI aprassurIng 6ondIIIons
To set the final depressuring conditions, values may be entered for
either or both final Vessel Pressure and Elapsed Time. The elapsed time
can be measured from Time Zero or from the Start of Relief by choosing
the desired toggle text. If both final Vessel Pressure and Elapsed Time
are selected, the depressuring calculations will stop when the first
criterion is satisfied.
TIma 8Iap 8Ita 6aIruIaIIon pIIons
User-supplied values for the relative volume tolerance per time step, the
maximum number of time steps, and the time step size can be entered
on the Calculation Options window. This window is brought up by
clicking the Calculation Options icon on the Depressuring Unit
main data entry window.
The default value for the Volume Tolerance per Time Step is 0.0001.
The default value for the Maximum Number of Time Steps allowed in
the depressuring simulation is 100.
The default value for the Time Step size is calculated using default
values for the sizing parameters. User-supplied values for the parame-
ters used in this calculation may be entered via the appropriate
hypertext string. The step size basis is selected from a pop-up list,
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-57
which includes
(1) total fluid quantity in increments of the amount* (a constant)
(2) vapor quantity in increments of the amount* (a constant), or
(3) the smaller of (1) or (2).
The default selection for time step size basis is (1). If either (1) or (2)
is selected, a user-supplied value for the constants can be entered in the
pop-up float field. For the time step size basis of (1), the default value
of the constant is 0.04. For (2), the default value of the constant is 0.50.
8parIIIraIIon oI IsanIropIr LIIIrIanry
Either the default isentropic efficiency or a user-supplied value may be
used in the blowdown calculations by selecting the appropriate radio
button on the Depressuring Unit - Calculation Options window. For all
heat flow models except for Rigorous Blowdown or Semirigorous
Blowdown, the default value is 0.0. If Rigorous Blowdown or Semirig-
orous Blowdown is selected for the Heat Flow Model, the default isen-
tropic efficiency is 1.0.
krIIon Whan Lrrors ara aIarIad
By default, the simulation will stop if pressure profile errors are
detected. Clicking on the Stop hypertext on the Calculation Options
window toggles the option to Continue and allows the simulation to
continue even if pressure profile errors are detected.
VaIva aIa
Data can be entered on the Depressuring Valve Data window to define
the flow characteristics of the relief valve or control valve. This
window is brought up by clicking the Valve Data button on the
Depressuring Unit main data entry window. A Valve Model must be
selected from the four choices by choosing the appropriate radio button.
The available valve models are Supersonic Flow, Subsonic Flow,
Constant Flow, and User Model. The default is Supersonic Flow. The
equation for the selected model is displayed as an aid to entering the
parameters in the valve equation. The units displayed for the equation
are consistent with the default UOM for the problem and may not be
changed.
A Valve Constant (C) must be entered for all models except for the
User Model. For the Supersonic Flow model, the valve constant is the
only entry allowed. For the Subsonic Flow model, an optional back
pressure may be entered along with the required the valve constant. For
the Constant Flow model, the only allowable entry is the valve
constant. For the User model, the control valve coefficient must be
entered. The default back pressure value is 0.0, while the default value
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-58
for the critical flow factor is 1.0 Different values for the back pressure
and critical flow factor may be entered.
VassaI aIa
The Depressuring Vessel Data window is used to define the configura-
tion of the depressuring unit. This window is accessible via the
Vessel Data button on the Depressuring Unit main data entry window.
One of the following,
Sphere
Horizontal Cylinder
Vertical Cylinder
Unspecified Shape
must be selected by choosing the appropriate radio button.
If Sphere is the selected vessel geometry, a value for the diameter must
be entered. If Horizontal Cylinder is the selected vessel geometry, the
diameter and tangent-to-tangent length must be entered. For the
Vertical Cylinder vessel geometry, the diameter and tangent-to-tangent
height must be entered. For vessels of any of these defined geometries,
entering a value for liquid height is optional. For vessels of the
Unspecified Shape geometry, the vessel volume must be entered.
Liquid Holdup is optional only if the geometry is Unspecified Shape.
By default, the holdup liquid is saturated liquid of the combined feed
composition at the initial conditions. The remaining vessel volume
contains vapor in equilibrium with this liquid. The holdup may be on a
mole, weight, or actual volume fraction basis with the default being the
mole fraction basis.
The Vessel Weight and the Vessel Specific Heat may be input for any
vessel geometry. If one of these two variables is entered, then both
must be entered. These items are required only if Blowdown appears
on the Heat Input window, otherwise they are optional. (See discussion
on vessel Heat Input options below.)
The volume correction factor is an optional entry for the Sphere, Hori-
zontal Cylinder, and Vertical Cylinder vessel geometries only. This
entry is used to correct the vessel volume for pipes, fittings, and end
plates and defaults to 1.00 if not supplied.
haaI InpuI
Click the Heat Input icon on the Depressuring Unit main data entry
window to open the Heat Input window. A heat input model may be
selected from the drop-down list box, which includes the following
options:
User-defined
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-59
API 2000
API 2000 Method with Scaling
API RP 520 with Scaling
API RP 520
Isothermal
Rigorous Blowdown
Semirigorous Blowdown
Fire Relief.
User-Defined is the default as this supplies no heat input to the vessel.
The difference between the Rigorous and Semirigorous Blowdown models
is the physical property calculations. The selected heat transfer equation is
displayed, along with the equations units of measure. Depending on the
Heat Flow Model selected, from one to five of the coefficients may be
supplied. For the User-Defined or Semirigorous or Rigorous Blowdown
models, values for these coefficients default to 0.0.
For the Fire Relief Model only, the first two coefficients C1 and C2 are
required.
The Initial Wetted Area field is made unavailable when a value has been
entered for Liquid Height on the Vessel Data window. Otherwise, a
value for Initial Wetted Area must be entered for the API 2000, Scaled
API 2000, RP 520, Scaled RP 520, and Fire Relief Models. The Area
Scaling Factor is an optional entry for these same heat input models
only when the Initial Wetted Area is input. It has a default value of 1.0.
The Heat Input Scaling Factor may be input for any heating model
except the Semirigorous and Rigorous Blowdown and Isothermal
models. It has a default value of 1.0.
For the heat transfer coefficient used in the Semirigorous or Rigorous
Blowdown calculations, either a Calculated Using Scaling Factor coef-
ficent, an Overall coefficient, or individual phase vapor or liquid heat
transfer coefficient may be used by selecting the appropriate radio
button. The default is to use the Calculated Using Scaling Factor coef-
ficent, with a default value for the scaling factor of 1.0.
Makaup 8Iraam
One feed stream to the depressuring unit can be designated as a
constant-rate makeup stream. Click the Makeup icon on the Depres-
suring Unit main data entry window to open the Makeup Stream
window, where a makeup stream can be designated. Checking the box
enables a drop-down list box which contains the names of all feed
streams to the depressuring unit shown on the PFD. One stream may be
selected as a makeup stream. The flow of this stream will always begin
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-60
at time = 0, regardless of when the depressuring begins. By default, no
makeup stream is included.
FrInI asuIIs Ior aprassurIng nII
The Print Options window allows the user to control the intermediate
and final printed results for the Depressuring Unit. This window can be
accessed through the Output/Report Format/Unit Operations menu
option or from the Depressuring Unit main data entry window..
The default for all stream printout is a molar basis; clicking on the
toggle text allows the user to select weight basis.
By default, component compositions are printed at all steps. The user
may opt to print all steps, or initial, final and relief conditions only by
clicking on the hypertext. The user may suppress all composition
printout by deselecting the box.
Intermediate printout is printed at each calculation step time by default.
The user may select a different interval by clicking on the default time
step linked text, which will bring up the Intermediate Print Interval
Options window. On the Intermediate Print Interval Options window,
either the Default Time Step, a User-defined Time Step, or a User-
defined Pressure Interval can be specified for the printing frequency of
the intermediate results by selecting the appropriate radio button.
TharmodynamIr 8ysIam
For problems where more than one thermodynamic method has been
specified, a drop-down list box allows the selection of a thermodynamic
method set to be used for the Depressuring Unit.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-61
l55Lv
anaraI InIormaIIon
The Dissolver unit operation models the dissolution of solids into liquid
solutions. This mass transfer operation is widely used in the chemical
industry in both organic as well as inorganic processes.
Faads and FrodurIs
The dissolver unit can have any number of feed streams. The inlet
pressure is taken to be the lowest pressure of all the feed streams.
Both an overhead and bottoms product must be specified. The default
allocation may be modified in the Dissolver Products window. The
bottoms contains the liquid product along with any remaining crystals.
The overhead contains any vapor generated in the unit.
6aIruIaIIon MaIhod
The dissolver transforms crystals in solution from the solid to the liquid
phase. PRO/II models the most common type of dissolver which is the
stirred tank dissolver. A feed heat exchanger may be included in the
model if required.
A Solid-liquid equilibrium method must be defined in terms of solu-
bility, which is calculated from either the Van't Hoff equation or user-
supplied solubility data.
You must select Design or Rating calculations in the Dissolver Calcula-
tion Mode window. In Design mode, a specification is required and the
volume is calculated for a given feed particle size distribution and
operating conditions. In Rating mode, the vessel volume is defined and
the exit particle size distribution is determined.
The mass transfer coefficient may be specified in the Dissolver Dissolu-
tion Rate window. Alternatively, you may specify that the coefficient
should be calculated from diffusivity data entered in the Thermody-
namic Data.
Full details of the calculation method can be found in the PRO/II
Reference Manual.
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-6?
XFAh
anaraI InIormaIIon
The Expander operation may be used to model any isentropic
expansion such as an expander unit in a natural gas processing plant or
a steam turbine, etc. An adiabatic expansion efficiency may be applied
to the calculations. Rigorous calculations may be performed for both
VLE and VLLE systems.
Faads and FrodurIs
An expander operation may have multiple feed streams, in which case
the inlet pressure is assumed to be the lowest feed stream pressure.
An expander may have one or more product streams. The product
phase condition for operations with one product stream is automatically
set by PRO/II. For expanders with two or more product streams, the
product phases must be specified in the Expander Product Phases
window which is accessed by clicking the Product Phases button
on the Expander main data entry window.
Allowable product phases include: vapor, liquid, decanted water, heavy
liquid, and mixed phase (vapor plus liquid). Mixed phase is mutually
exclusive with vapor and liquid products and is not allowed when four
product streams are specified.
Frassura and Work 8parIIIraIIons
The outlet conditions for an expander may be selected with the radio
buttons provided on the Expander main data entry window. A pressure or
work specification is required for every expander. Options are as follows:
uIIaI prassura
Frassura raIIo (absolute outlet ressure/absolute inlet ressure)
Frassura drop
Work
A relative tolerance in percent may also be defined for convergence of
work specifications. If none is given, a default value of 0.001 percent is
used.
kdIabaIIr LIIIrIanry
The isentropic work is adjusted by application of the adiabatic effi-
ciency supplied in the Expander window. When not supplied, a default
value of 100 percent is used (perfect isentropic expansion).
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-63
MInImumuIIaI Frassura
For expanders with Work specifications, a minimum outlet pressure
may optionally be defined in the Expander main data entry window. The
work will be reset as needed so this minimum pressure is not violated.
uIIaI TamparaIura LsIImaIa
An estimate for the outlet temperature may be optionally supplied in
the Expander main data entry window to speed the calculations.
TharmodynamIr 8ysIam
The thermodynamic system of methods to be used for expander calcu-
lations may be selected by choosing a method from the Thermodynamic
System drop-down list box on the Expander main data entry window.
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-64
FLA5h
anaraI InIormaIIon
The Flash unit may be used to model any equilibrium calculation
where two of the conditions are defined, e.g., temperature and pressure,
pressure and enthalpy, etc. The phase equilibrium is determined and
the product may be separated into product streams corresponding to the
phases. The duty required, if any, to bring the feed to the final condi-
tions is also reported. Both VLE and VLLE calculations are supported
by this unit.
Faads and FrodurIs
A flash operation may have multiple feed streams, in which case the
inlet pressure is assumed to be the lowest feed stream pressure.
A flash may have one or more product streams. The product phase
condition for flash operations with one product stream is automatically
set by PRO/II. For flash units with two or more product streams, the
product phases must be specified in the Flash Product Phases window
which is accessed by clicking the Product Phases button on the
Flash main data entry window.
Product phases allowable include: vapor, liquid, decanted water/second
liquid, and mixed phase (vapor plus liquid). Mixed phase is mutually
exclusive with vapor and liquid products and is not allowed when four
product streams are specified. Note that for Dew Point and Bubble Point
calculations only two product phases are allowed, vapor and liquid. The
optional liquid product from a Dew Point calculation corresponds to a
pseudostream with the equilibrium liquid composition and the optional
vapor product from a Bubble Point calculation corresponds to the equilib-
rium vapor composition.
FIrsI 8parIIIraIIon
The temperature, pressure, or pressure drop from feed conditions is
supplied by choosing the appropriate drop-down list box on the Flash
main data entry window and supplying the value in the data entry field
provided. Only one entry is allowed.
8arond 8parIIIraIIon
This specification is used in conjunction with the First Specification given
above to define the equilibrium calculation desired. The Second Specifica-
tion may be either a Unit Specification or a Product Specification as
denoted by the radio buttons on the Flash main data entry window. These
two types of specification are discussed separately below.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-65
uall 5eclllcallaa
The desired second specification is chosen with the drop-down list box
and the data entry supplied in the field provided. Options are:
Frassura rop or Frassura. These entries are only applicable when the
temperature is chosen as the primary specification and correspond to an
isothermal (constant temperature and pressure) flash. The Duty required to
bring the feed to the specified conditions is calculated by PRO/II.
uIy. This entry corresponds to an adiabatic (duty defined) flash. When
the temperature is supplied as the primary specification, the pressure is
computed. When the pressure or pressure drop is supplied as the primary
specification, the temperature is computed. The duty may be positive
(heating), negative (cooling), or zero (constant enthalpy calculation).
aW FoInI. The dew point pressure is computed when the temperature is
supplied as the primary specification. The dew point temperature is
determined when the pressure or pressure drop is provided as the
primary specification. The Duty required to bring the feed to the
specified conditions is calculated by PRO/II.
hydrorarbon aW FoInI. The dew point pressure for the hydrocarbon
portion of the stream is computed when the temperature is supplied as
the primary specification. The dew point temperature is determined
when the pressure or pressure drop is provided as the primary specifica-
tion. This option is only applicable for thermodynamic systems which
support a free water phase. The Duty required to bring the feed to the
specified conditions is calculated by PRO/II.
WaIar aW FoInI. The dew point pressure for the water portion of the
stream is computed when the temperature is supplied as the primary
specification. The dew point temperature is determined when the
pressure or pressure drop is provided as the primary specification. This
option is only applicable for thermodynamic systems which support a
free water phase. The Duty required to bring the feed to the specified
conditions is calculated by PRO/II.
8ubbIa FoInI. The bubble point pressure is computed when the tempera-
ture is supplied as the primary specification. The bubble point tempera-
ture is determined when the pressure or pressure drop is provided as the
primary specification. The Duty required to bring the feed to the
specified conditions is calculated by PRO/II.
IsanIropIr. A constant entropy flash is calculated from feed conditions
to final conditions. The product pressure is computed when tempera-
ture is given as the primary specification. The product temperature is
given when the pressure or pressure drop is given as the primary speci-
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-66
fication. The Duty required to bring the feed to the specified conditions
is calculated by PRO/II.
FraJucl 5eclllcallaa
When this radio button is selected, the pressure is computed when the
temperature is provided as the first specification such that a calculated
stream parameter meets a specified value. When the pressure or
pressure drop is supplied as the first specification, the temperature is
computed. The Duty required to bring the feed to the final conditions is
also calculated by PRO/II.
The stream parameter specification is entered by clicking on the
hypertext strings and uses the general PRO/II specification format.
This format is further described in the SPEC/VARY/DEFINE section of
this chapter. The stream parameter specification must correspond to
one of the flash unit products and may be either an absolute or relative
value. An absolute or relative tolerance value may also be supplied.
Note that a default relative tolerance of 0.02 is used if none is given.
LnIraInmanI
Entrainment from one phase to another phase is requested in the Flash
Drum Entrainment window which is accessed by clicking the
Entrainment button on the Flash main data entry window. The
From and To phases are defined and the quantity entrained is supplied
as a fraction or percent of the donor phase or as an absolute rate of
material. The entrained material is assumed to have the same composi-
tion as the donor phase. Since entrainment calculations are performed
after the flash calculations, the resultant products may be different from
the original flash specifications. Multiple entrainments are permitted.
TamparaIura or Frassura LsIImaIas
Estimated temperatures or pressures may be supplied in the data entry
boxes at the bottom of the Flash main data entry window. These
estimates are optional, with a temperature estimate relevant when the
first specification is the pressure or pressure drop, and a pressure
estimate relevant when the first specification is the temperature. They
do not apply to isothermal flash calculations.
FsaudosIraamFIoWraIa
For Dew and Bubble Point calculations, an optional liquid and vapor
product may be defined which corresponds to the equilibrium liquid or
equilibrium vapor, respectively. The rate for this pseudostream may be
supplied in the data entry field provided on the Flash main data entry
window.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-67
TharmodynamIr 8ysIam
The thermodynamic system of methods to be used for flash calculations
may be selected by choosing a method from the Thermodynamic
System drop-down list box on the Flash main data entry window.
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-68
FLA5h WlTh 5Ll5
anaraI InIormaIIon
The Flash with Solids unit models a flash drum unit operation with a
solid product stream. If a solids product stream is to be present, you
must use the Flash with Solids unit rather than the conventional Flash
unit operation.
Faads and FrodurIs
A Flash with Solids unit may have multiple feed streams, in which case
the inlet pressure is assumed to be that of the feed stream with the
lowest pressure.
A Flash with Solids unit typically has four product streams:
G A vapor phase overhead stream from the flash drum section.
G A liquid phase stream from the flash drum section.
G A decanted water/second liquid from the solids separator
section.
G A solid phase bottom stream from the separator section. The
default is complete separation of the solid from the fluid stream
and, hence, there is no required input data for this unit.
The bottoms stream from the flash drum section feeding the solids
separator is internal to the Flash with Solids unit and is not subject to
specification by the user.
The main data entry window for the Flash with Solids unit is identical
to that of the ordinary Flash unit except that no specification of product
phases by the user is required. The phases for the product streams are
automatically specified by PRO/II and may be reviewed in the Flash
Product Phases window accessible via the Product Phases button
on the Flash main data entry window.
For further instructions on unit and product specifications, see the
detailed discussions in the Flash section above (page 9-65, seq.).
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-69
FLW5hT FTlMlZ
anaraI InIormaIIon
The Flowsheet Optimizer maximizes or minimizes an objective function by
varying one or more flowsheet variables while meeting a number of speci-
fications. Optionally, you can place constraints on minimum and
maximum values on the flowsheet variables. The objective function may
be an operational criterion, such as maximum recovery or minimum loss,
or an economic criterion, such as maximum profit or minimum cost. In
order to optimize an economic function, you must first include a Calcu-
lator in the flowsheet in order to define the profit or cost. Then use the
Optimizer to minimize or maximize the Calculator result.
bjarIIva FunrIIon
Either you must choose either Maximize or Minimize as the objective
function by selecting the appropriate radio button in the main Optimizer
window. Enter the objective function by clicking the linked text string
Parameter in the Objective Function field to make the Parameter
window available selecting the unit or stream parameter to use as the
Objective Function. This Parameter window is similar to the SPEC
Parameter window, except that there is no entry allowed for the
parameter value and tolerance. The Objective Function may be a single
flowsheet parameter or a mathematical expression that relates two
flowsheet parameters.
VarIabIas
The optimizer variables (VARYs) are selected by clicking the linked text
string Parameter in the Variables grid of the Optimizer main data entry
window. In the Parameter window, designate the stream or unit parameter
that will be varied, selecting from the same choices given above for the
Objective Function. For unit or stream variables, you must also input
minimum and maximum values. The SPEC/VARY/DEFINE section of
this chapter gives more information on the VARY concept. The tables in
that section list the flowsheet variables that may be used for SPECs and
VARYs for flowsheet optimizer units.
VarIabIa 8Iap 8Itas and LImIIs
You may enter limits on the step size for each control variable. Click
the linked text string default step sizes in the main Optimizer window to
open the Variable Step Sizes window. You may enter a relative minimum
step size and/or absolute maximum step size per iteration in this window.
You may also enter a non-default step size used to calculate the derivative
in this window. The default relative step size depends on the Optimizer
scaling option selected (see the section following titled Scaling of Opti-
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-70
mization Variables). Alternatively, a user-supplied step size can be
used in the calculations. The alternative step size may be sized on
either a relative or absolute basis by selecting the appropriate radio
button.
8parIIIraIIons
SPECifications may be entered for flowsheet parameters other than the
control variables. Click the Specifications button on the Optimizer
main data entry window to bring up the standard Specifications
window. Check the Use Specifications box to enable the grid which
contains the standard specification linked text. Enter the parameters for
each SPECification by clicking the appropriate text strings in each
specification. Click the linked text string Parameter, to open the
Parameter window where you can select the unit or stream parameter to
use as the SPEC. The SPEC may be a single flowsheet parameter or a
mathematical expression that relates two flowsheet parameters. Next,
enter the value and the default tolerance for the SPEC by clicking on
the appropriate text strings. See the SPEC/VARY/DEFINE section of
this chapter for details on the generalized SPEC form.
6onsIraInIs
CONStraints may also be entered for flowsheet parameters other than
the control variables. Constraints limit a variable to a specified range.
Click the Constraints button on the main Optimizer window to
open the Constraints window from the SPEC/VARY system. Check the
Use Constraints box to enable the constraint grid. Enter the parameters
for each CONStraint by clicking the appropriate text strings. Click the
hypertext string Parameter to open the Parameter window where you
can select the unit or stream parameter to use as the CONStraint. The
use of this window is analogous to the Parameter window used in
selecting the SPEC above. The Minimum Value, Maximum Value, and
the default tolerance values for the CONStraint are entered by clicking
on the appropriate text strings.
humbar oI 6aIruIaIIon 6yrIas
Several options regarding the operation of the Optimizer may be specified
by clicking the Options button on the Optimizer main data entry
window.
The default for the number of calculation cycles is set by PRO/II as 18
plus the current number of variables. Alternatively, you may specify
the number of cycles by selecting the appropriate radio button on the
Options window.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-71
8raIIng oI pIImItaIIon VarIabIas
By default, Optimizer scales the optimization variables in the conver-
gence algorithm. This scaling can be suppressed by deselecting the Use
Scaling box on the Options window.
If scaling is deselected, the default value for the derivative step size that
appears on the Variable Step Sizes windowis increased from2 percent to 5
percent.
varaII Lrror In kny VarIabIa
The default value for the overall error in any variable is 10
-7
. You may
enter a different value for the overall error in the corresponding data
entry field in the Options window.
MInImumaIaIIva 6hanga In bjarIIva FunrIIon
The default value for the Minimum Relative Change in the Objective
Function from one calculational cycle to the next is 0.005. You may enter
a different value for the minimum relative change in the box on the Options
window.
8aIarIIng Iha haxI nII 6aIruIaIad kIIar 6onIroI VarIabIa Is pdaIad
Normally, the first unit operation in the calculation sequence that is
affected by the control variable is the next unit calculated after the
control variable is updated. Normally, this is determined automatically
by the program. However, you must must specify the next unit calcu-
lated whenever any of the optimization variables or constraint variables
are thermodynamic parameters. Specify the return unit by selecting the
desired unit from the drop-down list box on the Options window.
Typa oI TharmodynamIr MaIhod
The PRO/II Optimizer currently supports the use of both Rigorous and
Local Thermodynamic Models during the perturbation steps. Specify
the thermodynamic model by selecting one of the following options in
the Type of Thermodynamic Model drop-down list box:
lgaraus
This option specifies that PRO/II will use rigorous thermodynamic
calculation models. This is the default selection.
Lacal TF MaJel
This option specifies that PRO/II will generate local K-value models for
T and P derivatives.
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-7?
Lacal TFx MaJel
This option specifies that PRO/II will generate local K-value models for
T, P, and Liquid composition derivatives.
Lacal TFxy MaJel
This option specifies that PRO/II will generate local K-value models for
T, P, and Liquid and Vapor composition derivatives.
kdvanrad pIIons
Click the Advanced Options... button to specify additional options for
the Optimizer.
The Optimizer Advanced Options are intended for experienced users of
PRO/II. If you are unsure how these features may apply to your simu-
lation, consult SIMSCI Technical Support or refer to the PRO/II
Reference Manual.
5eclal Llae 5earck Laglc
This option enables a line search mode method for the optimization
calculations. By default, this feature is Off. The option Specified
Number of Trials in the drop-down list box enables this feature.
When this feature is enabled, you may specify the maximum number of
line search trials for any one optimizer cycle. The number must be a
positive integer no greater than 20.
humher al laJeeaJeal varlahles la llmlaale
You may specify the number of independent variables to be eliminated
during the solution of the optimizer calculations.
5larl 8rayJea uJallag al 6ycle
You may specify the optimization cycle at which Broyden Updating
will begin. By default, this option is Off. Specify a positive integer
greater than 1 to enable this feature.
erlvallve Aaalysls
By default, this option is Off. Select On in the drop-down list to
produce an analysis printout of the derivative step sizes for each
optimizer cycle; in addition, a modified perturbation step size will be
suggested, if appropriate.
Llmll llmlzallaa 5le 5lzes
By default, this option is Enabled (Yes). When enabled, this option
limits the step sizes taken by the optimizer to 30, 60, and 90 percent of
the upper or lower bounds during optimization cycles 1, 2, and 3,
respectively. This is intended as a safety feature to prevent the
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-73
Optimizer from moving too far, particularly when the derivatives are
inaccurate. Selecting No in the drop-down list box disables this feature.
8aparaIa 8hadoWFrIra uIpuI FIIa
Once the flowsheet optimization has converged and the appropriate
operating conditions have been determined, the shadow prices or
Lagrange multipliers can be used to assess the sensitivity of the
objective function to the specifications, constraints and bounds.
For maximization problems, a positive shadow price indicates that the
constraint is being pushed against its upper bounds, a negative shadow
price indicates that the lower bound is still active, and a zero shadow
price indicates that the constraint does not affect the solution
By default, printout of these values is disabled (the None option in the
Separate Shadow Price Output File drop-down list box).
The Brief option produces a separate output report with the same file
name as the input file (with an .shd extension). This report contains the
IDs of the variables, specifications, and constraints, along with their
corresponding shadow prices as part of the standard output report.
The All option produces a separate output report with the same file
name as the input file (with an .shd extension) containing a detailed
summary of the final Optimizer solution. This summary includes the
values of the objective function, all variables, specifications, and
constraints, along with the shadow prices for all active bounds and
constraints.
Complete technical details may be found under the topic Flowsheet
Solution Algorithms in the PRO/II Reference Manual.
FrInI asuIIs Ior FIoWshaaI pIImItar
The default is to suppress printing of a convergence report. Click the
Print Options button on the main Optimizer window to open the Print
Options window. Select the desired printout level from a drop-down list that
includes the print levels History, Brief, and All.
By default, no intermediate printout is produced. Print-out levels for
intermediate printout of derivative and/or variable values can be
selected from a drop-down list which includes the print levels None,
Print after each cycle, or Print after the final cycle. The program limits
the options for the variable printout selection such that the level of
printout is greater than or equal to the derivative printout option.
Select the Include Convergence Plots check box to generate a plot of
the convergence diagnostics.
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-74
hAT X6hAh, Lh
anaraI InIormaIIon
The LNG Heat Exchanger simulates the exchange of heat between any
number of hot and cold streams. The exchanger is divided into cells
representing the individual cross-flow elements. Cells are designated as
Hot, where the streams are cooled or as Cold where they are heated.
The unit must contain at least one hot cell and one cold cell.
The number of cells is initially defined on the LNG Heat Exchanger
Configuration window that appears when the unit is first placed on the
PFD. Cells may be added or deleted in the main LNG Heat Exchanger
window.
Faads and FrodurIs
Each cell may have one or more feed streams. If multiple feed streams
are defined, the mixed feed is flashed at the lowest feed stream
pressure.
A multiphase product from a cell may be separated into streams
containing one or more phase. The allowable product stream phases
are vapor, liquid, decanted water and mixed (vapor+liquid). A mixed
phase product is not allowed with a vapor or a liquid product. The
decanted water product is also used as the second liquid product phase
with rigorous VLLE calculations.
If a cell has more than one product stream, the phases must be allocated
to the streams in the Product Phases window. This window is accessed
via the Cell Data button in the main LNG Heat Exchanger window,
then via the Product Phases button in the now open LNG Heat
Exchanger Cell Data window.
FarIormanra 8parIIIraIIons
Any cell may have either a duty or an outlet temperature specification.
However, at least one cell must remain unspecified. The product streams
from all unspecified cells leave the exchanger at the same temperature.
6aII aIa
The pressure drop for each cell defaults to zero. Pressure drop values
are entered in the LNG Heat Exchanger Cell Data window. The ther-
modynamic system used for the calculations for an individual cell may
also be changed in this window.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-75
Zonas knaIysIs
Zones Analysis may be requested in the LNG Heat Exchanger Zones
Analysis window accessible via the Zones Analysis button on the
main data entry window. This feature allows internal temperature
crossovers and pinch points to be identified by dividing the exchanger
into a number of zones. Warnings are issued if crossovers or pinch
points are found.
The Zones Analysis calculations are normally performed when the
exchanger is calculated. However, if the exchanger is in a recycle,
computation time may be saved by performing the analysis at output
time.
Zone Analysis will always be performed at calculation time if required
by Controller specifications on the LNG heat exchanger.
FrInI pIIons
The Print Options window is opened via the Print Options button on
the main data entry window. A number of different Y versus X plots may
be generated for temperature, duty and UA. The options are:
G Temperature vs. Duty (default)
G UA vs. Duty (default)
G T vs. Temperature (default)
G T vs. Duty
G UA vs. T
G Duty vs. Temperature.
TharmodynamIr 8ysIam
The thermodynamic system of methods to be used for LNGHX calcula-
tions may be selected by choosing a method from the Thermodynamic
System drop-down list box on the LNG Heat Exchanger main data entry
window.
hale: The thermodynamic system used for the calculations for an indi-
vidual cell (specified in the LNG Heat Exchanger Cell data window)
overrides this thermodynamic system for specific cells.
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-76
hAT X6hAh, lu5
anaraI InIormaIIon
The Rigorous Heat Exchanger simulates the operation of an existing
heat exchanger. The geometry of the unit has to be defined and the unit
is rated to determine the duty, exit temperatures, and pressure drops.
The exchanger duty, or one of the exit temperatures, may be defined. In
this case, the fouling resistance is calculated.
Faads and FrodurIs
Each side of the exchanger may have one or more feed streams. If
multiple feed streams are defined, the mixed feed is flashed at the
lowest feed stream pressure.
A multiphase product from the exchanger may be separated into
streams containing one or more phase. The allowable product stream
phases are vapor, liquid, decanted water and mixed (vapor+liquid). A
mixed phase product is not allowed with a vapor or a liquid product.
The decanted water product is also used as the second liquid product
phase with rigorous VLLE calculations.
If either side has more than one product stream, the phases must be
allocated to the streams in the Product Phases window accessed via
the Product Phases button in the Rigorous Heat ExchangerFeeds
and Products Data window.
6aIruIaIIon Typa
The calculation type is selected from a drop down list in the Rigorous
Heat Exchanger window. The available options are:
aIIng. Determine the heat transferred with the defined area and
fouling factors. The default.
FIxad uIy. Determine the fouling factors and exit temperatures from the
defined duty.
Tuba uIIaI TamparaIura. Determine the duty, fouling factors, and shell
exit temperature from the defined tube outlet temperature.
8haII uIIaI TamparaIura. Determine the duty, fouling factors, and tube
exit temperature from the defined shell outlet temperature.
If the selected calculation type is not Rating, a value must be supplied
for the duty or exit temperature as appropriate.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-77
Lxrhangars kIIarhad Io 6oIumns
Exchangers may be attached to any tray of a column for which a duty is
defined, either heating or cooling. To attach an exchanger to a column,
double-click the Attach to Column button for the shell or tube side
on the Rigorous Heat ExchangerFeed and Products Data window and
supply the appropriate information in the window provided.
A column internal stream is considered as one side of the exchanger
and a process stream is defined for the other side.
Attached exchangers may be used to represent the condenser or reboiler
for the column, a pumparound, or side heater/cooler. For side heaters
and coolers, the column stream may be the vapor or liquid from the tray
to which the exchanger is attached, the vapor from the tray below, or
the liquid from the tray above.
If the Calculation Type does not fix the exchanger duty or one of the
outlet temperatures, the exchanger duty will be fixed by the column
heater or cooler. It is generally best to allow the column operation to
determine the duty required to meet the defined performance. If the
duty is fixed by an exchanger specification, it is considered a fixed
duty for the column calculations.
varaII 6onIIguraIIon
The overall configuration is defined in the Rigorous Heat Exchanger
window by entering one or more of the configuration parameters:
G Number of Tubes/Shell
G Area/Shell
G Shell Inside Diameter
A value for at least one of these parameters must be supplied. If any of
these parameters is missing, it will be calculated from the others.
6onIIguraIIon aIa
The configuration details are defined in the Rigorous Heat Exchanger
Configuration Data window accessible via the Configuration button
on the main data entry window. All data in this window have default
values:
humbar oI 8haIIs In 8arIas. This is the number of identical shells
connected in series in the unit. Both shell and tube sides are considered
to be piped in series. The default is 1 shell.
humbar oI 8haIIs In FaraIIaI. This is the number of identical shells
connected in parallel in the unit. Both shell and tube sides are consid-
ered to be piped in parallel. The default is 1 shell.
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-78
humbar oI Tuba Fassasl8haII. This can be any integer value between 1 and
16. The default is 2. Odd numbered values are allowed, but are not
recommended.
rIanIaIIon. The exchanger orientation is selected from the drop-down
list as either Horizontal or Vertical. The default is Horizontal.
6onIIguraIIon. The direction of fluid flow is selected from the
drop-down list as either Countercurrent or Cocurrent. The default is
Countercurrent.
TLMk Typa. The three characters for the TEMA type (front, shell and
rear of the exchanger) are selected separately from drop down lists.
The default is AES.
Tuba aIa
Details of the exchanger tubes are entered in the Rigorous Heat
Exchanger Tube Data window which is accessed with the Tubes
icon on the main data entry window. All tube data have default values.
LangIh. The nominal tube length includes the thickness of both tube-
sheets. For U-tubes, it includes the thickness of the tubesheet and the
last baffle. The length defaults to 20 ft (6.1 m).
uIsIda IamaIar. The tube outside diameter defaults to 0.75 inches
(19.05 mm).
ThIrknass. The tube thickness may be defined as:
Inside Diameter
Wall Thickness
BWG
Bare tubes default to an inside diameter of 0.58402 inches (14.834 mm).
Finned tubes default to an inside diameter of 0.49598 inches (12.573 mm).
FIIrh. The center-to-center distance between tubes defaults to 1.0 inch
(25.4 mm).
FaIIarn. The tube pattern is selected from the drop down list. The
options are Triangular30 Degrees, Square90 Degrees (default),
Rotated Triangular60 Degrees, and Rotated Square 45 Degrees.
8haaI ThIrknass. The tubesheet thickness is calculated if it is not supplied.
FIn aIa
The default is not to have finned tubes. If fins are specified, the surface
area may be entered directly or calculated from the fin data.
LxIandad 8urIara kraa. This is the total surface area of the tubes
including the finned and bare surface areas. A value entered here
overrides the calculated area.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-79
FInslInrh. This is the number of fins per inch of tube length.
(Default is 19.
ThIrknass. The fin thickness defaults to a value in inches equal to
0.5/(Fins per Inch).
haIghI kbova ooI. The fin height above the root defaults to a value equal to
(Tube Outside Diameter - Root Diameter)/2
ooI IamaIar. The root diameter is the tube diameter at the base of the
fins and it defaults to 0.625 inches.
8aIIIa aIa
Details of the exchanger baffles are entered in the Rigorous Heat
Exchanger Baffle Data window accessible via the Baffles icon on
the main data entry window. All baffle data have default values.
8aIIIa Typa. The type is selected from the drop down list. The options
are No Baffles, Single (default), Single Baffles - No Tubes in Window
and Double.
8aIIIa aomaIry aIa. The baffle cut is the height of the window divided
by the shell inside diameter and it defaults to 0.2. Alternatively, the Net
Free Area Ratio may be entered instead. This is the area of the window
divided by the cross-sectional area of the shell.
6anIar 8parIng. If a value is not supplied, the baffle center-to-center
spacing is calculated by default to be 0.2*(Shell Inside Diameter). Any
value entered will be ignored if both Inlet Spacing and Outlet Spacing
are defined and the value will be calculated to provide even spacing.
InIaI 8parIng. This is the center-to-center spacing between the
tubesheet and the inlet baffle. If the inlet spacing is not supplied, it is
calculated to meet the center spacing or, if no center spacing is defined,
it defaults to 5 inches (133 mm) for bare tubes or 3 inches (88 mm) for
finned tubes.
uIIaI 8parIng. This is the center-to-center spacing between the
tubesheet and the outlet baffle. If the outlet spacing is not supplied, it
is calculated to meet the center spacing or, if no center spacing is
defined, it defaults to 5 inches (133 mm) for bare tubes or 3 inches (88
mm) for finned tubes.
ThIrknass. If a value is not supplied, the baffle thickness defaults to
0.1875 inches (4.763 mm).
humbar oI 8aaIIng 8IrIps. This is the number of pairs of sealing strips per
cross-flow pass. It defaults to zero.
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-80
FIIm6oaIIIrIanI aIa
Film Coefficient Data are entered in the Rigorous Heat Exchanger Film
Coefficient Data window accessible via the Film Coefficients button
on the main data entry window. These data provide adjustment factors
and override values for the heat transfer parameters.
varaII vaIua LsIImaIa. This is the initial value for the heat transfer
coefficient used in the calculation. The default is 50 Btu/hrft
2
F
(244.1 kCal/hrm
2
C or 1021.9 kJ/hrm
2
K).
varaII vaIua 8raIa FarIor. This is a multiplier which is applied to all
calculated heat transfer coefficients. It can be used in order to match
plant data more closely. It defaults to 1.0.
TubasIda and 8haIIsIda aIa
The following items have separate entries for each side of the heat
exchanger.
8raIa FarIor. This is a multiplier which is applied to the film coeffi-
cient for the specified side of the exchanger. It defaults to 1.0.
6oaIIIrIanI. If a value is entered, it overrides the calculated film coeffi-
cient for the specified side.
FouIIng asIsIanra. Thermal fouling resistance defaults to 0.002
ft
2
hrF/Btu (0.00041 m
2
hrC/kCal or 0.00010 m
2
hrK/kJ). If a duty
or exit temperature is specified, the fouling will be calculated.
FouIIng ThIrknass. The thickness of the fouling layer may be entered to
model its effect on the pressure drop. The default value is zero.
MaIarIaI aIa
Tube and shell material property data are entered in the Rigorous Heat
Exchanger Material Data window accessible via the Materials icon
on the main data entry window.
The default material is carbon steel. A different material may be
selected from a drop-down list which shows the materials in the library.
Individual properties of the selected material may be overridden.
Alternatively, the user may select User-added Material from the list
and then supply the name and properties of the material.
The list of materials in the library is tabulated below.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-81
haaI Lxrhangar MaIarIaIs oI 6onsIrurIIon
Material Density Conductivity
Description Label lb/ft
3
kkg/m
3
Btu/hrftF kCal/hrmC W/mK
Carbon Steel CAR8 STL 4OO.8 78G2 8O.O 44.G 51.O
Carbonmoly Steel O.1C, O.5Mo CAR8 MLY 4O8.2 7OOO 2O.O 48.2 5O.2
Chromemoly Steel 1.OCr, O.5Mo ChRM MLY 4OO.1 7851 27.O 4O.2 4G.7
Low Chrome Steel 2.25Cr, 1.OMo L0w ChRM 487.O 78O1 25.O 87.2 48.8
Medium Chrome Steel 5.OCr, 1.OMo MEB ChRM 48O.7 77OO 21.O 81.2 8G.8
Straight Chrome Steel 12Cr STR ChRM 487.O 78O1 14.O 2O.8 24.2
8O4 Stainless Steel 18Cr, 8hi 8O4 S.S. 5O1.1 8O27 O.8 18.8 1G.1
81O Stainless Steel 25Cr, 2Ohi 81O S.S. 5O1.1 8O27 7.8 11.G 18.5
81G Stainless Steel 17Cr, 12hi 81G S.S. 5O1.1 8O27 O.4 14.O 1G.8
821 Stainless Steel 18Cr, 1Ohi 821 S.S. 4O4.2 7O1G O.2 18.7 15.O
Aluminum 1OGO h14 A1OGOh14 17O.O 2728 128.8 1OO.O 222.1
Aluminum 11OO Annealed A11OO Ah 1GO.8 2712 128.8 1OO.O 222.1
Aluminum 8OO8 h14 Annealed A8OO8h14 171.1 2741 111.O 1G5.2 1O2.1
Aluminum 8OO8 h25 Annealed A8OO8h25 171.1 2741 111.O 1G5.2 1O8.1
Aluminum GOG1 T4 Temered AGOG1 T4 1GO.8 2712 O5.O 141.4 1G4.4
Aluminum GOG1 TG Temered AGOG1 TG 1GO.8 2712 O5.O 141.4 1G4.4
Coer C0FFER 55G.4 8O18 225.O 884.2 88O.4
Arsenical Coer AS C0FFER 5GO.O 8O7O 187.O 278.8 828.G
Coer hickel OO/1O CuhOO1O 55O.O 8O54 2G.O 88.7 45.O
Coer hickel 8O/2O Cuh8O2O 558.5 8O4G 22.O 82.7 88.1
Coer hickel 7O.8O Cuh7O8O 585.O O871 17.O 25.8 2O.4
Coer hickel GO/4O CuhGO4O 554.7 8885 12.O 1O.2 22.8
Red 8rass 85Cu, 15Zn REB 8RAS 54G.O 874G O2.O 18G.O 15O.2
Admiralty 8rass 71Cr, 28Zn, 1Sn ABMRALTY 581.O 85OG G4.O O5.2 11O.8
Commercial 8rass 55Cu, 84Zn C0M 8RAS 52O.O 8474 G7.O OO.7 11G.O
Munt/ Metal GOCu, 4OZn MuhTZ 524.O 88O4 71.O 1O5.7 122.O
Aluminum 8ron/e O8Cu, 5Al AL 8R0hZ 51O.O 81GO 48.O 71.4 88.1
Aluminum 8rass 78Cu, 2Al AL 8RASS 52O.O 888O 58.O 8G.8 1OO.4
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-8?
haaI Lxrhangar MaIarIaIs oI 6onsIrurIIon
Material Density Conductivity
Description Label lb/ft
3
kkg/m
3
Btu/hrftF kCal/hrmC W/mK
hickel Annealed hCKEL 55G.4 8O18 45.2 G7.8 78.2
Low Carbon hickel Annealed L CR8 h 554.7 8885 85.O 52.1 GO.G
Monel hickel 7Ohi, 8OCu M0hEL h 551.2 882O 14.5 21.G 25.1
nconel GOO 7Ghi, 1GCr, 8Fe hChLGOO 525.8 8414 8.7 12.O 15.O
Titanium 0rade 2 TTAhuM 281.G 4511 O.5 14.1 1G.4
Frassura rop aIa
Pressure drop data are entered in the Rigorous Heat Exchanger
Pressure Drop Data window accessible via the Pressure Drop icon
on the main data entry window. These data provide adjustment factors
and override calculated values for the pressure drops. All data may be
defaulted.
By default the pressure drops are calculated for each side of the
exchanger. A scale factor may be applied to the calculated value for
either side or the pressure drops may be overridden.
F 8raIa FarIor. This is a multiplier which is applied to the pressure
drop for the specified side of the exchanger. It defaults to 1.0.
F l 8haII. If a value is entered, the pressure drop per shell overrides
the calculated pressure drop for the specified side.
F l nII. If a value is entered, the pressure drop for the exchanger unit
overrides the calculated pressure drop for the specified side.
8haIIsIda Frassura rop MaIhod. The method may be selected from Bell
(default) for the Bell-Delaware method or Stream for the stream
analysis technique.
FrInI pIIons
Additional output reports are selected in the Rigorous Heat Exchanger
Print Options window accessible via the Print Options icon on the
main data entry window.
LxIandad. By default, a standard TEMA data sheet is produced for the
exchanger. Checking the Extended check box produces an additional
data sheet with information about stream properties, heat exchanger
configuration and hydrodynamics.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-83
Zonas. Checking the Zones check box produces an additional table
showing the phase and zone boundaries used to calculate the duty-
averaged log-mean-temperature difference.
Zonas FIoI. Checking the Zones Plot check box produces a plot
showing the phase and zone boundaries used to calculate the duty-
averaged log-mean-temperature difference.
hottIa aIa
The default nozzle type and sizes can be overridden in the Rigorous
Heat Exchanger Nozzle Data window accessible via the Nozzles
icon on the main data entry window.
The default is to use conventional nozzles with calculated inside
diameters. Nozzle data only affects the calculated pressure drop in the
exchanger.
sa Tuba 8Ida hottIa or sa 8haII 8Ida hottIa. If either check box is
unchecked, the nozzle pressure drop will not be calculated for that side
of the exchanger.
InsIda IamaIar. The calculated diameters may be overridden. The Inlet
and/or Outlet diameter may be entered.
sa knnuIar 8haII 8Ida hottIas. If this box is checked, the pressure drop
will be calculated for annular rather than conventional nozzles. In this
case, the Enter Data button must be clicked to open the Annular
Nozzle Data window where the nozzle details must be entered. The
required data are:
G Inlet and outlet annular passage lengths
G Inlet and outlet groove areas
G Inlet and outlet annular-shell wall clearances
TharmodynamIr 8ysIam
The thermodynamic system of methods to be used for each side of the
rigorous heat exchanger may be selected by choosing a method from
the Thermodynamic System drop-down list box on the Rigorous Heat
Exchanger main data entry window.
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-84
hAT X6hAh, 5lMFL
anaraI InIormaIIon
The Simple Heat Exchanger may be used to heat or cool a single
process stream, exchange heat between two process streams, or
exchange heat between a process stream and a utility stream. Rigorous
calculations may be performed for VLLE systems. It is also possible to
attach an exchanger to any tray of a distillation column and exchange heat
between a process stream and a column internal stream, either liquid or
vapor.
Faads and FrodurIs
For reference, streams and products are grouped according to the side
of the exchanger as hot or cold, where the feed stream(s) on the hot
side are cooled and the feed stream(s) on the cold side are heated.
Multiple process feed streams are permitted, with the lowest stream
pressure used as the inlet pressure.
The product from each side of an exchanger may be phase separated as
desired into multiple product streams, where products may be liquid,
vapor, mixed phase, and decanted water (hydrocarbon systems only).
The water product stream may also be used to represent a second
liquid phase for systems in which rigorous modeling of VLLE thermo-
dynamics is considered.
Feed and product streams are accessed via the Heat Exchanger Process
Streams window which is opened by clicking the Process Stream
button on the Heat Exchanger main data entry window. The product
phase condition for units with one product stream is automatically set
by PRO/II. For simple heat exchangers with two or more product
streams from a given side, the product phases must be specified in the
Product Phases window accessible by clicking the Product Phases
button on the Heat Exchanger Process Streams window.
Product phases allowable include: vapor, liquid, decanted water, heavy
liquid, and mixed phase (vapor plus liquid). Mixed phase is mutually
exclusive with vapor and liquid products and is not allowed when four
product streams are specified.
IIIIIy 8Iraams
For simple heat exchangers with one process side, a hot or cold utility
stream may be defined. The required utility rate for the specified heat
transfer is always computed. Utility streams may be specified by clicking
the Utility Stream button on the Heat Exchanger main data entry
window to access the appropriate hot or cold utility window.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-85
Cold utility streams are supplied in the Heat Exchanger Cold Side Utility
window. Options are:
WaIar. Temperature in and out must be supplied. Sensible heat transfer only.
kIr. Temperature in and out must be supplied. Sensible heat transfer only.
aIrIgaranI. A designated component is vaporized at its saturation
pressure or temperature. Latent heat transfer only.
Hot utility streams are supplied in the Heat Exchanger Hot Side Utility
window. Options are:
8Iaam. Steam is condensed at its saturation temperature or pressure.
Latent heat transfer only.
haaIIng MadIum. A designated component is condensed at its saturation
temperature or pressure. Latent heat transfer only.
6onIIguraIIon aIa
Configuration data are supplied in the Heat Exchanger Configuration
Data window, which is accessed by the Configuration button on the
main data entry window. These data only apply to exchangers with two
sides and are optional for all exchangers for which a Performance
Specification is provided (see below).
FIoW IrarIIon. Countercurrent or cocurrent. Default is countercurrent.
Tuba and 8haII Fassas. When supplied, an N - 2N configuration is always
assumed, where the number of shell passes is twice the number of tube
passes. The FT LMTD correction factor is computed, based on a
correlation for N - 2N exchangers. Default is one tube and one shell
pass, i.e., true countercurrent flow.
FT FarIor. The LMTD correction factor for the exchanger. Note that
this entry is mutually exclusive with the Tube and Shell Passes.
FarIormanra 8parIIIraIIons
Exchanger performance is specified in the Heat Exchanger Specifica-
tions window, which is accessed with the Specifications button on
the main data entry window. Exchanger performance may be specified
in a varity of ways:
uIIaI TamparaIura. Temperature out for hot or cold process fluid.
Temeralure Araack (Twa-slJeJ exckaagers aaly)
G HOCO: Hot out minus cold out.
G HOCI: Hot out minus cold in.
G HICO: Hot in minus cold out.
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-86
G Minimum: Smaller of HOCI and HICO.
G Minimum Internal Temperature Approach (MITA): Minimum
internal approach based on a zones analysis for the exchanger.
uIy. Overall heat transfer duty for the exchanger.
uIIaI 8Iraam LIquId FrarIIon. The liquid fraction for the hot or cold side
exit fluid where 0.0 indicates bubble point and 1.0 indicates dew point
conditions.
agraas oI 8uparhaaI. The degrees of superheat (above the dew point) for
the hot or cold side exit fluid.
agraas oI 8ubrooIIng. The degrees of subcooling (below the bubble
point) for the hot or cold side exit fluid.
varaII haaI TransIar 6oaIIIrIanI (). The area is calculated from this entry
when not supplied. When both U and Area are given, the heat transfer
is computed to satisfy the U*Area and no other performance specifica-
tions are allowed for the exchanger.
Lxrhangar kraa. The overall heat transfer coefficient for the exchanger is
calculated from this entry when not supplied. When both U and Area
are given, the heat transfer is computed to satisfy the U*Area and no
other performance specifications are allowed for the exchanger.
Lumpad k 8parIIIraIIon. The product of overall heat transfer coefficient
and exchanger area may be supplied directly.
IndIvIduaI and kraa 8parIIIraIIon. Individual values for the overall heat
transfer coefficient and exchanger area may be supplied directly.
MaxImum *kraa. A maximum U*Area may be supplied to limit the
heat transfer otherwise determined by a performance specification if
necessary. This specification is not allowed when either a Lumped UA
specification or the exchanger overall U and Area have been supplied
individually.
Zonas knaIysIs
Zones analysis is requested by clicking the Zones Analysis button
on the main data entry window. The duty-weighted LMTD may be
computed for exchangers in which phase changes occur by dividing the
exchanger into at least five zones of equal duty. More zones may be
requested as desired. Zones analysis is automatically performed for
exchangers with MITA specifications. For other types of specifications
the zones analysis may be performed during exchanger calculations or
at the completion of all calculations, as requested. Warning messages
are given for temperature crossovers.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-87
Lxrhangars kIIarhad Io 6oIumns
Exchangers may be attached to any tray of a column for which a duty is
defined, either cooling or heating. To attach an exchanger to a column,
click the Attach to Column button on the main data entry window
and supply the appropriate information in the window provided.
An internal column stream is considered as one side of the exchanger;
a process stream or utility stream defined for the exchanger is the other
side. Note that for utility streams, the duty must be determined by the
column calculations.
Attached exchangers may be used to represent the condenser or reboiler
for the column, a pumparound cooler, or a side heater or cooler. For
side heaters and coolers, the column stream may be: the vapor or liquid
from the tray to which the exchanger is attached, the vapor from the
tray below the tray to which the exchanger is attached, or the liquid
from the tray above the tray to which the exchanger is attached.
It is generally best to let the exchanger duty be determined in the
column operation to meet a desired separation criterion. If the duty is
defined by a performance specification for the exchanger it is consid-
ered a fixed duty for the column calculations.
TharmodynamIr 8ysIam
The thermodynamic system of methods to be used for each side of the
simple heat exchanger may be selected by choosing a method from the
Thermodynamic System drop-down list box on the Heat Exchanger
main data entry window.
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-88
hATlh/6Llh 6uv5
anaraI InIormaIIon
The Heating/Cooling Curve utility module develops heating or cooling
curves for any stream in the flowsheet. The tables are a composite of
equilibrium flashes, and present the data typically required for the
design of heat transfer equipment. Curves may be generated by using
equal temperature increments or equal duty increments. Additional
points are included when phase boundaries are crossed.
For the Flash, Heat Exchanger, and Column unit operations, a conven-
ient means is provided to retrieve the streams involved in heat transfer
and generate curves based on the actual duties for the units. For other
flowsheet streams, you may define the desired temperature or duty
ranges for the curves.
In addition to the standard thermal properties, additional properties may
be requested for the reports. These properties include physical, critical,
thermodynamic, transport, and petroleum properties.
haaIIngl6ooIIng 6urvas Ior FIoWshaaI 8Iraams
A drop-down list box is used to retrieve flowsheet streams for which
curves are desired in the Heating/Cooling Curves main data entry
window. After selecting a stream, click Enter Data to open the
Heating/Cooling Curve for Flowsheet Stream window. This window is
used to select the boundaries for the curves, type of curves, number of
points for the curves, and the report options.
A combination of two specifications is used to define the type and bounda-
ries for the curves. Curves may be at equal temperature increments, equal
duty increments, or may be the dew point or bubble point curve for the
fluid. Dew and bubble points may be calculated at defined pressures or at
defined temperatures. When the temperature and pressure ranges are defined
for a curve, the resultant points are always at equal temperature/pressure
intervals. When a temperature, pressure, or duty increment is defined for a
curve, the starting point is always taken to be the current stream conditions.
The number of points for the curves may be selected on this form by
replacing the default number of 11. When phase boundaries are
crossed, additional points are added to the report which represent the
transition points.
A check box may be used to select printout of liquid activity coeffi-
cients, vapor fugacity coefficients, and Poynting correction factors for
thermodynamic systems based on liquid activity coefficients. The equi-
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-89
librium K-values for the components may also be selected for printout
with a check box.
haaIIngl6ooIIng 6urvas Ior nII paraIIons
A drop-down list box is provided for selection of unit operations for
which curves are desired in the Heating/Cooling Curves main data
entry window. Units for which curves may be requested include the
Flash, Heat Exchanger, and Column.
To select the options for the unit:
Click Enter Data adjacent to the unit name.
The appropriate window for the unit operation appears for selection of curve
options. In each case, the user may specify printout options for liquid activity
coefficients, vapor fugacities, and Poynting corrections for thermodynamic
systems based on liquid activity coefficients. The equilibrium K-values for
the components may also be selected for printout.
haaIIngl6ooIIng 6urvas Ior FIash nIIs
Check boxes and radio buttons are used on the Heating/Cooling Curves
for Flash Drum window to select the options for the curves. The
temperature and pressure range is predefined as the inlet and outlet
conditions for the Flash.
The curves may be defined as isothermal, i.e., at equal temperature
increments, or as adiabatic, i.e., at equal duty increments. The number
of points for the curves may be selected on this form by replacing the
default number of 11. When phase boundaries are crossed, additional
points are added to the report which represent the transition points.
haaIIngl6ooIIng 6urvas Ior haaI Lxrhangars
Check boxes and radio buttons are used on the Heating/Cooling Curves
for Heat Exchangers window to select the options for the curves. The
temperature and pressure range is predefined as the inlet and outlet
conditions for each side of the Heat Exchanger.
The curves may be defined as isothermal, i.e., at equal temperature
increments, or as adiabatic, i.e., at equal duty increments. The number
of points for the curves may be selected on this form by replacing the
default number of 11. When phase boundaries are crossed, additional
points are added to the report which represent the transition points.
haaIIngl6ooIIng 6urvas Ior 6oIumns
Column streams are selected in a drop-down list box on the
Heating/Cooling Curves for Column Internal Streams window.
Streams available include the condenser and reboiler feeds, and feeds to
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-90
trays with duties such as side reboilers and pumparound coolers. The
curves may be defined as isothermal, i.e., at equal temperature and
pressure increments, or as adiabatic, i.e., at equal enthalpy and pressure
increments. The temperature and duty ranges are predefined as the unit
operating conditions. A pressure range may be added to pumparound
streams to simulate the effects of pumping.
The number of points for the curves may be selected on this form by
replacing the default number of 11. When phase boundaries are
crossed, additional points are added to the report which represent the
transition points.
8Iandard aporIs
Standard reports include the data in the table below:
ToIaI Faad Vapor LIquId
Temerature X
Fressure X
Molar Flow X X
Enthaly X X X
weight Flow X X
Molar Entroy X X X
kddIIIonaI 8IraamFroparIIas
These properties are requested by clicking Report Additional Stream
Properties on the Heating/Cooling Curve main data entry window.
These properties are reported in addition to the standard reports for all
curves selected for the Heating/Cooling Curve.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-91
kddIIIonaI 8IraamFroparIIas aporIs
Additional reports include the data tabulated below:
ToIaI Faad Vapor LIquId
Molecular weight X X
Actual Bensity X X
volumetric Flow X X
Comressibility Factor X
Secilic 0ravity X
Flowing Entroy X X X
Enthaly (unit basis) X X X
Latent heat X X
heat Caacity X X
viscosity X X
Thermal Conductivity X X
Surlace Tension X
Critical Temerature X X
Critical Fressure X X
Critical Comressibility X X
AF 0ravity X X
watson K Factor X X
Molar Average 8oiling Foint X X
FIoIs
Refer to Chapter 11, Printing and Plotting, for more information about
generating graphical plots of Heating/Cooling Curve results.
TharmodynamIr 8ysIam
You may select the thermodynamic system of methods to be used for
heating/cooling curves calculations by choosing a method from the
Thermodynamic System drop-down list box on the Heating/Cooling
Curves main data entry window.
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-9?
MlX
anaraI InIormaIIon
The Mixer unit combines two or more streams into a single product
stream. The outlet pressure may be specified if desired. The outlet
temperature and phase condition are always determined with an
adiabatic flash from the feed conditions. This unit supports both VLE
and VLLE calculations.
Faads and FrodurIs
The inlet pressure is assumed to be the lowest feed pressure. There is
no limit on the number of feed streams to a mixer.
Only one product stream is allowed for a mixer. PRO/II automatically
sets the temperature and phase condition for the product. If phase sepa-
ration of the product is desired, a separate flash unit must be used for
this purpose.
uIIaI Frassura 8parIIIraIIon
The pressure specification for the mixer product is selected with the
appropriate radio button on the Mixer window:
G Pressure drop from feed conditions, or
G Outlet pressure
If neither entry is supplied, the default is a pressure drop of zero.
TharmodynamIr 8ysIam
The thermodynamic system of methods to be used for mixer calcula-
tions may be selected by choosing a method from the Thermodynamic
System drop-down list box on the Mixer main data entry window.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-93
MuLTlvAlA8L 6hTLL
anaraI InIormaIIon
The Multivariable Controller (MVC) is an expanded form of the
Controller and simulates two or more feedback process controllers. The
MVC is capable of adjusting an unlimited number of upstream
variables to reach the same number of specified objectives. Each of the
SPECifications may be a stream flowrate or property, a unit operating
condition, or a Calculator result. The control variables may be stream
and unit operation conditions, thermodynamic parameters, and Calcu-
lator results that are otherwise at fixed values in the flowsheet.
For the Multivariable Controller, the number of variables must equal
the number of specifications. The linked text above the Specifications
grid in the Multivariable Controller main data entry window indicates
whether the current number of specifications equals the number of
variables. If they are unequal, the hypertext string does not equal
will appear in red.
8parIIIraIIons
Establish the SPECifications by clicking the appropriate linked text in
the Specification grid of the Multivariable Controller window. MVC
SPECifications are established in the same manner as for the simple
Controller SPECifications. See the SPEC/VARY/DEFINE section of this
chapter for further details on the generalized SPEC form.
VarIabIas
Establish the control variables (VARYs) by clicking the linked text
string Parameter in the Variable grid of the Multivariable Controller
window. MVC VARYs are established in exactly the same manner as
simple Controller VARYs. See the SPEC/VARY/DEFINE section of this
chapter for more information on the VARY concept. Tables are also
given in that section listing the flowsheet variables that may be used for
SPECs and VARYs for multivariable controller units.
VarIabIa LImIIs and 8Iap 8Itas
You may input limits for the each control variable, if desired. Variable
limits and steps sizes for MVC are established in exactly the same
manner as simple Controller limits and step sizes. In contrast to the
simple Controller which has a default percent change of 2.0% of the
initial control variable for the second iteration, the MVC has a default
percent change of 10.0%.
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-94
pIIonaI VarIabIa 8raIIng
Select the Use User-defined Variable Scaling check box on the Variable
Limits window to enable a linear formula for scaling the variable. In
order to access this window, click on the default limits linked text in the
Variables field in the Multivariable Controller window. After you have
enabled the Scaled Variable formula, the default limits linked text will
change to read user-defined limits.
Defaults for the scaled variable data are displayed on the Options
window which can be accessed through the MVC Options button on
the Multivariable Controller window. The same initial value, step
sizes and tolerances are applied to all scaled parameters in the MVC.
You may enter your own values here to replace the default values 100,
10, and 10
-5
respectively.
humbar oI 6aIruIaIIon 6yrIas
You may access several options for the operation of the MVC through
the MVC Options button on the Multivariable Controller window.
The default for the number of calculation cycles is calculated by the
program as 18 plus the current number of variables. Alternatively, you
may specify the number of cycles by selecting the appropriate radio
button on the Options window.
By default, the simulation will stop if any variable exceeds the
maximum or minimum limits. You may select the Continue Calcula-
tions if Any Variable Exceeds the Limits check box to continue calcula-
tions using the limiting value if the limit is exceeded.
8aIarIIng Iha haxI nII 6aIruIaIad kIIar 6onIroI VarIabIa Is pdaIad
Normally, the first unit operation in the calculation sequence affected
by the control variable is the next unit calculated after the control
variable is updated. Normally, the calculation sequence is determined
automatically by PRO/II. However, you must supply a calculation
sequence youself whenever any of the control variables are thermody-
namic parameters. You may specify the return unit by choosing a unit
from the drop-down list box on the Options window.
FrInI asuIIs Ior MuIIIvarIabIa 6onIroIIar
The default is to suppress printing of a convergence report. The Print
Options window allows you to override the default. This window is
accessed by clicking the Print Options button on the Multivariable
Controller window or be selecting Output/Report Format/Unit Opera-
tions from the menu. A convergence summary can be printed after the
last cycle or after every cycle by selecting the appropriate radio button.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-95
Select the Include Convergence Diagnostics check box to generate a
plot of the convergence diagnostics.
Select the Include Convergence Diagnostics check box to generate a
plot of the convergence diagnostics.
hon6onvarganra oI MuIIIvarIabIa 6onIroIIars
See the Controller section of this chapter for a discussion of conver-
gence techniques used in the Multivariable Controller calculations.
6onIroIIars and aryrIa Loops
See the Controller section of this chapter for a discussion of recycle
loops.
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-96
FhA5 hvLF
anaraI InIormaIIon
The Phase Envelope utility module generates phase envelopes for multi-
component streams using the Soave-Redlich-Kwong or Peng-Robinson
equations of state. The module is not available for other thermodynamic
systems.
Phase envelope generation is performed after the completion of
flowsheet calculations and has no effect on flowsheet convergence. For
systems with non-condensible gases such as hydrogen, helium, and
nitrogen it may not be possible to converge bubble point calculations
and results should be reviewed carefully.
8aIarIIon oI 8Iraams
You may select feed and product streams from any of the unit opera-
tions in the flowsheet for phase envelope generation. Up to five
flowsheet streams may be selected using drop-down list boxes in the
Phase Envelope main data entry window.
You may optionally supply a liquid mole fraction for any of the selected
flowsheet streams to generate a curve at a constant liquid mole fraction.
This option is useful for generating liquid fraction curves to be superim-
posed on the phase envelope. Normally, you would first select a flowsheet
stream with no liquid fraction entry to generate the phase envelope,
followed by one or more selections with specified liquid fraction entries to
generate a family of curves. It is not permissible to duplicate the same
stream with the same liquid mole fraction in a single phase envelope.
FIoI pIIons
Select a plot option for the phase envelope in the Phase Envelope Plot
Options window which you can access by clicking Plot Options on
the Phase Envelope main data entry window.
For each selected stream, a default descriptive label is provided in this
window. The default label will contain the stream name and an L/F
value if specified. You may modify each label. Duplicate labels are
not allowed. An example default stream label with a specified L/F is:
S100 - L/F= 0.9".
A drop-down list box contains plot options as follows:
hona The default
IndIvIduaI Individual generates a plot with only the stream selected.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-97
6omparIson All streams with the Comparison option are plotted on the
same graph. The Comparison option is useful for plotting a stream
phase envelope with superimposed curves of constant liquid mole
fraction. When you select the Comparison option for a stream, you will
be prompted to provide a comparison plot symbol to label the data
points for the generated curve. The symbol may be an integer number
in the range one through nine. If you do not provide a symbol is not
provided for the comparison plot, the next available integer between
one and nine is used
IndIvIduaI and 6omparIson The Individual and Comparison option
performs both the Individual and Comparison options for a stream.
TharmodynamIr 8ysIam
Select the thermodynamic system of methods to be used for Phase
Envelope calculations by choosing a method from the Thermodynamic
System drop-down list box on the Phase Envelope main data entry
window.
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-98
FlF
anaraI InIormaIIon
The Pipe unit is used to model single or multi-phase pressure drops in
pipes and/or fittings which connect unit operations. This unit may be
used in two modes: Rating Mode where the pressure drop is computed
based on a specified line diameter, and Design Mode where the line
diameter is calculated to meet a specified pressure drop and/ or velocity
criteria. Numerous algorithms are provided for the pressure drop calcu-
lations to model a variety of piping applications. A rigorous heat
balance may also be performed for the calculations, in which heat is
transferred through the pipe to or from an ambient medium, or a duty is
uniformly applied to the length of the pipe. The phase equilibrium is
determined for the product and it may be separated into streams
according to the phases. Both VLE and VLLE calculations are
supported by this unit.
Faads and FrodurIs
A pipe operation may have multiple feed streams, in which case the
inlet pressure is assumed to be the lowest feed stream pressure.
A pipe may have one or more product streams. The product phase
condition for pipe operations with one product is automatically set by
PRO/II. For pipe units with two or more product streams, the product
phases must be specified in the Product Phases window which is
accessed by clicking the Product Phases button on the Pipe main
data entry window.
Product phases allowable include: vapor, liquid, decanted water, heavy
liquid, and mixed phase (vapor plus liquid). Mixed phase is mutually
exclusive with vapor and liquid products and is not allowed when four
product streams are specified. It is important to note that where two
liquid phases are present in multiphase calculations, all pressure drop
methods consider only a single liquid phase which has fluid properties
that are an average of the properties for the two liquid phases.
6aIruIaIIon Typa
The Calculation Type may be selected with the radio buttons provided
on the Pipe main data entry window. Options are as follows:
G Fixed Line Diameter - Forward Calculation (delault)
G Fixed Line Diameter - Backward Calculation
G Line Sizing - Forward Calculation
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-99
Backward calculations determine the pressure drop in a backward, or
reverse direction, starting from the pipe outlet conditions. The pipe
inlet conditions are defined by the results of the backward calculations.
The line sizing option may be used for design mode, in which case the
diameter of the pipe is determined to meet a specified design criterion.
hale: Pipe calculations require liquid and vapor viscosities, and, for
two phase flow, the liquid surface tension. Therefore, the thermody-
namic system chosen for the calculations must provide these properties.
6orrarIIva krIIon Ior 6aIruIaIIon FaIIuras
The Continue text string on the Pipe main data entry window may be
clicked to select the corrective action for certain types of calculation
failures. The default option of Continue uses the best available solution
or sets a negative computed outlet pressure to a small value and allows
the flowsheet calculations to continue. For line sizing calculation
failures, the line diameter which most closely satisfies the design
criteria is selected and flowsheet calculations continue. A maximum of
three consecutive failures is allowed for pipe units in recycle loops.
The Stop option terminates all flowsheet calculations whenever the pipe
unit fails to reach a solution, or a negative outlet pressure is
encountered.
Frassura rop MaIhod
Select the pressure drop method in the Pipe Pressure Drop Method
window accessible via the Pressure Drop Method icon on the Pipe
main data entry window. The pressure drop method is selected with the
drop-down list box in this window, and includes the following methods:
Beggs-Brill-Moody (BBM), Beggs-Brill-Moody with Palmer Correc-
tion (BBP), Olimens (OLIMENS), Dukler-Eaton-Flanigan (DEF),
Mukherjee-Brill (MB), Gray (GRAY), and Hagedorn-Brown (HB).
Beggs-Brill-Moody is selected as the default correlation.
An optional estimated pressure drop may be supplied in this window to
reduce the computing time.
The convergence tolerance default of one percent and the default flow
efficiency of 100 percent may be replaced in this window. The flow
efficiency is a linear adjustment factor that is applied to the calculated
pressure drop to better match actual conditions.
The Moody friction factor for the pressure drop calculations may be
supplied directly in this window, if desired. If no value is entered, the
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-100
Moody friction factor is calculated using the modified Colebrook-
White equations.
The check box may be used to include or exclude the pressure drop
contribution from acceleration. Under certain high velocity or high
pressure drop conditions, this term becomes unrealistically high for the
Beggs-Brill-Moody equation. Therefore, under these conditions,
dropping this term results in a more reasonable answer.
hale: The Beggs-Brill-Moody equation does not cover critical flow.
LInalFIIIIng aIa
Line and fitting data are supplied in the Pipe Line/Fitting Data window
which is reached by clicking the Line/Fitting Data icon on the Pipe
main data entry window. For fixed line diameter calculations, radio
buttons on this window are used to select the input mode for the pipe
diameter. When the Inside Diameter radio button is selected, the pipe
inside diameter is supplied directly. When the Nominal Pipe Size radio
button is selected, a drop-down list box is used to select the desired
pipe nominal diameter from a table of common pipe sizes. For this
option, the pipe schedule may also be chosen with a drop-down list
box. When no schedule is chosen, schedule 40 pipe is assumed in most
cases.
The line length is supplied directly in this window. The maximum
allowable line length is 900,000 feet (274,000 meters).
An elevation change over the line length may be entered in the Pipe
Line/Fitting Data window. A plus value indicates an increase in
elevation; a minus sign indicates a decrease in elevation. The absolute
value of the elevation change must not exceed the line length.
One fitting K-factor may be attached to a pipe unit and supplied in this
window. The K-factor is defined as the total resistance coefficient, and
is limited to a maximum value of 100.0. Note that the supplied
K-factor may be used to represent multiple fittings, valves, and exit
losses. When a pipe unit is being used to represent a fitting or fittings
only, a negligible line length should be provided.
Radio buttons are used to select the pipe roughness in this window. The
Absolute roughness may be entered in length units or the Relative
roughness may be supplied. The roughness applies to both the line and the
fitting. A default absolute roughness of 0.0018 inches or equivalent (new
steel pipe) is used when no roughness is supplied.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-101
The number of calculation segments is selected by clicking the text
string at the bottom of this window. A maximum of 50 segments may
be used. The pressure drop calculations are based on the average fluid
properties in a segment; therefore, it is important to use multiple
segments for systems in which the fluid properties vary significantly
over the line length (such as multiphase systems). The number of
calculation segments has a significant effect on the calculated pressure
drop for such systems. It is also recommended that long lines be
divided into segments of 10,000 feet (3040 meters) or less. Note that a
default of one segment is used for a pipe unit unless otherwise
specified.
hale: When line sizing calculations are performed the line/fitting di-
ameter and fitting K-factor cannot be supplied, and these data entry
fields are not available.
LIna 8ItIng aIa
Line sizing data are supplied in the Pipe Line Sizing window which is
accessed by clicking the Line Sizing Data icon on the Pipe main data
entry window. Primary sizing criterion options are:
G Maximum Pressure Drop
G Minimum Outlet Pressure
Values for the maximum pressure drop or the minimum outlet pressure
are supplied directly in the data entry fields provided.
A Maximum Average Fluid Velocity constraint may also be defined.
This constraint can not be violated, and the primary sizing criterion will
be relaxed as needed to not exceed the supplied maximum velocity.
The Line Inside Diameter Selection Method is chosen with radio
buttons as follows:
G Use Explicitly Defined Inside Diameters
G Use Nominal Pipe Sizes
A default inside pipe diameter table with ten diameters is provided.
The default values may be replaced as desired. Use the Clear All
button to clear the pipe diameter table. The Restore Defaults button
restores the ten default diameters.
A table of nominal pipe sizes and corresponding schedule numbers may be
supplied in the Nominal Pipe Sizes window which is reached by clicking
the Enter Data button on the Pipe Line Sizing window. Up to ten
pairs of data may be provided. Nominal pipe sizes are selected from a
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-10?
table of supplied values via drop-down list boxes. The corresponding
schedule numbers are also selected via drop-down list boxes. Pipe
schedule numbers default to schedule 40 in most cases. The Clear All
button may be used to clear all selected nominal pipe sizes and corre-
sponding schedules.
haaI TransIar aIa
Heat transfer data are supplied on the Pipe Heat Transfer window
accessible via the Heat Transfer icon on the Pipe main data entry
window. The duty calculation option is selected via radio buttons:
G Fixed Duty
G Ambient Heat Transfer
G Isothermal Operation
For Fixed Duty calculations, the supplied duty is applied evenly over
the entire length of the line. A positive value is used for heating and a
negative value signifies cooling. This option with a duty of zero is used
as the heat transfer default option. This option may be used for both
forward and backward calculations.
An overall U factor and ambient temperature must be provided for the
Ambient Heat Transfer option. The U factor has units of energy/
(area)(time)(degree). A default value of 60F is used for the ambient
temperature. The heat transfer is computed from the pipe segment inlet
and outlet temperatures, U factor, pipe inside area, and the ambient
temperature. This option may not be used with backward calculations.
The Isothermal Operation option performs all pressure drop calcula-
tions at the inlet temperature to the pipe unit. This option is not
allowed for backward calculations.
TharmodynamIr 8ysIam
The thermodynamic system for the pipe calculations may be selected
with the drop-down list box on the Pipe main data entry window. The
problem Default system is used when no other thermodynamic system
is selected.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-103
FLM A6T
anaraI InIormaIIon
The Polymer Reactor model simulates either a free radical or stepwise
polymerization process in an ideal Continuous Stirred Tank Reactor
(CSTR) or Plug Flow Reactor (PFR). The polymerization reactions are
assumed to take place in the liquid phase and the system is assumed to
be homogeneous. The reactors may be run in the isothermal or non-
isothermal modes and the operating pressure may be set.
The Polymer Reactor calculation model allows for up to 79 different
reaction mechanisms to be used in copolymer free radical kinetics. Not
all are intended to be used simultaneously, in fact, the fewer mecha-
nisms specified for the polymer system, the more realistic and reliable
the model.
It is assumed that the polymerization reactions occur in the liquid
phase. If the reaction leads to a two phase situation, a warning message
is given and the user must then specify new operating conditions to
keep the system in the one phase region.
The CSTR mass and energy balances are solved to identify a single
stable operating point. The polymer which exists at this operating
condition is then characterized in terms of the method of moments to
provide number and weight average molecular weights.
The PFR mass and energy balances are solved to identify a sequence of
stable operating points along the axial dimension. The polymer which
exists at each point along the axial profile is then characterized in terms
of the method of moments to provide number and weight average
molecular weights.
The user must supply the feed component temperature, pressure, and
composition along with an estimate of the temperature of the
isothermal reactor or a temperature estimate for the non-isothermal
reactor. Kinetic and thermodynamic data for the reaction between
chemical species must also be provided.
aIaIIad InIormaIIon
For detailed information regarding operating modes, data requirements,
and range of applicability of the Polymer Reactor model, consult the
PRO/II Add-On Modules Users Guide.
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-104
F6u ATA
anaraI InIormaIIon
Procedures provide a way to calculate the reaction rate based on a
users own calculation method. The reaction rate calculation is
required by the plug, CSTR, reactive distillation and batch reactor
units. PRO/IIs default method for reaction rate calculation is based on
power law rate expressions. For any other rate expression type (such as
Langmuir-Hishelwood) or any reaction rate which deviates from the
base rate (such as a reaction with a mass transfer limitation), Proce-
dures and the alternative User-Added Kinetic Subroutines (see PRO/II
User-Added Subroutines Users Guide) can be used to calculate the
proper rate for reactor simulations.
Procedures are essentially in-line routines written in a language based
on FORTRAN 77. There are two sections to a Procedure: Setup and
Code. The setup section allows for the definition of each Procedures
name, description, variables and parameters. The code section is where
all calculations are performed. This section resembles a subroutine
written in a FORTRAN-like language.
Froradura 8aIup
Procedures are entered in the Procedure Data data entry window, which
is accessed thru the Input/Procedure Data menu option or by clicking
on the Procedure Data toolbar button. Each Procedure in this window
has a mandatory name and an optional description. As soon as the name
for a Procedure has been entered, its Enter Data button becomes
available. The button opens the Kinetic Procedure Definition window
where you may click Edit/View Declaration to access the Declarations
of variables and parameters.
Any variable names entered in Defined Procedure Variables will
be available to transfer information from the reactor unit to the Pro-
cedures it calls. They can be DEFINEd in the reactor unit, and ac-
cessed in the same manner as any other variable in the Procedure
code.
There is only one Parameter available to be specified, which is the
maximum number of reactions allowed. This only need be changed
if the Procedure must handle more than the default of 15 reactions.
Once setup is complete, click the Hide Declaration button to close the
Declarations.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-105
Froradura 6oda
hale: The Procedure Code section is required and must terminate with
a RETURN statement.
The actual FORTRAN procedure is entered directly in the Code field on
the Kinetic Procedure Definition data entry window. You may check
the procedure as you compose it by clicking the Check Code button.
The following predefined varibles are provided from the calling reactor
unit:
Kinetic data: These are the kinetic parameters are provided via the
K button of the Reaction Data section, and/or the
Unit Reaction Definitions button of the Reactor unit.
Reactor data: These data include the reactor sizing parameters and
operating conditions.
Property data: These data include the thermophysical property data
of the pure components (e.g., molecular weight or critical pressure),
and the property data of the individual components and mixture at
the reaction conditions.
User data: These are the integer, real, and supplemental data pro-
vided by the user via the Enter Data button when the procedure
name is specified for rate calculations for a Reactor unit.
Procedure data: These are the defined procedure variables entered
during the Procedure setup. Their values are DEFINEd in the same
window as the User data.
The supported language features are discussed below.
Elements of the Language
Each statement contains a maximum of 80 characters. An ampersand
(&) at the end of a line indicates continuation on the following line.
Note that an asterisk(*) is not valid as a continuation marker, since it
signifies multiplication.
All lines of code except the CODE statement may be preceded by a
unique numeric label from 1 to 99999 (shown as nn in this manual).
A dollar sign ($) causes all following data on the line to be inter-
preted as a comment rather than as code. Unlike in FORTRAN, a C
in column 1 does not designate a comment statement.
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-106
FradaIInad VarIabIas
The following variable names are reserved. They are used to pass
values between the procedure and the unit operation that uses the
procedure.
The first tables list variables thst provide input values to the procedure.
They may not appear on the left side of an assignment statement.
Froradura aIa FradaIInad LkL 8raIar VarIabIas
VarIabIa hama FF 68T 8aIrh xIsI
REAL Scalar variables Sulied in standard roblem dimensional units
Temerature RTEMF X X X X
Fressure RFRES X X X X
Total Molecular weight RMw X X X X
vaor Fhase RvMw X
Liquid Fhase RLMw X
L1 Fhase RL1Mw X
L2 Fhase RL2Mw X
Secilic gravity (GO/GO) RSF0R X X X X
Total Molar Rate RMRATE X X X X
vaor Fhase RvMRAT X
Liquid Fhase RLMRAT X
L1 Fhase RL1MRA X
L2 Fhase RL2MRA X
weight Rate RwRATE X X X X
Standard volumetric Rate RSvRAT
1
X X X
Actual volumetric Rate RAvRAT
1
X X X
vaor Fhase RvvRAT X
Liquid Fhase RLvRAT X
L1 Fhase RL1vRA X
L2 Fhase RL2vRA X
Liquid Fraction RLFRAC X X X X
L1 Fhase RL1FRA X
L2 Fhase RL2FRA X
vaor Fhaseviscosity RvvSC X X X X
Liquid Fhase viscosity RLvSC X X X X
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-107
Froradura aIa FradaIInad LkL 8raIar VarIabIas
VarIabIa hama FF 68T 8aIrh xIsI
REAL Scalar variables Sulied in standard roblem dimensional units
vaor Fhase Conductivity RvC0hB X X X X
Liquid Fhase Conductivity RLC0hB X X X X
vaor Fhase S. heat RvCF X X X X
Liquid Fhase S. heat RLCF X X X X
Surlace tension RSuRF X X X X
Absolute Temerature RTA8S X X X X
Tube Biameter (line length) TBAM X
Tube Length TLEh X
Cumulative Length CuMLEh X
Flug Flow Ste Si/e (line
length)
BELX X
Total reactor volume (CSTR
& 8ATCh) or volume ste
si/e ol FLu0FL0w reactor
v0LuME X X X
vaor Fhase volume Rvv0Lu X
Liquid Fhase volume RLv0Lu X
L1 Fhase volume RL1v0L X
L2 Fhase volume RL2v0L X
0as Constant R0AS X X X X
1 Volumetric flowrates for CSTR and PLUGFLOW are calculated using bulk compositions
assuming the specified reactor phase, even if the phase is actually mixed. A warning is
printed if the actual phase is mixed.
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-108
Froradura aIa FradaIInad IhTLL 8raIar VarIabIas
VarIabIa hama FF 68T 8aIrh xIsI
Total / ol comonents h0C X X X X
Total / ol reactions h0R X X X X
Reaction hase RFhAS X X X
8asis lor Rate Calculation
O = molar
1 = artial ressure
2 = lugacity
8 = molegamma
CFFA X X X
Ste / STEF X
unit / lor outut lile 0uT X X X X
unit / lor index lile hBX X X X X
Maximum / ol reactions MAXh0R X X X X
Froradura aIa FradaIInad LkL VarIabIa krrays
VarIabIa hama FF 68T 8aIrh xIsI
Bimension . h0C
Total Molar Comosition XT0TAL X X X X
Total Molar Concentration XC0hC X X X
vaor Fhase XvC0hC X
Liquid Fhase XLC0hC X
L1 Fhase XL1C0h X
L2 Fhase XL2C0h X
vaor Fhase Fugacity XvFu0 X X X X
Liquid Fhase Fugacity XLFu0 X
L1 Fhase XL1Fu0 X
L2 Fhase XL2Fu0 X
Liquid Fhase Activity XLACT X X X X
L1 Fhase XL1ACT X
L2 Fhase XL2ACT X
vaor hase Mole Fractions XvAF X X X X
Liquid hase Mole Fractions XL0 X X X X
L1 Fhase XL01 X
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-109
Froradura aIa FradaIInad LkL VarIabIa krrays
VarIabIa hama FF 68T 8aIrh xIsI
L2 Fhase XL02 X
vaor hase Mass Fractions XvMFRA X
Liquid hase Mass Fractions XLMFRA X
L1 Fhase XL1MFR X
L2 Fhase XL2MFR X
Bimension. 7O
Real numbers sulied on
RBATA statement
RBATA X X X X
Bimension. 2OO
Real numbers sulied on
SuFFLE statement
SuFFLE X X X X
Bimension. h0R
Activation Energy`
Freexonential lactor
Temerature Exonent
ACTvE
FREEXF
TEXF0h
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Bimension. (h0C,h0R)
Stoichiometric lactor
Reaction order
ST0Ch
0RBER
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
* There is an important distinction between the values of activation energy for in-line proce-
dures and calculations involving local reaction sets in distillation columns or reactors. The
values of activation energy supplied the reference reaction set (in RXDATA) or in the local
reaction sets are assumed to be in thousands of energy units per mole units, whereas, in the case
of procedures, the user-supplied value is used without the above assumption. E.g., for the SI
system, a value of
ACTIV=123 kJ/kmol in the RXDATA or local rxnset is used as 123,000 kJ/kmol in calculations.
A procedure using the same variable, say ACTIV(1), would calculate based on a value of 123
kJ/kmol.
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-110
Froradura aIa FradaIInad IhTLL VarIabIa krrays
VarIabIa hama FF 68T 8aIrh xIsI
Bimension. 1O
nteger sulied on
BATA statement
BATA X X X X
Bimension. h0R
8ase Comonent B8ASE X X X X
8asis lor Rate Calculation lor
each reaction (liquid hase)
O = molar
1 = artial ressure
2 = lugacity
8 = molegamma
4 = mole lraction
5 = mass lraction
L8AS X
1
X
8asis lor Rate Calculation lor
each reaction (vaor hase)
O = molar
1 = artial ressure
2 = lugacity
8= molegamma
4 = mole lraction
5 = mass lraction
v8AS X
1
X
Bimension. (h0C,h0R)
Fhase ol comonents in rxn
1 = vaor
2 = Liquid
FhASE X
1
Available only lor 8oiling Fot CSTR
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-111
The following variables are the PROCEDURE block results available to
PRO/II after control is returned to the PLUGFLOW, CSTR or Reactive
Distillation unit operation. RRATES must be defined for all reactions.
F6LL asuIIs
VarIabIa
hama
FF 68T 8aIrh xIsI
values ol solution llag.
O Belault value. FR0/ assumes
the FR0CEBuRE ste has
solved.
1 FR0CEBuRE solved.
2 FR0CEBuRE lailed, but continue
calculations il in a recycle or
control loo.
8 FR0CEBuRE lailed, sto all
llowsheet calculations.
S0LvE X X X X
Reaction rates lor each reaction
moles/ (liqvol`time) lor
0FERAT0h FhASE=L
1
, 8
moles/(vavol`time) lor
0FERAT0h FhASE=v
1
RRATES(
h0R)
X X X X
Temerature derivatives lor each reaction BRBT(h
0R)
2
X
Comosition derivatives lor each reaction BRBX(h0
C, h0R)
2
X
1 CSTR and PLUGFLOW should not be used when multiphase reactions are expected. Except
for Reactive Distillation and the CSTR boiling pot model, PRO/II assumes the phase is 100%
liquid or vapor as defined on the OPERATION statement.
2 The use of this is optional.
FraceJure ala FrogrammIng Languaga
See the discussion of the Calculator module at the beginning of this
chapter for a survey of the proper use of Declaration Statements (9-6),
Assignment Statements (9-7), Fortran Intrinsic Functions (page 9-8),
PRO/II Intrinsic Functions (page 9-9), IF Statements (page 9-11),
Calculation Flow Control Statements (page 9-12), and Calculation
Termination Statements (page 9-14).
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-11?
FuMF
anaraI InIormaIIon
The Pump may be used to compute the energy required to increase the
pressure of a process stream. This quantity of energy is added to the
feed enthalpy to determine the outlet temperature. Only one liquid
phase is considered in the calculations.
Faads and FrodurIs
A pump operation may have multiple feed streams, in which case the
inlet pressure is assumed to be the lowest feed stream pressure. A
single liquid product stream is allowed from a pump.
uIIaI 6ondIIIons
The Pressure Specification for a pump is selected with the appropriate
radio button on the Pump main data entry window as:
G Outlet pressure
G Pressure rise (F)
G Pressure ratio based on the lowest feed stream pressure.
Fump LIIIrIanry
A pumping efficiency in percent may be supplied in the data entry field
provided on the Pump main data entry window. This value is used for
the work and outlet temperature calculations. If not supplied, a default
value of 100 percent is used.
TharmodynamIr 8ysIam
The thermodynamic system of methods to be used for pump calcula-
tions may be selected by choosing a method from the Thermodynamic
System drop-down list box on the Pump main data entry window.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-113
A6Tlh ATA
anaraI InIormaIIon
Use the Reaction Data Sets data entry window to supply reaction stoi-
chiometry, heat of reaction, kinetic and equilibrium data, and to specify
the base component for each reaction. One or more reactions may be
saved as separate reaction data sets and used in all reactor types
(conversion, equilibrium, Gibbs free energy minimization, plug flow,
CSTR, and boiling pot reactors). Multiple unit operations can have
common access to the same reaction data.
The PRO/II graphical user interface now supports multiple equilibrium
expressions for each Equilibrium Reactor.
hale: You may specify the base component of the reaction and provide
heat of reaction and equilibrium and kinetic data in the Reactor data
entry window. For conversion reactors, these data are considered to
be local and are entered at the unit operation level. See the Reactor
section later in this chapter.
To access the Reaction Data window:
Click on the Reaction Data icon on the main toolbar.
hale: Any data entered in the Reaction Data window will be passed to
the Unit Reaction Definitions window (a subwindow of the main Reac-
tor window) and used as default values.
8parIIyIng aarIIon 8aIs
Provide a name and description for each reaction data set in the main
Reaction Data window. The name is required, but the description is
optional.
hale: You must define the component list in the Component Selection
data entry window before entering reaction data. This order is impor-
tant because components for each reaction must be selected from a pre-
viously defined component list .
To enter data for each newly defined reaction data set, or to modify
the data for imported sets:
Click on the Enter Data button for that set.
This opens the Reaction Definitions window for that set. Here you may
enter the following information for the reaction data set:
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-114
G Kinetic rate calculation method
G The name of all reactions in the set (required)
G The reaction stoichiometry (required)
G The heat of reaction and the base component (required)
G Equilibrium data (optional)
G Kinetic data (optional).
To select the kinetic rate calculation method:
The kinetic rate can be calculated from PRO/IIs reaction rate subrou-
tine based on the power law rate expression, by an inline procedure or
by the users kinetic subroutine. The inline procedure must be first
defined in the Procedure Data section and selected from the Procedure
Name drop down list box. When a user-added kinetic subroutine is
used, it can be selected from the Subroutine Name drop down list box.
The users added kinetic subroutine must be named as one of the five
USKIN1, USKIN2, USKIN3, USKIN4 and USKIN5 routines and
linked to PRO/II as described in the PRO/II UAS/PDTS Installation
Guide.
To define the stoichiometry:
Define the reaction stoichiometry by clicking on the linked text
Reactants = Products in the Definition column to open the Reaction
Components window. Here you may select the reactants and products
for the reaction and supply the stoichiometric coefficient for each. You
may define the reaction based on the chemical formula of the
component (library components only), or based on the name (for
library, non-library, or petro components).
To define the heat of reaction:
You may define the heat of reaction for any selected reaction in a
specific reaction data set in the Heat of Reaction Data window. This
window appears when you click on the H button beside the
selected reaction on the Reaction Definitions window. In this window
you may choose one of two options:
6aIruIaIad Irom haaI oI FormaIIon. This option allows PRO/II to calculate
the heat of reaction based on the heats of formation for the reaction
components. This is the default.
sarsparIIIad. You supply the heat of reaction (in units of energy/
weight). If you do so, you may also optionally supply the reference
temperature, component, and reference reaction phase.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-115
hale: You must supply heat of reaction data for non-library compo-
nents that do not have heat of formation data. You must also specify the
base component for the reaction.
To supply equilibrium data for a specific reaction in a reaction data
set:
Click on the E button beside the selected reaction in the Reac-
tion Definitions window. The Reaction Equilibrium Data window
appears.
Click on the Define Equilibrium Data check box to enter equilib-
rium data.
You may supply the following data in this window:
LquIIIbrIum 6oaIIIrIanIs. Up to 8 (A-H) coefficients for the equilibrium
equation (at least one coefficient must be supplied).
nIIs. Temperature, weight, volume and pressure units of measure for
the equilibrium data may be supplied by clicking on the linked (under-
lined) text in the units box. (If you do not change the temperature units,
the global units are used by default).
LquIIIbrIum 6onsIanI LxprassIon. The default reaction phase, reaction
activity bases for both vapor and liquid phases, component reaction
phases and exponent orders can be entered here. Click on the Activity
Exponent and Activity Phase button to specify the exponent order and
activity phase for each component in the reaction. The vapor activity
basis is used for all components specified with vapor phase activity
phase while the liquid activity basis is used for all components
specified with liquid phase activity phase.
To supply kinetic data for a specific reaction in a reaction data set:
Click on the K button beside the selected reaction in the Reac-
tion Definitions window. The Reaction Kinetic Data window
appears.
Click on the Define Kinetic Data check box to enter kinetic data.
You may supply the following data in this window:
FraaxponanIIaI FarIor (k). The pre-exponential factor of the power law
kinetic rate equation for the reaction. The default is 1.0.
krIIvaIIon Lnargy. The activation energy of the power law kinetic rate
equation for the reaction in units of energy/weight. A default of zero is
used if a value is not supplied.
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-116
TamparaIura LxponanI. The temperature exponent of the power law
kinetic rate equation for the reaction. A default of zero is used if a value
is not supplied.
aarIIon rdar and krIIvIIy 8asIs. The default reaction phase, reaction
activity bases for both vapor and liquid phases, component reaction
phase and kinetic orders that are used to define the kinetic rate expres-
sion can be entered here. Click the Reaction Order and Activity Phase
button to specify the kinetic reaction order and activity phase for each
component which appeared in the rate expression. The vapor activity
basis is used with all components specified with vapor activity phase
while the liquid activity basis is used with all components specified
with liquid activity phase.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-117
A6T
anaraI InIormaIIon
The Reactor unit operation simulates the operation of many chemical
reactors including conversion reactors, equilibrium reactors, Gibbs (Free
Energy Minimization) reactors, Plug Flow Reactors (PFRs), Continuous
Stirred Tank Reactors (CSTRs), and Boiling Pot Reactors.
In addition to the above reactor types, PRO/II contains built-in Shift and
Methanation reaction data sets for either conversion or equilibrium
reactors.
Faads and FrodurIs
Each reactor may have one or more feed streams. A multiphase product
from the reactor may be separated into streams containing one or more
phase. The allowable product stream phases are vapor, liquid, decanted
water and mixed (vapor+liquid). A mixed phase product is not allowed
with a vapor or a liquid product. The decanted water product is also used
as the second liquid product phase with rigorous VLLE calculations.
If this is more than one product stream, the phases must be allocated to
the streams in the Product Phases window. Access this window by
clicking the Product Phases button on the main Reactor data entry
window for the particular reactor type.
aarIor Typa
For conversion, equilibrium, Gibbs, or plug flow reactors, select the
reactor type by choosing the appropriate reactor icon from the PFD
palette. CSTR and boiling pot reactors share the CST/Boiling Pot
Reactors icon. Select the desired reactor type from a drop-down list box
on the main Reactor data entry window.
aarIIon 8aI
For all reactor types other than the Gibbs reactor, you must select a
reaction data set from the Reaction Set Name drop-down list box
(options include a built-in reaction set, e.g., Shift reaction, or a user-
defined set) on the Reactor main data entry window. For the Gibbs
reactor type, either no reaction data set may be selected (option None),
or a user-defined set may be specified. See the Reaction Data section
earlier in this chapter for more information on specifying reaction data
sets.
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-118
TharmaI 8parIIIraIIons
For most reactor types, the fixed operating temperature, the temperature
rise across the reactor, or the fixed reactor duty may be specified by
using radio buttons and entering values in the appropriate data fields.
The available options are:
TamparaIura Isa. This is the temperature increase across the reactor. This
option is available for conversion and equilibrium reactors only where it is
the default.
6ombInad Faad TamparaIura. The average temperature for all feed
streams to the reactor. This is available for plug flow and Gibbs
reactors, and CSTRs only where it is the default.
FIxad TamparaIura. You may specify the final reactor temperature for all
reactor types.
FIxad uIy. You may specify the reactor duty for all reactor types. A
default value of 0 will be used if a value is not specified. The following
additional reactor information may also be given via the main Reactor
window:
LxIarnaI haaI. For plug flow reactors only, you may specify informa-
tion on the external heating or cooling source by selecting this option,
clicking on the Enter Data button, and entering data in the External
Heating/Cooling window.
TamparaIura FroIIIa. For plug flow reactors only, you may enter the reactor
temperature profile in tabular form as a function of the actual reactor length,
or as a function of percent or fractional distance along the reactor.
aarIor aIa
Click on the Reactor Data icon on the main Reactor data entry
window to open the Reactor Data window where you can supply
reactor configuration information.
6aaverslaa aaJ qulllhrlumeaclars
For these reactor types, you may chose an error handling option by
clicking on the Stop calculations hypertext. The options are:
8Iop 6aIruIaIIons. This stops calculations if an error occurs (e.g., for
negative component flows). This is the default.
6onIInua 6aIruIaIIons WIIh no aarIIon. Continue calculations with no
reaction if an error occurs.
kdd Makaup oI LImIIIng aarIanI. Reduce conversion by adding a make-up
of the limiting reactant if an error occurs.
adura 6onvarsIon. Reduce conversion if an error occurs.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-119
6aallauaus 5llrreJ Taak eaclar
You must provide the reactor volume for CSTRs in the Reactor Data
window. Optionally, you may also provide estimates of the product
flowrate.
Flug Flaweaclar
Enter the following data for PFRs in the Reactor Data window:
aarIor LangIh. The total length of the reactor. This is required.
Tuba InsIda IamaIar. The inside diameter of the PFR tubes. This is
required.
humbar oI Tubas. The total number of tubes in the PFR. Default is 1.
humbar oI FoInIs Ior FroIIIa. The number of equidistant locations along
the reactor length for the temperature profile. Default is 10.
InIagraIIon pIIons. You may select one of four integration options:
G Fixed step size Runge-Kutta method. The Runge-Kutta method
with 20 steps is the default.
G Runge-Kutta method with user-specified step size.
G Gear integration method with user-specified gear tolerance
(default tolerance = 0.1%).
G LSODA (Livermore Solver of Ordinary Differential Algebraic
equations) method with user-specified tolerance (default
tolerance = 0.1%).
8alllag Fal eaclar
You may supply the following reactor calculation options for the
boiling pot reactor in the Reactor Data window:
ToIaranras. The absolute temperature and relative mole fraction and
enthalpy tolerances for the reactor may be changed from their default
values of 0.1, 10
-5
, and 10
-4
respectively.
hale: If the Fixed Duty option is specified on the main Reactor data en-
try window, an estimate of the reactor temperature may optionally be pro-
vided in the Reactor Data window. The minimum and maximum
temperature defaults of - 457.87 F and 4940.33 F may also be overridden.
MaxImum LIquId VoIuma. If a fixed volume is not supplied on the main
Reactor window, you may supply a maximum liquid reactor volume in
this window. A default of 3531.5 ft
3
will be used if a value is not
provided.
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-1?0
InIIIaI VoIuma LsIImaIa. An initial volume estimate may optionally be
supplied in this window.
Component product rate estimates may also be supplied by clicking on
the Product Estimates button on the Reactor Data window.
The number of Broyden trials before the Jacobian matrix is updated
may be specified along with the derivative step size multiplier by
clicking on the appropriate underlined linked text. The defaults are 3
trials and a step size multiplier of 0.01.
lhhs eaclar
For the Gibbs reactor, the user may provide a number of optional calcu-
lation options in the Reactor Data window:
MaxImum IIaraIIons. The maximum number of iterations allowed. The
default is 50.
6onvarganra ToIaranra. The relative convergence tolerance. The default
is 10
-4
for isothermal conditions and 10
-6
for adiabatic conditions.
FIbonarrI ToIaranra. The convergence tolerance for the Fibonacci search
calculations. The default is 0.01.
In addition, you may specify the physical property evaluation method
by clicking on the underlined hypertext. The options are:
LvaIuaIad aI aarh sIap. The physical property values are reevaluated at
each step of the search. This is the default.
sad Irom pravIous IIaraIIon. The physical property values from the
previous iteration are used.
You may select the product rate estimate optionby clicking on the
underlined linked text. The available options are:
FlII daIauII. The default generates an initial estimate of the product
rates using the PRO/II method.
kvaraga oI aII Iaads. This uses the average of all feed rates to generate an
initial product rate estimate.
8uppIIad raarIIng romponanI raIas. This option uses the values given for
the reacting component estimated rates.
Supply reacting components and estimated rates in the Reacting
Components window which is reached by clicking the Reacting
Components and Estimates button on the Reactor Data window.
The options to specify the parameters for the free energy minimization
phase calculations are found in the Phase Split Parameters window
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-1?1
which is opened through the Phase Split Parameters button on the
Reactor Data window.
hale: The Phase Split Parameters window is available only if the Re-
actor Operation Phase is specified as Calculated on the Unit Reaction
Definitions window. See below for Unit Reaction Definitions.
The options available on the Phase Split Parameters window are:
InIIIaI Fhasa LsIImaIa. This entry is the phase used for the initial reactor
calculations. The user may select the vapor, liquid, vapor-liquid,
liquid-liquid, or vapor-liquid-liquid phase. The default is vapor-liquid.
FIrsI Fhasa LvaIuaIIon aI IIaraIIon. Specify the first iteration where the
phase will be reevaluated. The phase should not be evaluated too early
because the reaction results may still be far from the final solution. The
default is 6.
Fhasa LvaIuaIIon Fraquanry. Specify the number of iterations between
phase evaluations. The default is 4.
MInImum Fhasa ToIaranra. When the molar ratio of a phase to the total
quantity of material is less than this value, the phase is considered as non-
existent. The default is 10
-6
.
Atomic groups can be provided in the Atomic Groups window. This
window can be reached by clicking the User-specified Atomic Groups
button on the Reactor Data window.
nII aarIIon aIInIIIons
The reaction phase, heat of reaction, equilibrium data, and kinetic data
for the reactor may be entered in the Unit Reaction Definitions window.
Bring up this window by clicking on the Unit Reaction Definitions
button on the main Reactor window.
hale: Any data previously entered in the Reaction Data Category win-
dow will be transferred to the Unit Reaction Definitions window and
used as default values. You can overwrite the data for a particular re-
actor in the Unit Reactions Definitions window for that reactor.
qulllhrlumeaclar
You may supply the operation phase of the reactor in the Unit Reaction
Definitions window. By clicking on the Equilibrium Data button in
this window, you gain access to the fields where you may supply the
following:
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-1??
LquIIIbrIum 6oaIIIrIanIs. Eight coefficients (A-H) of the equilibrium
equation.
nIIs. The temperature, weight, volume and pressure units of measure
for the equilibrium equation can be changed by clicking on the under-
lined linked text. Options are restricted to R or K for the temperature
units.
6aaverslaa eaclar
You may overwrite the stoichiometric coefficients for the first reaction
in the selected reaction set by clicking the Define the Stoichiometry for
the First Reaction check box. The values of stoichiometric coefficients
are to be determined from the calculation results of the selected calcu-
lator unit. Frequently, this feature is applied as a way to use a single
reaction to represent the overall reaction behavior in the reactor and,
therefore, there is only a single reaction defined in the entire reaction
set. The stoichiometric data displayed in the grid box are merely used
to echo the reaction equation previously defined in the Reaction Data
section.
6aallauausly 5llrreJ Taak eaclar aaJ 8alllag Fal eaclar
You may supply the reactor operation phase, reaction activity basis and
kinetic rate calculation method in the CSTR Unit Reaction Definitions
window.
aarIor paraIIon Fhasa. The options are vapor or liquid phase for the
CSTR, but restricted to liquid phase for the BPR.
aarIIon krIIvIIy 8asIs. For vapor phase, the options are Molar Concen-
tration, Partial Pressure or Fugacity. For liquid phase, the options are
Molar Concentration, Fugacity or Activity. Currently, only homoge-
neous reaction rate expressions based on either vapor or liquid phase
reactions are allowed for the CSTR. For BPRs, heterogeneous reaction
rate expressions are allowed.
kInaIIr aIa 6aIruIaIIon MaIhod. The options are Power Law, User Added
Subroutine or Kinetic Procedure. If the default is used, the reation rates
are computed by power law kinetics in the form of the general
Arrhenius equation. For any of these methods, kinetic data can be
entered through the Kinetic Data button.
FoWar LaW. The default method.
sar kddad kInaIIr 8ubrouIIna. This option directs the CSTR mod-
ule to use a User-added Subroutine (UAS) written in FORTRAN to
perform reaction rate calculations. Specify a Subroutine Name in
the Unit Kinetic Data window. The identifiying arguments for the
subroutine name U1, U2 U5 correspond to user-added
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-1?3
subroutines USKIN1 USKIN5, respectively. After selecting
the user added kinetic subroutine, you can enter local values (i.e.,
specific just to this reactor) for variables to be used for the rate cal-
culation. Use the upper left table to supply local values for an array
of real variables, the lower left table for any array of integer vari-
ables and the upper right for an additional (Supplemental) array of
real variables. These local data, kinetic reaction data specified in
the selected reaction set, and thermophysical property data of the
reaction mixture will be provided to the selected kinetic subroutine
for reaction rate calculations. Refer to the PRO/II User-added Sub-
routine Users Manual for instructions on creating and installing
UASs.
kInaIIr Froradura. This option directs the CSTR module to use a
user-supplied in-line kinetic Procedure to perform reaction rate cal-
culations. After selecting the name of the Procedure (which must be
first defined in the Procedure Data section), you can enter values
for local variables in a way similar to that for the User Added Ki-
netic Subroutine mentioned above. Additionally, you may provide
the values for those procedure variables (PDATA) used by the se-
lected Procedure.
Flug Flaweaclar
Data that may be specified for the Plug Flow Reactor are the same as
those described above for the CSTR.
FraaxponanIIaI FarIor. The pre-exponential factor for the kinetic power
law rate equation. The default is 1.
krIIvaIIon Lnargy. The activation energy for the kinetic power law rate
equation. The default is 0.
TamparaIura LxponanI. The temperature exponent for the kinetic power
law rate equation. The default is 0.
8asa 6omponanI. A base component must be supplied for the kinetic
reaction rate report.
aarIIon rdar and krIIvIIy 8asIs. As is done in the Reaction Data
section on a global basis, the default reaction phase, reaction activity
bases for both vapor and liquid phases, component reaction phase and
kinetic orders that are used to define the kinetic rate expression can be
entered here as local data for this reactor. Click on the Reaction Order
and Activity Phase button to specify the kinetic reaction order and
activity phase for each component which appears in the rate expression.
The vapor activity basis is used for all components specified with vapor
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-1?4
activity phase while the liquid activity basis is used for all components
specified with liquid activity phase.
lhhs eaclar
You may specify the phase of the reactor operation in the Unit Reaction
Definitions window. The reaction phase options are Calculated
(default), Vapor, Liquid, Vapor-Liquid, Liquid-Liquid or Vapor-Liquid-
Liquid. If Calculated is selected, PRO/II will determine the phase as
part of the free energy minimization calculation. If a phase is selected,
the calculations wil be based on the selected phase.
LxIanI oI aarIIon
To specify the extent of the reaction for a conversion, equilibrium and
Gibbs reactors only. Click on the Extent of Reaction button on the
main Reactor data entry window to open the Extent of Reaction
window.
6aaverslaa eaclar
You may select the base component from which the conversion data
were determined. If the base component is not selected (select none),
the stoichiometric coefficients of the reaction will be taken as the
absolute moles reacted. You may supply constants for the second order
temperature-dependent fractional conversion equation in this window.
Default values for the constants are given in the table. Click on the
underlined linked text to change the temperature units of measure for
the conversion reaction. If the temperature units of measure are not
specified locally, the problem temperature units are used.
qulllhrlumeaclar
The base component for user-supplied reactions must be specified in
this window Extent of Reaction window. You may access this window
via the Reaction Set window which contains a list of the reactions that
have earlier been defined for the flowsheet. Upon choosing the desired
equation, the Extent of Reaction window appears. (The base compo-
nents of built-in reactions such as Shift and Methanation are predeter-
mined and need not be supplied by the user.)
You may specify the approach to conversion either as a temperature or
a fractional approach. As was the case with the Conversion reactor, you
may supply constants for the second order temperature-dependent frac-
tional conversion equation in this window. Default values for the
constants are given in the table. Click on the underlined linked text to
change the temperature units of measure for the conversion reaction. If
the temperature units of measure are not specified locally, the problem
temperature units are used.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-1?5
lhhs eaclar
The extent of reaction can be provided on a global basis in the Extent of
Reaction window (as a component percent converted, or as a
component product rate). The extent of reaction can also be specified
for each individual reaction as a temperature approach or a base
component product rate.
kmounI oI 6aIaIysI
For boiling pot reactors only, you can specify the amount of a nonvola-
tile catalyst componenton a weight or molar fraction, or total weight or
mole basis in the Catalytic Components window (which may be
reached by clicking on the Catalysts button on the Reactor Data
window). Before the button becomes active, the following conditions
must be met:
G You must specify the catalytic component with a reaction
stoichiometry of 0. (Input/Reaction Data(Enter Data)/
Reaction Definitions(Definition)/ Reaction Components). See
the previous section on Reaction Data for more information on
defining reaction data sets.
You must specify the reaction order for the catalytic component as any
number other than 0 in the Reaction Order & Activity Phase window.
This window may be accessed by clicking on the like-named button located
on the Unit Reaction Definitions/Unit Kinetic Data window for the boiling
pot reactor, or by the following path: Input/Reaction Data(Enter
Data)/Reaction Definitions/(K)/Kinetic Reaction Data(Reaction
Order & Activity Phase).
Frassura
For conversion, equilibrium, Gibbs reactors and CSTRs, clicking the
Pressure button on the main Reactor window allows you to enter the
following reactor pressure options in the Pressure data entry window:
Frassura rop. The pressure drop across the reactor. This defaults to 0 if
not supplied.
uIIaI Frassura. The pressure at the reactor outlet.
For the plug flow reactor, either the inlet and outlet pressure or a
pressure profile along the reactor length (actual length, or percent or
fraction of tube length) may be entered on the Pressure window:
InIaI. Either the pressure drop below feed (the default is 0 psi), or the
inlet pressure may be supplied.
uIIaI. Either the pressure drop below inlet (the default is 0 psi), or the
outlet pressure may be supplied.
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-1?6
FrInI pIIons
For all reactor types except the Gibbs reactor, the following print option
is available through the Print Options window:
FrInI 6aIruIaIIon FaIh Ior LnIhaIpy 8aIanra. This option prints the calcula-
tion path for the heat of reaction calculation.
TharmodynamIr 8ysIam
The thermodynamic system of methods for the reactor calculations may
be selected by choosing a method from the Thermodynamic System
drop-down list box on the main Reactor window.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-1?7
A6T, 8AT6h
anaraI InIormaIIon
The Batch Reactor unit operation models material production as a
result of simultaneous and/or sequential reactions in the liquid contents
of a reactor vessel. Phase equilibrium analysis during the reaction
allows for the tracking or removal of vapor phase products. The Batch
Reactor may be run in a true batch simulation mode, with the reactants
charged to the reactor vessel prior to the onset of reactions, and product
taken from the vessel at the end of reaction process, or in a semi-batch
mode where reactants may be introduced throughout the reaction
process. Batch reactor calculations may also be integrated into a
steady-state process simulation. The unit configuration automatically
considers the presence of holding tanks for steady flow streams to
provide the time-variant reactants to the batch unit. Implicit holding
tanks are also considered for the product streams to provide a coupling
of the time-variant process to the continuous process simulation envi-
ronment. A representation of the product steady flow stream comes
from an overall process time average of the quantity accumulated into a
given product.
Currently, the Batch Reactor supports only liquid-phase reactions. A
reaction may produce one or more vapor constituents. Whether the
vapor constituent(s) will return to the liquid phase and again be
available for reaction(s) will be determined by equilibrium analysis
done at the end of each time step.
TharmodynamIr 8ysIam
The thermodynamic system for the unit is selected by using the Ther-
modynamic System drop-down list box in the Batch Reactor dialog box.
Batch Reactor also allows the use of electrolyte thermodynamic
methods.
aIaIIad InIormaIIon
For detailed information about the use of the Batch Reactor unit
operation, consult the PRO/II Add-On Modules Users Guide.
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-1?8
5Ll 5FAAT
anaraI InIormaIIon
The Solid Separator unit models the separation of solid phase material
from a mixture of feed streams. The unit operates adiabatically at the
lowest of the individual feed stream pressures.
Faad and FrodurI 8Iraams
The solid separator unit can have up to ten (10) feed streams. The inlet
thermal condition is determined by an adiabatic flash calculation at the
lowest feed stream pressure.
The solid separator requires both overhead and bottoms product
streams.
6aIruIaIIon MaIhod
The solid separator provides the option of specifying the fraction of the
solid components in the total feed that is removed in the bottoms
stream. The default fraction of the solid components removed in the
bottoms stream is 1.00. An adiabatic flash calculation is used to
determine the product phases and the outlet temperature based upon the
thermal condition of the combined feed.
The solid separator unit supports both VLE (two phase) and VLLE
(three phase) calculations to determine the individual phase composi-
tions. See the online Technical Information discussion entitled VLE
Model and VLLE Model for more details. To access the main data entry
window for VLE and VLLE calculations, select Tools/Binary VLE from
the menu bar.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-1?9
5FLlTT
anaraI InIormaIIon
This unit may be used to split a single feed or mixture of feeds into two
or more products of identical composition and phase condition. The
outlet stream pressure may be specified, if desired, and an adiabatic
flash used to determine the outlet temperature and phase. A choice of
options is provided for splits in which insufficient feed is available to
meet the specified product rates.
Faads and FrodurIs
A splitter may have multiple feed streams. The lowest feed pressure is
used for the pressure of the combined feed.
A splitter must have two or more product streams. All product streams
have identical compositions and phase conditions. Phase separation of
product streams is not available in this unit, and, if desired, a Flash unit
operation must be used for this purpose.
FrodurI aIa 8parIIIraIIons
For a splitter with N product streams, N-1 product stream rates must be
specified. Product rate specifications are supplied by clicking on the
underlined hypertext strings in the Product Rate Specifications section of
the Splitter main data entry window. All of the splitter product streams are
listed and any one may be used for the unspecified rate.
Specifications use the general specification format and are further
described in the SPEC/VARY/DEFINE section of this chapter. Only
specifications that are rate dependent are allowed, e.g., stream or
component(s) rate total, stream or component(s) recovery, stream
enthalpy, etc.
uIIaI Frassura 8parIIIraIIon
The outlet pressure for the splitter products may be changed by
applying a pressure drop to the lowest feed pressure. This value is
supplied in the Pressure Specification window which is accessed by
clicking the Pressure Specification button on the Splitter main data
entry window.
When a pressure drop is supplied, the resulting outlet temperature and
phase condition are determined by an adiabatic flash calculation from
the composite feed inlet conditions.
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-130
InadaquaIa Faad aIa pIIons
There are two options for situations in which insufficient feed is
available to satisfy all product stream rate specifications. They may be
selected by radio buttons on the Splitter main data entry window:
8aIIsIy Larh 8parIIIraIIon In rdar nIII Faad Is LxhausIad. Each specification
is satisfied in the order of the products until the feed is exhausted. The
product stream that encounters insufficient feed is limited to the feed
available and the remaining products are assigned zero rates. (This is
the default option.)
8aIIsIy Larh 8parIIIraIIon and hormaIIta FIoWraIas II haadad. All specified
product rate specifications are satisfied and the resultant rates are
normalized to the total feed rate. The product with the unspecified rate
is assigned a zero flow.
The order of the product streams in the list box may be changed, if
desired, by clicking the Change Stream Specification Order button
on the Splitter main data entry window. You can reset a stream specifi-
cation by clicking the Reset Stream Specification button on the
Splitter main data entry window.
TharmodynamIr 8ysIam
The thermodynamic system of methods to be used for splitter calcula-
tions may be selected by choosing a method from the Thermodynamic
System drop-down list box on the Splitter main data entry window.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-131
5TAM 6AL6uLAT
anaraI InIormaIIon
The Stream Calculator unit blends any number of feed streams and
splits them into two product streams with defined compositions and
thermal condition. It may also be used to create a pseudoproduct
stream based on the blended feeds or by defining the amount of each
component in the stream.
Faads and FrodurIs
The stream calculator may have any number of feed streams. Scale
factors (positive or negative) may be applied to all feeds in the Feed
Scaling window in order to create a mixed feed with the desired
composition. If scale factors other than 1.0 are used, the unit will not
material balance. Multiple feed streams are flashed at the lowest feed
stream pressure.
For stream splitting, both the overhead and bottoms product are
required. In order to create a stream, a pseudoproduct must be defined.
The feeds may be split and a pseudoproduct created in the same stream
calculator unit. If there is no feed to the unit, only a pseudoproduct
may be specified.
A multiphase product from the stream calculator may be separated into
streams containing one or more phase. The allowable product stream
phases are vapor, liquid, decanted water and mixed (vapor+liquid). A
mixed phase product is not allowed with a vapor or a liquid product.
The decanted water product is also used as the second liquid product
phase with rigorous VLLE calculations.
If any product, overheads or bottoms, has more than one stream
attached, the phases must be allocated to the streams in the Product
Phases window which is accessed by clicking the Product Phases
button in the overhead or bottoms product windows.
Moda oI paraIIon
The mode of operation is specified by the number of feeds and products
attached to the unit so it is important to connect the streams correctly
before entering the unit data.
8Iraam8pIIIIIng
In order to define the component splits, specifications must be entered
in the Product Specifications window to define how much of each
component goes into either the overhead or the bottoms product.
Specifications may be on single components or on ranges of contiguous
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-13?
components. Several specifications may be required and some may
specify the amount of components in the overhead and others the
amount in the bottoms product. Each component must appear in one,
and only one, specification. The component rates, recovery or compo-
sition in a product may be specified.
The thermal condition of the products may optionally be defined in the
Overhead Product Conditions window and the Bottoms Product Condi-
tions window. Pressure defaults to the lowest feed pressure. If no
temperature specification is supplied for either product, the product
temperatures are set equal at a value calculated from the enthalpy
balance, using the duty entered on the Stream Calculator window. If
one temperature is supplied, the other temperature is calculated to meet
the enthalpy balance. If both temperatures are given, duty is calculated.
Temperature specifications may be a temperature value, the temperature
rise above the feed, dew or bubble point or an approach to dew or
bubble point.
8Iraam6raaIIon
In order to define the pseudoproduct, specifications must be entered in
the Pseudoproduct Specifications window to define how much of each
component is in the product. Specifications may be on single compo-
nents or on ranges of contiguous components and several specifications
may be required. At least one specification must be defined. Any
component which does not appear in a specification will be set to zero
in the pseudoproduct. If the unit has feeds, component rates, recovery
or composition in the product may be specified, Otherwise, the
component rates must be defined.
If there is no feed to the unit, pseudoproduct thermal condition must be
defined in the Pseudoproduct Conditions window. If there is a feed, the
temperature and pressure specifications are optional. The pressure
defaults to lowest feed pressure and the temperature is calculated to
satisfy the enthalpy balance. If a duty is supplied, it will be used only
for the stream splitting enthalpy balance. Duty is not used for the pseu-
doproduct enthalpy balance.
Temperature specifications may be a temperature value, the temperature
rise above the feed, dew or bubble point or an approach to dew or
bubble point. If there is no feed, the temperature rise specification
cannot be used.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-133
hagaIIva 6omponanI aIas
It is possible to specify the unit such that negative component rates are
calculated in a product stream. The appropriate action if this happens
is selected from:
G reset any negative rates to zero (this is the default)
G reset the rates to their absolute value
G the unit should fail.
TharmodynamIr 8ysIam
The thermodynamic system of methods to be used for the stream calcu-
lator may be selected by choosing a method from the Thermodynamic
System drop-down list box on the Stream Calculator main data entry
window.
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-134
5F6/vA/Flh
anaraI InIormaIIon
PRO/II has an extensive system of cross-referencing for flowsheet
parameters. Flowsheet parameters include operating conditions for unit
operations, calculated results from unit operations, and stream flows,
compositions, and properties. For example, the supplied outlet pressure
for a Pump, the calculated temperature for a dew point Flash, and the
simulated D86 ninety-five percent distilled temperature for a Column
product stream are all flowsheet parameters.
Most unit operation parameters may be either DEFINEd or SPECified
relative to any other flowsheet parameter in the problem. Some unit
operations may VARY a flowsheet parameter that would ordinarily
remain constant at the input value. The table below summarizes the
methods for cross-referencing flowsheet parameters:
8FL6. A unit operation or stream performance specification (calculated
result) must meet a desired value, either on an absolute basis or relative
basis.
VkY. A unit operation or stream flowsheet parameter is varied from
the supplied value.
LFIhL. A unit operation parameter is defined by cross-reference to
another flowsheet parameter.
PRO/II uses a common format for the SPECification, VARY, and
DEFINE features. Each feature is discussed separately below. Tables
are also presented with cross-reference availabilities of the flowsheet
parameters for streams and the unit operations.
8FL6IIIraIIons
By definition, a SPECification must always be a calculated flowsheet
result. The following unit operations use the generalized SPEC format
to define the performance of the unit: Flash, Splitter, Column/Side
Column, and Controller.
A SPEC has the following general form:
Parameter = value within the default tolerance
A choice for the Parameter and a numeric entry for the value must be
supplied by clicking on the underlined hypertext strings to gain access
to the pertinent data entry fields. Optionally, the tolerance basis may be
changed from the default to absolute or relative and the default
tolerance value of 0.02 replaced by direct entry.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-135
Click on the Parameter hypertext to access the Parameter window.
Choose the Stream or Unit from the drop-down list box.
Select the unit or stream name in the drop-down list box.
Finally, click on the Parameter hypertext and select the desired pa-
rameter from the window that is displayed. Note that only those
unit or stream parameters that are valid for use as a SPEC are avail-
able.
If the SPEC is not related to another flowsheet parameter:
Click OK to return to the unit specification.
Click on the value hypertext, and enter the desired numeric value
for the SPEC.
To create a mathematical expression for the SPEC:
Select the = sign linked text and select an option from the pop-up
window. Choices are as follows:
ho paraIor.
Primary parameter only (the default)
+ paraIor .
Primary parameter plus reference parameter
(SUM)
paraIor .
Primary parameter minus reference parameter
(DIFFERENCE)
l paraIor .
Primary parameter divided by reference parameter (RATIO)
x paraIor .
Primary parameter times reference parameter (TIMES)
Select the Reference Parameter and click on the Parameter text
string, and select the desired reference parameter from the list
which is displayed.
hale: Only those unit or stream parameters which are valid for a
specification are available.
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-136
Click the OK button to return to the unit specification window;
then click on the value linked text string to enter the desired nu-
meric value for the SPEC.
The following examples illustrate the use of SPECs:
LxampIa 1. aId Vapor Frassura oI sIraam 8108 = 6.0
Liit cr strcam paramctcr = a va|0c within a rc|ativc tc|craicc cf 0.0?
| |
| |G.Oj
5eclllcallaa
unit/Stream Stream hame Faramctcr Wiidcw
|Streamj |S1O8j
Farameter
|vaor Fressurej
Example 2: Duty of exchanger X103/ Duty of exchanger X104 = 1.0
+ 0.001
Liit cr strcam paramctcr = a va|0c within a rc|ativc tc|craicc cf 0.0?
| | | |
| |1.Oj |absolutej |O.OO1j
5eclllcallaa
unit/Stream unit hame Faramctcr window
|heat Exchangerj |X1O8j
Farameter
|Butyj
elereace: |/ Farameter =j
Relerence Farameter
unit/Stream unit hame Faramctcr window
|heat Exchangerj |X1O4j
Farameter
|Butyj
Note: [ ] denotes user input.
VkYs
For each SPEC in a flowsheet, there must be one VARY or degree of
freedom. The VARY for the Flash unit is implicitly defined, i.e., not
defined explicitly by the user. For Flash units with specifications, the
degree of freedom is the temperature when the pressure or pressure drop is
given and the pressure when the temperature is supplied. Other unit opera-
tions which have VARYs are the Column/Side Column and the Controller.
A VARY is always a flowsheet parameter that has a fixed versus calculated
value in the flowsheet.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-137
For Columns/Side Columns a VARY may be a feed stream rate, product
draw rate, or a heat duty. For example, the lean oil feed rate to a
column may be defined as a VARY in order to meet a specification on
the propane recovery for the column. Ordinarily, the lean oil feed rate
would have a fixed or constant rate in the flowsheet.
Controllers have VARYs that are associated with other unit operations.
For example, the supplied outlet pressure for a Compressor may be a
VARY for a Controller. Note that this flowsheet parameter would ordi-
narily have a fixed or constant value in the flowsheet. On the other
hand, the calculated temperature for a dew point Flash unit could not
be used as a VARY, since this is a flowsheet parameter that is deter-
mined by the flowsheet calculations.
A VARY has the following general form:
Vary Parameter
To enter a parameter:
Click on the underlined hypertext string to access the Variable win-
dow.
From this window, select the type of vary, i.e., stream or unit type,
in the drop-down list box.
Next, select the unit or stream name in the adjacent drop-down list
box.
Finally, click on the Parameter hypertext string and select the de-
sired parameter to be varied from the list.
hale: Only those unit or stream parameters which are valid for use as
a VARY are available.
The following example illustrates the use of VARYs:
LxampIa 8. Tha IamparaIura Ior IsoIharmaI IIash unII 101 Is
varIad by a 6aalraller.
vary unit or stream arameter |
|
5eclllcallaa
unit/Stream unit hame Varia||c window
|Flashj |B1O1j
Farameter
|Temeraturej
Note: [ ] denotes user input.
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-138
LFIhL
The DEFINE is used to dynamically define the value for a flowsheet
parameter that ordinarily has a fixed versus calculated value in the
flowsheet. Thus, the value for a unit operating condition may be set to
a value that is based on a calculated flowsheet parameter. For example,
the DEFINE may be used to set the temperature for an isothermal Flash
to the temperature that is calculated for a Compressor outlet stream
plus 10 degrees. This concept greatly enhances the flowsheeting capa-
bility of PRO/II, and, in fact, nearly every unit operation input
parameter may be DEFINEd in PRO/II.
To define a flowsheet parameter:
Select the parameter in the appropriate window for the unit opera-
tion. At this point the Define button on the toolbar is activated if
the parameter may be DEFINEd. Click the Define button to ac-
cess the Definition window.
From this window, select the check box to enable the DEFINE options.
Click on the Parameter text string and select the desired parameter
from the window which is displayed.
hale: Only those unit or stream parameters which are valid for use as
a DEFINE are available.
If the DEFINE is not related to another flowsheet parameter
click OK to return to the unit window. If the DEFINE is related to
another flowsheet parameter, establish the appropriate mathemati-
cal relationship. Mathematical expressions for a DEFINE are cre-
ated in a manner completely analogous to that described above on
page 9-136 for a SPEC.
Select the reference parameter type in the same manner as used to
select the primary parameter.
Click the OK button in the child windows to return to the unit op-
eration window.
For a constant:
Select Constant from the Constant/Stream/Unit drop-down list box
in the Parameter window.
Enter a numerical constant in the supplied data entry field.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-139
The following example illustrates the use of a DEFINE:
LxampIa 4. Flh Iha IamparaIura Ior Flask drum 108 Io
ba Iha IamparaIura oI sIraam 8104 mInus 16 dagraas.
|Select the temerature lield on the Flash Second Secilicationj
|Fush the aIIna button on the Toolbarj
|Select the check box to set u the Belinej
|
Frimary Farameter.
unit/Stream/Constant unit hame Lcfiiitici window
|Streamj |S1O4j
Farameter
|Temeraturej
elereace: |= Farameter Farameterj
Relerence Farameter.
unit/Stream/Constant value
|Constantj |15.Oj
Note that the DEFINE is nearly identical in structure to the SPEC.
8Iraam FaramaIars kvaIIabIa Ior 6rossaIaranrIng
8FL68 LFIhL
1
VkY
Z
FaramaIar FIash 8pIIIIar 6oIumn 6onIroIIar kII nIIs 6onIroIIar
Temerature Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Fressure Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Enthaly Yes Yes Yes Yes
Mole weight Yes Yes Yes Yes
Total Flow Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Comonent Flow Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Comosition Yes Yes Yes Yes
Fhase Fraction Yes Yes Yes
Bensity/volume Yes Yes Yes Yes
Bistillation Curve Yes Yes Yes Yes
vaor Fressure Yes Yes Yes Yes
Transort Froerty Yes Yes Yes Yes
Relining Froerty Yes Yes Yes Yes
Secial user Froerty Yes Yes Yes Yes
1 In general, any applicable stream property may be used to define a unit operating condition. Note that not
all stream properties are applicable to all unit operating conditions.
2 With the exception of the Column, only the Controller may vary stream parameters. The Column may
vary the total flow of a feed strean.
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-140
nII FaramaIars kvaIIabIa Ior 6rossaIaranrIng
WIIhIn paraIIon LxIarnaI 6onIroIIars
nII FaramaIar 8FL6 VkY LFIhL aIaranra
1
8FL6 VkY
6alculalar
Result Yes Yes Yes Yes
Farameter Yes
5lream 6alculalar
Temerature Yes Yes
Fressure Yes Yes
Belta T Yes Yes
Tem. 8elow 8ubble Ft. Yes Yes
Tem. Above Bew Ft. Yes Yes
Belta F Yes Yes
Feed Colactor Yes Yes
Buty Yes Yes Yes
Frac. 0verhead Yes Yes
Frac. 8ottoms Yes Yes
Frac. Froduct Yes Yes
0verheat Rate Yes Yes
8ottoms Rate Yes Yes
Froduct Rate Yes Yes
Com. 0verhead Yes Yes
Com. 8ottoms Yes Yes
Com. Froduct Yes Yes
6aalraller
Secilication Yes
Mv6
Secilication Yes
llmlzer
Secilication Yes
Constraint Yes
6aluma
Rellux Yes Yes Yes
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-141
nII FaramaIars kvaIIabIa Ior 6rossaIaranrIng
WIIhIn paraIIon LxIarnaI 6onIroIIars
nII FaramaIar 8FL6 VkY LFIhL aIaranra
1
8FL6 VkY
Rellux Ratio Yes Yes Yes
Buty Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Feed Rate Yes Yes
Braw Rate Yes
Secilication Yes
Fercent ol Flood Yes Yes Yes
Max % ol Flood Yes Yes
Bowncomer 8/u Yes Yes Yes
Max B.C. 8/u Yes Yes
CS Aroach Yes
Flood Aroach Yes
Tray Biameter Yes Yes
Max Tray Biam. Yes Yes
Condenser Fres Yes Yes
To Tray Fres Yes Yes
Tray Belta F Yes Yes
Column Belta F Yes Yes
Tray Tem Yes Yes Yes
Feed Tray ho Yes Yes
Braw Tray ho Yes Yes
Buty Tray ho Yes Yes
Tray Elly Factor Yes Yes Yes
F/A Rate Yes Yes
F/A Return T Yes Yes
Froduct Moles Yes
Tkermaslkaa ehaller
Circulation Rate Yes Yes Yes
vaor Fraction Yes Yes Yes
Liquid Fraction Yes Yes Yes
0utlet Tem Yes Yes Yes
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-14?
nII FaramaIars kvaIIabIa Ior 6rossaIaranrIng
WIIhIn paraIIon LxIarnaI 6onIroIIars
nII FaramaIar 8FL6 VkY LFIhL aIaranra
1
8FL6 VkY
Belta T Yes Yes Yes
LLX
Secilication Yes
To Tray Fres Yes
Feed Rate Yes Yes
Braw Rate Yes Yes
Buty Yes Yes
Fum
Temerature Yes Yes
0utlet Fres Yes Yes Yes Yes
Belta F Yes Yes Yes Yes
Fres. ratio Yes Yes Yes Yes
work Yes Yes
head Yes Yes
Elliciency Yes Yes
Fle
Biameter Yes Yes Yes Yes
Max velocity Yes Yes Yes Yes
Average velocity Yes Yes
Belta F Yes Yes
Buty Yes Yes Yes Yes
Rel Roughness Yes Yes Yes
Abs Roughness Yes Yes Yes
Friction Factor Yes Yes Yes
Flow Elliciency Yes Yes Yes
Length Yes Yes Yes
heat Transler Coell. Yes Yes Yes
Ambient Tem Yes
Belta F Max Yes
KFactor Yes Yes
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-143
nII FaramaIars kvaIIabIa Ior 6rossaIaranrIng
WIIhIn paraIIon LxIarnaI 6onIroIIars
nII FaramaIar 8FL6 VkY LFIhL aIaranra
1
8FL6 VkY
5lmle xckaager
Buty Yes Yes Yes Yes
Cold Belta F Yes Yes Yes Yes
Cold T 0ut Yes Yes Yes
Cold Liq Fr Yes Yes
Cold Subcool Yes Yes
Cold Su'heat Yes Yes
hot Belta F Yes Yes Yes Yes
hot T 0ut Yes Yes Yes
hot Liq Fr Yes Yes
hot Subcool Yes Yes
hot Su'heat Yes Yes
LMTB Yes Yes
Zoned LMTB Yes Yes
0verall u Yes Yes Yes Yes
Area Yes Yes Yes Yes
u ` Area Yes Yes Yes Yes
Ft Factor Yes Yes Yes Yes
Aroach Yes Yes Yes Yes
MTA (Finch) Yes Yes
Min. Aroach Yes Yes Yes Yes
lgaraus heal xckaager
Buty Yes Yes Yes
0verall u Yes Yes
Estimated u
Area Yes Yes Yes Yes
u`Area Yes Yes Yes
LMTB Yes Yes
Shell T 0ut Yes Yes Yes Yes
Tube T 0ut Yes Yes Yes Yes
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-144
nII FaramaIars kvaIIabIa Ior 6rossaIaranrIng
WIIhIn paraIIon LxIarnaI 6onIroIIars
nII FaramaIar 8FL6 VkY LFIhL aIaranra
1
8FL6 VkY
Tube Foul Factor Yes Yes Yes Yes
Shell Foul Factor Yes Yes Yes Yes
Required Foul Factor Yes Yes Yes
Lh heal xckaager
Buty Yes Yes
T 0ut Yes Yes Yes Yes
Single Stream Buty Yes Yes Yes Yes
Belta F Yes Yes Yes
u`Area Yes Yes
LMTB Yes Yes
MTA Yes Yes
5llller
Temerature Yes Yes Yes
Fressure Yes Yes Yes Yes
Belta F Yes Yes Yes Yes
Secilication Yes
valve
Temerature Yes Yes
Fressure Yes Yes Yes Yes
Belta F Yes Yes Yes Yes
Camressar
0utlet Tem Yes Yes Yes Yes
0utlet Fres Yes Yes Yes Yes
Belta F Yes Yes Yes Yes
Comr. Ratio Yes Yes Yes Yes
Actual work Yes Yes Yes Yes
head Yes Yes Yes Yes
Adiab. Elly Yes Yes Yes Yes
Foly Elly Yes Yes Yes Yes
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-145
nII FaramaIars kvaIIabIa Ior 6rossaIaranrIng
WIIhIn paraIIon LxIarnaI 6onIroIIars
nII FaramaIar 8FL6 VkY LFIhL aIaranra
1
8FL6 VkY
Max. Fress Yes Yes
Cooler BF Yes Yes
Cooler Tem Yes Yes
Tem Estimate Yes
RFM Yes Yes Yes
Curve RFM Yes Yes Yes
xaaJer
0utlet Tem Yes Yes
0utlet Fres Yes Yes Yes Yes
Fressure Bro Yes Yes Yes Yes
Exans. Ratio Yes Yes Yes Yes
Actual work Yes Yes Yes Yes
head Yes Yes
Adiab. Elly Yes Yes Yes Yes
Min. Fressure Yes Yes
Flask
Temerature Yes Yes Yes Yes
Fressure Yes Yes Yes Yes
Belta F Yes Yes Yes Yes
Buty Yes Yes Yes Yes
Secilication Yes
Entrainment Yes Yes
Fseudo Frod. Yes
Mlxer
Temerature Yes
Fressure Yes Yes Yes Yes
Belta F Yes Yes Yes Yes
Secilication Yes
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-146
nII FaramaIars kvaIIabIa Ior 6rossaIaranrIng
WIIhIn paraIIon LxIarnaI 6onIroIIars
nII FaramaIar 8FL6 VkY LFIhL aIaranra
1
8FL6 VkY
Fum
Temerature Yes Yes Yes
0utlet Fres Yes Yes Yes Yes
Belta F Yes Yes Yes Yes
Fress Ratio Yes Yes Yes Yes
work Yes Yes
head Yes Yes
Elliciency Yes Yes
qulllhrlum eaclar
Temerature Yes Yes Yes Yes
Fressure Yes Yes Yes Yes
Belta F Yes Yes Yes Yes
Buty Yes Yes Yes Yes
Conversion Yes Yes Yes Yes
Stoic. Coell. Yes
6aaverslaa eaclar
Temerature Yes Yes Yes Yes
Fressure Yes Yes Yes Yes
Belta F Yes Yes Yes Yes
Buty Yes Yes Yes Yes
Conversion Yes Yes Yes Yes
lhhs
Temerature Yes Yes Yes Yes
Fressure Yes Yes Yes Yes
Belta F Yes Yes Yes Yes
Buty Yes Yes Yes Yes
FF
Temerature Yes Yes Yes Yes
Fressure Yes Yes Yes Yes
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-147
nII FaramaIars kvaIIabIa Ior 6rossaIaranrIng
WIIhIn paraIIon LxIarnaI 6onIroIIars
nII FaramaIar 8FL6 VkY LFIhL aIaranra
1
8FL6 VkY
Belta F Yes Yes
nlet Fres. Yes Yes
Belta F n Yes Yes
Buty Yes Yes Yes Yes
Tube Biameter Yes Yes
Length Yes Yes
ho. ol Tubes Yes Yes
u Yes Yes
Max veloc. Yes Yes Yes
Tem n Yes Yes Yes
Tem 0ut Yes Yes
Freex. Factor Yes Yes
Activation E Yes Yes
Conversion Yes Yes Yes
65T/8alllag Fal
Temerature Yes Yes Yes Yes
Fressure Yes Yes Yes Yes
Belta F Yes Yes Yes Yes
Buty Yes Yes Yes Yes
Conversion Yes Yes
Freex lactor Yes Yes Yes
Activation E Yes Yes Yes
volume Yes Yes Yes
Min. Tem. Yes Yes
Max. Tem. Yes Yes
Max. veloc. Yes Yes
eressurlag
Final Fres. Yes Yes Yes Yes
Reliel Fres. Yes Yes Yes
Final Time Yes Yes Yes Yes
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-148
nII FaramaIars kvaIIabIa Ior 6rossaIaranrIng
WIIhIn paraIIon LxIarnaI 6onIroIIars
nII FaramaIar 8FL6 VkY LFIhL aIaranra
1
8FL6 VkY
Reliel Time Yes Yes Yes
Reliel Buration Yes Yes Yes Yes
valve Constant Yes Yes Yes
valve 8ack F. Yes Yes
valve Coell. Yes Yes Yes
Critical Flow Factor Yes Yes Yes
nit. wetted A Yes Yes Yes
hT Area Yes Yes Yes
hT Coell Yes Yes Yes
hTC Fac Yes Yes Yes
vaor hTC Yes Yes Yes
Liquid hTC Yes Yes Yes
Coell C1 Yes Yes Yes
Coell C2 Yes Yes Yes
Coell C8 Yes Yes Yes
Coell C4 Yes Yes Yes
Coell C5 Yes Yes Yes
Final Tem Yes Yes
Final Buty Yes Yes
Final vent Rate Yes Yes
vess. vol. Yes Yes
Liquid holdu Yes Yes
vess. Biam. Yes Yes
vol. Corr. Fac. Yes Yes
ht. ol holdu Yes Yes
vess weight Yes Yes
vess. CF Yes Yes
Tantan vess. Length Yes Yes
Tantan vess. height Yes Yes
Time Ste Yes Yes
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-149
nII FaramaIars kvaIIabIa Ior 6rossaIaranrIng
WIIhIn paraIIon LxIarnaI 6onIroIIars
nII FaramaIar 8FL6 VkY LFIhL aIaranra
1
8FL6 VkY
sen Ell. Yes Yes Yes
heat Scal. Fac. Yes Yes Yes
Area Scal. Fac. Yes Yes Yes
1 Available for any SPEC or DEFINE.
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-150
u5-A uhlT FATlh5
anaraI InIormaIIon
The PRO/II User-added Unit Operation capability enables users to add
their own FORTRAN subroutines to simulate any type of unit operation
or to perform calculations on flowsheet parameters. The subroutine
must first be linked into the PRO/II program and it is then accessed via
the graphical user interface in the same way as any other unit operation.
The User-added Unit Operation has access to the PRO/II physical
property data and may call the PRO/II flash and property calculation
subroutines. Other information, such as input and output dimensional
units, is also available. See the PRO/II Data Transfer System and
User-Added Subroutine Users Guide for information on writing and inter-
facing User-Added Unit Operation subroutines.
The developer of the User-added Unit Operation can also customize the
User-added Unit Operation Data window to request only data which
may be required for the calculations.
hale: If transport properties are required in the User-added Unit Op-
eration, you must select a suitable method in the Thermodynamic Data.
8aIarIIng Iha 8ubrouIIna
When a User-added Unit Operation is laid down on the PFD, the User-
added Unit Operation window opens in which the user must select the
name of the required subroutine.
6aIruIaIIon or uIpuI LxaruIIon
A User-added Unit Operation may be executed during the flowsheet
convergence calculations or at output time only. The User-added Unit
Operation Data window will show when the selected subroutine is
calculated. This affects whether feeds and/or products are allowed.
The default is to perform the calculations for the user-added unit as part
of the normal flowsheet convergence calculations.
6aIruIaIIon IIma. The User-added Unit Operation is calculated as part of
the normal flowsheet convergence. Additional calculations may be
performed at output time and an output report may be produced.
uIpuI IIma. If the User-added Unit Operation requires only converged
flowsheet data for calculations and reports, it can be executed at output
time rather than during the flowsheet convergence.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-151
Faads and FrodurIs
The User-added Unit Operation may have up to ten feed streams. The
subroutine can retrieve each feed separately. They are not mixed or
flashed. If they are to be mixed, the user must do this in the subroutine.
User-added Unit Operations which are to be executed during the
flowsheet convergence must have at least one feed stream. Those
which are only executed at output time need not have any feeds.
User-added Unit Operations which are to be executed during the
flowsheet convergence may have up to ten product streams. These may
be any combination of phases. User-added Unit Operations which are
only executed at output time cannot have any product streams.
8IraamaordarIng
If the User-added Unit Operation has more than one feed or product,
they will be shown in the order in which they were laid down on the
PFD. The user may need to reorder the streams so that they are
presented in the correct order to the User-added Unit Operation. For
example, the User-added Unit Operation may always feed vapor to the
first product stream and liquid to the second.
Reordering is done in the User-added Subroutine - Stream Reordering
window accessible by clicking the Reorder Streams button on the
User-added Unit Operation Data window.
LnIarIng aIa
Data are supplied to the User-added Unit Operation in four tables:
G Real Data
G Supplemental Data
G Integer Data
G Heat Balance Data
Data can be supplied to a User-added Unit Operation using either a
Customized Data Entry Window or the standard Developers Data
Entry Window. These two choices are explained below.
Data may also be entered into the variables in the Real Data table using
the PRO/II Define feature.
The variables in the Real Data table are also available to other unit
operations by means of SPECs, VARYs and DEFINEs. The other tables
are used solely by the User-added Unit Operation.
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-15?
"6usIomItad aIa LnIry WIndoW
A user has the option of defining a Customized Data Entry Window
to be used for all user-added unit operations that utilize a specific user-
added calculation subroutine. The standard PRO/II User-added Unit
Operations use the default names USER41 - USER60 (displayed as
US1-US20). If you create a customized data entry window for a user-
added calculation subroutine, the name that is selected for it will
replace one of the default names in the list of available subroutine
names that is displayed when a user-added unit is laid down on the
PFD.
6raaIIng a "6usIomItad aIa LnIry WIndoW
To create a customized data entry window to be used for a specific
user-added calculation subroutine, two ASCII files must be created in
the directory specified by the UserConfigDir= entry in the
PVISION.INI file. These two files are called UASLIST.INI and
USERXX.INI and are described below.
Flle uA5Ll5T.lhl
This file contains the user-specified names for specific user-added
calculation subroutines that will be displayed in place of the default names
US1 - US20, corresponding to the subroutines USER41 - USER60. Each
line in the file has two entries; the entry number in the list of user-
added subroutine names, and the actual text that is to be displayed for
the user-added subroutine. An example of a typical UASLIST.INI file
is shown below:
1 FFE BF Routine
2 Stream heating value
These entries in the UASLIST.INI file will result in the following list of
available user-added calculational subroutines being displayed when a
User-added Unit Operation is laid down on the PFD:
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-153
User-added Operation Window
Flle u5XX.lhl
This file contains the variable names and array locations for all of the
Real, Supplemental, Integer, and Heat Balance Data values that the
specific user-added calculation subroutine requires or that can be
input by the user. For a user-added subroutine with a customized data
entry window, a user will only be able to enter values for the data items
specified in this file. The XX in the name of the USERXX.INI file
corresponds to the respective user-added subroutine referenced, i.e. the
user-added subroutine USER41 with a user-specified name of PIPE
DP Routine above would need a USER41.INI file to describe the
required data for the calculations. An example of a typical
USERXX.INI file is shown below:
Examle uSER41.h lile.
FARM 1 "Frint Control" aquIrad
RFARM 1 "Biameter (in)" aquIrad
RFARM 2 "Length (lt)" aquIrad
...
SuFFLE 1 "ho. 0l Segments" aquIrad
...
The first entry on each line indicates to which data array the variable
belongs. The second entry is the array number where the data value
entered by the User will be stored for access by the User-added calcula-
tional subroutine.
The third entry is the label to be displayed for the variable in the
customized data entry window. This entry must be enclosed in
double quotes ().
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-154
The fourth entry on each line indicates whether or not data entry for the
item is Optional or is Required. The default is Optional, and this entry
is not required.
The entries in the USER41.INI file shown above will result in the
following required data values and variable names being shown in the
custom window displayed for data entry, for any User-added Unit
Operation where the user-selected PIPE DP Routine as the user-
added subroutine when the unit was laid down on the PFD as shown
below.
Customized UAS Data Entry Window
The order in which the variable labels appear on the customized User-
added Unit Operation Data window is the same as the order in which
they appear in the USERXX.INI file.
The limits on the number of variables that can be entered for each array
are shown below. These limits are:
G Real Data - up to 500 elements
G Supplemental Data - up to 10,000 elements
G Integer Data - up to 250 elements
G Heat Balance Data - up to 10 elements
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-155
Each table shows the name(s) of the variable(s) for which values must
be entered. They will scroll if they contain more than four rows. All
data entries displayed using a customized data entry window are
required. No checks on validity or completeness of the data are carried
out until the User-added Unit Operation is executed.
Tha 8Iandard avaIopar's aIa LnIry WIndoW
A special window is available for developers of User-added Unit
Operations. It is the default window displayed for a User-added Unit
Operation if a Customized Data Entry Window has not been defined
for the specific unit.
The developers data entry window has no variables names and any
number of variables may be entered up to the limits of each array.
These limits are:
G Real Data - up to 500 elements
G Supplemental Data - up to 10,000 elements
G Integer Data - up to 250 elements
G Heat Balance Data - up to 10 elements
The user must know which elements of each array are used by the
User-added Unit Operation and enter the array element number along
with the value. Values may be entered for any or all of the elements in
the arrays. The elements defined need not be contiguous and may be
entered in any order.
PRO/II knows nothing about the data requirements of a User-added
Unit Operation and so no restrictions are imposed in the data entry.
hale: Unless the user defines a custom Data Entry Window for a speci-
fied User-added Unit Operation, the data entry for that unit will be via
the developers data entry window.
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-156
L6TLT MuL
anaraI InIormaIIon
The optional Electrolyte Module of PRO/II allows you to handle
systems containing electrolytes. See the PRO/II Add-On Modules
Users Guide for more information. The following unit operations can
be used with this electrolyte version:
G Flash
G Pump
G Valve, Mixer, Splitter
G Pipe
G Simple heat exchanger, LNG heat exchanger
G Conversion reactor, Equilibrium reactor
G Stream calculator
G Heating/Cooling curve
G Calculator
G Controller, Optimizer
G Column (Electrolytic Algorithm, see below)
TharmodynamIr ModaIs
Eight built-in electrolyte models in PRO/II simulate aqueous systems in
a wide range of industrial applications. The models apply to fixed
component lists with a predefined set of thermodynamic methods for
K-values, enthalpies and densities. It is not possible to define indi-
vidual methods for K-value, enthalpy or density when using electrolyte
thermodynamic models.
hale: Electrolyte models may not be used to calculate the following
properties: (1) Non-aqueous electrolyte systems; (2) Free water de-
cant; (3) Water dew points; (4) Hydrocarbon dew points, (5) Entropy
and heat capacity.
The following electrolyte models are available in this release:
G Amine Systems
G Acid Systems
G Mixed Salt Systems
G Sour Water Systems
G Caustic Systems
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-157
G Benfield Systems
G Scrubber Systems
G LLE and Hydrate Systems
To select an electrolyte model:
Click on the Themodynamic Data button on the toolbar to open the
Thermodynamics Data main data entry window.
Select the Electrolyte option in the Category list box.
Choose an appropriate electrolyte model.
The suggested range of applicability for the electrolyte models is
summarized below:
Temperature: 32-390 F (0-200 C)
Pressure: 0-200 atm
Dissolved gases: 0-30 mole %
Ionic solutes: 0-30 ionic strength
Amine Systems
Pressure: 0-30 atm
LLE Systems
Organic solutes: 0-10 weight %
You may add your own models, specifically suited to your application, by
using the PRO/II and the Electrolyte Utility Package (EUP). If you wish to
do this, contact your nearest SIMSCI support office for more information.
hale: Take care when using non-electrolyte and electrolyte thermody-
namic methods in the same application. The PRO/II electrolytic models
use a different enthalpy basis from that used for other thermodynamic
systems. When both are used, PRO/II automatically takes care of the
difference but it may appear to be confusing. To avoid this, select the
electrolyte enthalpy method for all non-electrolyte thermodynamic sys-
tems in a mixed application. All systems will then use the electrolyte
model basis.
LIarIroIyIIr 6oIumn kIgorIIhm(LLI8T)
This column algorithm was designed to solve non-ideal aqueous elec-
trolytic distillation columns involving ionic species. It uses a Newton-
Raphson method to solve the mass balance, vapor/liquid equilibrium
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-158
and specification equations simultaneously. The K-values and enthal-
pies are supplied by the electrolyte thermodynamic model.
The Electrolytic Column Algorithm is selected from the Column
Algorithm drop-down list box on the Column main data entry window.
hale: Electrolytic thermodynamic models only support VLE and so
total phase draws are not permitted.
Advantages and disadvantages of the Electrolytic Column Algorithm
are given below:
kdvanIagas (1) Rigorously models ionic equilibrium systems.
(2) Solves highly non-ideal distillation columns.
IsadvanIagas (1) Side columns are not supported.
(2) Pumparounds and tray hydraulics are not
available.
(3) Certain Column Specifications and Variables
are not permitted.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-159
5lM56l A-h MuL5
Add-on modules can be obtained in this version of PRO/II to extend the
functionality of the program. These modules include units for modeling
polymer systems, separating solid components from feed streams, blending
streams with different component and refinery inspection properties, as
well as Profimatics hydrotreating and reformer reactor models.
8IM86I FLYML 68T nII paraIIon
PRO/II contains features for handling polymers (e.g., van Krevelen
property prediction method, polymer moment attributes, ALM thermo-
dynamic method, and polymer flash).
The SIMSCI Polymer CSTR Add-on Model offers you the capability of
modeling a polymerization reactor operating under the following
conditions:
G Single monomer producing a linear homopolymer.
G Single phase reaction (effects of heat and mass transfer on the
mass transport are not considered).
G Ideal CSTR (steady-state, well mixed, constant volume
reactor).
G Free radical polymerization kinetics.
G Bulk or solution polymerization.
This reactor unit has been added to PRO/II as part of the SIMSCI
Add-on Models (Polymer CSTR) and is available from SIMSCI as the
SIMSCI Polymer CSTR module.
equlreJ ala lar lke Falymer eaclar uall
This version of PRO/II does not allow you to enter the necessary
Component, Stream, or Thermodynamic Data via required the data
entry windows. However, you can enter the necessary Polymer CSTR
data using the Polymer CSTR data entry window for the SIMSCI
Add-on Model.
To enter data for the Polymer CSTR:
Once you have entered your simulation data, including the data for the
Polymer CSTR, but excluding any polymer-specific thermodynamic,
stream, or component data, you will need to do the following:
Export the simulation data to a PRO/II keyword file.
Add the necessary polymer-specific data to the keyword file.
Import the modified keyword file into PRO/II and run the simula-
tion problem in Run-Only mode.
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-160
For additional information, refer to the PRO/II Add-On Modules Users
Guide.
8IM86I 6MFhLhT FFLTY LFTL nII paraIIon
This unit prints out the Component Properties and Refinery Inspection
Properties for all the thermodynamic methods in the current flowsheet.
This unit is selected from a drop-down list box on the SIMSCI Add-on
Units main data entry window. No data input is required.
8IM86I 8LLh nII paraIIon
The Blend unit allows you to blend two or more streams to give one
product stream with different component and refinery inspection prop-
erties. This unit is selected from a drop-down list box on the SIMSCI
Add-on Units main data entry window.
The feed streams should have different thermodynamic methods for this
unit to function correctly, but this is not necessary. The unit thermody-
namic method must be different from any of the feed stream thermody-
namic methods.
The following data must be provided:
G Product stream temperature.
The product stream pressure may also be supplied, but if it is not given,
the pressure will be set to the lowest feed stream pressure.
The unit thermodynamic method component properties will be recalcu-
lated from the blend of the feed streams properties and will then be
stored as part of that thermodynamic method data storage. Only
petroleum and assay generated component properties will be recalcu-
lated; it is assumed that Library component properties do not change in
the flowsheet. The unit first recalculates the normal boiling point,
molecular weight and specific gravity for all the petroleum compo-
nents. These recalculated properties are then used to re-characterize all
the other petroleum fraction properties such as the critical temperature.
uslag lke 8leaJ uall wllk ellaery lasecllaa Fraerlles
Any refinery inspection properties specified in the input will also be
blended from the feed streams properties using the specified blending
method for that property. It is necessary that every thermodynamic
method must have the same refinery inspection properties specified and
that these properties must use the same property method and blending
basis in order for the unit to work. A check is done at input time to
check that all the methods in the problem have the same refinery prop-
erties, methods and bases specified. You can request this check to be
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-161
done at calculation time on the methods used in the current unit using
the IPARM entry.
hale: Requesting this check at calculation time should be used with
care and is not recommended.
8IM86I L8LT nII paraIIon
The RESET unit allows you to reset the product stream enthalpy datum
using the thermodynamic method specified within the unit. This unit is
selected from a drop-down list box on the SIMSCI Add-on Units main
data entry window. Only one feed and one product stream are allowed
for the unit.
hale: If you try to import a keyword file that specifies more than one
feed or product stream, PRO/II will produce an input error.
The feed stream pressure is always kept constant and you are required
to specify whether the temperature, enthalpy, dew point, bubble point or
vapor fraction is kept constant. The new product stream conditions will
be calculated based on the option specified. The available calculation
options are entered through the first value in the Integer Data for Unit
field and are as follows:
VaIua LnIarad 6aIruIaIIon pIIon
1 Secily the roduct stream at the leed stream temerature
2 Secily the roduct stream at the leed stream enthaly
8 Secily the roduct stream at the dew temerature
4 Secily the roduct stream at the bubble temerature
5 Secily the roduct stream at the leed stream vaor lraction
hale: In this version, a warning message will alert you if the thermody-
namic method of the unit operation is different from the thermodynamic
method of any of the feed streams. This warning message applies to all
unit operations except for the RESET unit, the BLEND unit and any
Profimatics reactor models.
8IM86I FroIImaIIrs aarIor nII paraIIons
These units model Profimatics Hydrotreater and Reformer Reactor unit
operations and can be selected from a drop-down list box on the
SIMSCI Add-on Units main data entry window.
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-16?
vALv
anaraI InIormaIIon
The Valve is used to model the Joule-Thompson effect that occurs
across a pressure restriction such as a valve, orifice plate, etc. The
temperature for the exit fluid is computed by assuming that the
operation is adiabatic. Rigorous calculations may be performed for
both VLE and VLLE systems.
Faads and FrodurIs
A valve operation may have multiple feed streams, in which case the
inlet pressure is assumed to be the lowest feed stream pressure.
A valve may have one or more product streams. The product phase
condition for valve operations with one product stream is automatically
set by PRO/II. For valve units with two or more product streams, the
product phases must be specified in the Valve Product Phases window
which is accessed by clicking the Product Phases button on the
Valve main data entry window.
Product phases allowable include: vapor, liquid, decanted water, heavy
liquid, and mixed phase (vapor plus liquid). Mixed phase is mutually
exclusive with vapor and liquid products and is not allowed when four
product streams are specified.
uIIaI 6ondIIIons
The outlet condition for a valve is selected with the appropriate radio
button on the Valve main data entry window as:
Frassura drop
uIIaI prassura
TharmodynamIr 8ysIam
The thermodynamic system of methods to be used for valve calcula-
tions may be selected by choosing a method from the Thermodynamic
System drop-down list box on the Valve main data entry window.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs
9-163
WlF FlLM vAFAT
anaraI InIormaIIon
The Wiped Film Evaporator unit operation (WFE) provides the capa-
bility to model the separation of solvents and/or monomers from a
polymer melt. A Wiped Film Evaporator should be used when the
removal of volatiles from a viscous polymer melt is diffusion limited.
The blades inside the wiped film evaporator continually mix and spread
a thin film of the melt on the wall of the evaporator. As the melt moves
down the evaporator, the volatiles diffuse out of it and into the vapor
space of the evaporator. The volatiles are pulled out of the evaporator
under vacuum.
aIaIIad InIormaIIon
For detailed information regarding operating modes, data requirements,
and range of applicability of the Wiped Film Evaporator model, consult
the PRO/II Add-On Modules Users Guide.
0|aptcr 9 Liit Upcraticis aid Lti|ity Mcd0|cs FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
9-164
6kaler 10
uaalag aaJ vlewlag a Flawskeel
This chapter describes how to run a simulation, interactively change the
calculation sequence, use breakpoints, and view calculation history and
results.
uslag lke ua Falelle
The PRO/II Run palette shown in Figure 10-1 provides options for data
verification, interaction with the simulation (running the simulation by
stepping through the units) and viewing convergence or simulation
results. You access these features by choosing the appropriate button on
the Run palette. If all required input data have not been provided when
you choose the Run button, PRO/II will display a warning message
telling you which data are incomplete.
To display/hide the Run palette:
Select/deselect the View/Palettes/Run option from the menu bar.
The Run palette appears/disappears on the PRO/II main window.
Figure 10-1: Run Palette
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 10 F0iiii aid Vicwii a ||cws|cct
10-1
The palette displays push buttons that execute or access a feature:
paraIIon asrrIpIIon
Status Bislays the global messages lor the current simulation.
Check Bata Checks the inut data to determine whether there are any data
inconsistencies.
Run Executes the simulation, either lrom the beginning or lrom a
breakoint. "Check Bata" is automatically erlormed, il neces
sary.
Ste Stes through the execution ol the simulation by stoing at
each unit oeration in the calculation sequence.
Sto nterruts or stos the simulation while it is executing. The ro
gram comletes its current calculation belore stoing.
Set
8reakoints
Selects the units you want to assign as breakoints. The ro
gram then executes the simulation, stoing at these break
oints.
0oto Starts the execution lrom any secilied unit. You can select the
unit by clicking the "0oto cursor" on the desired unit in the
llowsheet.
Messages Bislays the calculation history as it is being roduced. This
window can be dislayed when the FR0/ calculation engine is
executing the simulation, in which case, the history will be u
dated as the calculation roceeds.
view Results Bislays the detailed outut results ol the highlighted unit o
eration or stream in the llowsheet ol the reviously run simula
tion. You can review the results ol multile units or streams, il
desired. l the simulation has been run reviously, you can view
its results without executing it again by oening the aroriate
.0uT lile.
Show
8reakoints
Shows which units are assigned as breakoints by dislaying
their icons in a dillerent color. Clicking the button a second time
disables the breakoint dislay.
0|aptcr 10 F0iiii aid Vicwii a ||cws|cct FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
10-?
6kecklag lke 5lmulallaa 5lalus
Use the Status button to display the Flowsheet Status window. This
window allows you to view the global status messages for the current
simulation. This button is highlighted as a selectable operation only if
Check Data has been previously invoked either directly from the palette or
indirectly from execution of the Run operation. The following colors
around the Status button indicate the Check Data results:
A red border indicates that errors were found.
A yellow border indicates that warnings were generated.
A black border indicates that no errors were found when Check Data
was last performed.
In all cases, the status can be viewed by selecting the Status button.
To see the current global status messages for your simulation:
Choose Status from the Run palette. The Flowsheet Status
window appears. The Check Data results appear in a scrollable window.
Figure 10-2: Flowsheet Status
If errors were detected, you must correct your simulation data.
Choose Close to exit the Flowsheet Status window.
Correct your simulation errors.
If no errors were detected, run the simulation.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 10 F0iiii aid Vicwii a ||cws|cct
10-3
uaJerslaaJlag lke uall 6alar 6aJlag 6ues
As the simulation progresses, you will observe that the individual units
will change color. Refer to the following for the default color codes.
nII 6oIor 6odIng
6oIor 8IgnIIIranra
Yellow unit oeration at initial condition.
Red unit oeration has not been solved.
0reen unit oeration in rocess ol being calculated.
8lue unit oeration has been solved.
Bark 8lue unit oeration has been calculated.
This color is dislayed only when you use the Run button, and a unit
oeration was reviously calculated.
Furle 8reakoint set directly belore or alter a unit oeration
sIng Iha ho 6oIors FaaIura
If you do not wish to see the unit icon colors update as the flowsheet
solves, you can get a performance benefit by deselecting the View/Show
Run Colors option on the menu bar. This option operates exactly like
the Run button on the Run palette, but unit icon colors are updated
only when the simulation finishes or stops at a breakpoint.
uaalag lke 5lmulallaa
When you begin executing the simulation, the flowsheet convergence
can be viewed in a Messages window by clicking on the Messages
button on the Run palette. You can close this window by clicking again
on the Messages button or by double-clicking on the Message
windows control-menu box.
Use Run to begin executing the simulation. The program starts from:
G The first unit, if this is the first run;
G The unit at which the calculations were stopped;
G The unit you selected using the Goto option.
The Run option automatically runs Check Data.
0|aptcr 10 F0iiii aid Vicwii a ||cws|cct FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
10-4
To begin executing the simulation:
Choose Run from the Run palette.
When stepping through or stopping simulation execution, you may
choose to examine the status of the simulation.
Select the Status button from the Run palette.
You may continue stepping through the simulation on a unit-by-
unit basis by selecting Step .
Alternatively, you may choose to run the simulation without step-
ping by selecting Run .
If the run encounters problems, warnings will appear in the Flowsheet
Status window. You have the option to close the window and correct the
warnings or continue the run by clicking the Run Simulation button.
8IappIng Through 8ImuIaIIon LxaruIIon
Use Step to execute the calculations for the current unit (stopping at
the next unit in the calculation sequence). In this manner you can step
through the execution of the simulation by stopping at each unit
operation in the calculation sequence.
To step through the execution of the simulation:
Choose Step from the floating Run palette.
If the Messages window is open, you can observe that execution ceases
after completion of the current unit.
8IoppIng 8ImuIaIIon LxaruIIon
Use Stop to interrupt or stop the simulation while it is executing. The
program completes its current calculation before stopping.
To stop or interrupt simulation execution:
Choose Stop from the Run palette.
The unit after the calculation stops becomes the current unit, as
indicated by its color.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 10 F0iiii aid Vicwii a ||cws|cct
10-5
sIng oIo
Use Goto to start execution from a selected unit. This can be invoked
at program initiation or after execution pauses while stepping or
stopping.
To start the execution from a specified unit:
Select a unit on the PFD.
Choose Goto from the Run palette.
The selected unit becomes the current unit. When execution completes
on this unit, its Goto status is removed.
sIng 8raakpoInIs
You can set a breakpoint on any unit. Breakpoints can be before the
unit operation, after it, or both. You can set breakpoints using the cursor
or by utilizing the Breakpoints window. In addition, you can set break-
points before and after a loop using the Breakpoints window.
To set breakpoints using a cursor:
Choose Set Breakpoints from the Run palette to turn on Break-
point mode. This automatically brings up the Breakpoints window.
Select the unit for which you want to set a breakpoint.
Choose Close to exit the Breakpoints window.
PRO/II turns units selected as breakpoints purple and updates the
values in the Breakpoints window.
To delete a breakpoint in Breakpoint mode:
Select the unit. PRO/II will no longer show this unit as purple.
PRO/II updates the values in the Breakpoints window to show that there
is no longer a breakpoint attached to this unit.
The Breakpoints window lists all unit operations in the calculation
sequence and identifies the breakpoint type for each unit: (before, after,
both). Units without a breakpoint are considered Off. Breakpoints
are for use during the current session. PRO/II does not save breakpoint
information.
To set breakpoints using the Breakpoints window:
Choose Set Breakpoints from the Run palette. The Breakpoints
window appears.
0|aptcr 10 F0iiii aid Vicwii a ||cws|cct FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
10-6
hale: Click on the Show Breakpoints button to highlight those units or
loops where breakpoints have been previously set.
Figure 10-3: Breakpoints Window
Set the desired breakpoint type by clicking on the check boxes.
You can set before, after, or both.
Select a unit from the list.
The breakpoint for the unit is set based on the breakpoint placement
you select.
To close the Breakpoints window:
Choose Close .
hale: Closing the Breakpoints window does not turn off Breakpoint mode.
To turn off Breakpoint mode:
Choose Set Breakpoints on the Run palette a second time.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 10 F0iiii aid Vicwii a ||cws|cct
10-7
vlewlag 6alculallaa hlslary
Use the Messages button to view the calculation history that has been
produced so far. This can be used while the simulation is executing, after
the simulation finally ends, or when the simulation reaches a breakpoint.
To view the calculation history for the simulation thus far:
Choose Messages from the Run palette.
The Messages window appears. This is a multiline data window that is
continuously updated.
vlewlag esulls
Use the View Results button to display results for the selected stream
or unit in the default text editor.
To view results for a stream or unit:
Select the desired stream or unit.
Choose View Results from the Run palette, or
Click on the View Results icon on the toolbar.
Alternatively, you can view process unit and stream results via the Unit
List and Stream List (Go To) windows:
Click on the unit or stream icon to open the Unit List or Stream List
window.
Highlight the desired unit or stream.
Click on the View Results icon.
The PRO/II report generator creates a single ASCII file.
The default text editor will be used to display the standard PRO/II
output for the selected stream or unit.
vlewlag esulls la 5lream Fraerly Tahles
The stream property tables provide a convenient means to display selected
results for a group of streams on the PFD. Four predefined report formats
are supplied. These formats may be modified as desired and/or additional
formats may be defined by the user. In addition to the stream properties
selected for display, the titles and number of decimal places to display for
each stream property may be chosen by the user. A quick check of the
material balance for the problem may be accomplished by displaying the
source and sink streams for the problem.
0|aptcr 10 F0iiii aid Vicwii a ||cws|cct FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
10-8
8aIarIIng 8Iraams Ior FroparIy TabIas
Stream property tables are set up from the PFD palette by adding a
stream properties icon to the PFD.
Double-click the stream properties icon on the PFD to display the
Stream Property Table window.
Choose the method for available stream selection by selecting the
appropriate radio button:
InrIuda kII 8Iraams. This is the default. All the streams in the flow-
sheet are displayed in the Available Streams list box.
InrIuda FIoWshaaI 8ourral8Ink 8Iraams. Only those streams entering
the flowsheet as feeds and leaving the flowsheet as products are
displayed in the Available Streams list box, producing a material
balance check for the flowsheet.
The streams in the Displayed Streams list box may be sorted using the
Up , Down , Top and Bottom buttons.
6usIomItIng Iha 8IraamFroparIy TabIas
The appearance of a stream property table may be customized with
options provided on the Stream Property Table window. The property
list (format) to use for the display may be selected in the Property List
to be Used list box. Note that in addition to the property lists supplied
by PRO/II, the user may also prepare special property lists for
selection. See Defining Stream Property Lists below for information.
Contiguous strings of components may be grouped into a single
component group for printout. For example, a C6 plus component
group might be used to group all components from NC6 and heavier.
Any number of component groups may be set up. To specify a
component group click the Define Component Groups button on the
Stream Property Table window to access the Group Components
window. This window may be used to define and name component
groups, as well as to edit existing component groups.
The appearance of the steam property table itself may be altered by the
user in the Stream Property Table window. Options include multiple rows
per table, displaying the row grid lines, and setting the widths for the
borders, lines, and property cell characters.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 10 F0iiii aid Vicwii a ||cws|cct
10-9
aIInIng 8IraamFroparIy LIsIs (FormaIs)
Stream property lists are defined and edited via the Define Property
List window. This window is accessed by choosing Options/Stream
Property Lists from the menu bar.
PRO/II provides four default lists that may be edited if desired:
8horI FroparIy LIsI. Temperature, Pressure, Molar flowrate, Phase.
MaIarIaI 8aIanra LIsI. Temperature, Pressure, Molar flowrate, Phase,
Molar based composition.
8Iraam 8ummary. Phase, Molar flowrate, Standard liquid flowrate,
Temperature, Pressure, Molecular weight, Enthalpy, Specific enthalpy,
Mole fraction liquid, Reduced temperature, Reduced pressure, Acentric
factor, UOP K-value, Standard liquid density, Vapor and liquid molar
flowrate, Vapor and liquid mass flowrate, Vapor and liquid volumetric
flowrate, Vapor and liquid molecular weight, Vapor and liquid specific
enthalpy, Vapor and liquid C
P
, Vapor and liquid density, Vapor and
liquid viscosity, Vapor and liquid thermal conductivity, Liquid surface
tension.
6omp. MoIar aIas. Molar component and total flowrates, Temperature,
Pressure, Enthalpy, Molecular weight, Mole fraction vapor and liquid.
To edit an existing property list:
Use the drop-down list box to select the property list name.
To create a new property list:
Click the New button to access the New List window and enter a
name for the new list in this window. This window also allows you
to select an existing list from a drop-down list box to be copied to
create the new list.
To add a property to a property list:
Select the property in the Select Properties drop-down list box on
the Define Property List window and click the button to transfer
the property to the Property Description Format list box.
The property that was selected is expanded in this window, with the
addition of a description and a format which may be edited in the data
entry fields provided. The description for the property may be changed
from the default value and the number of decimal places for printout
may also be changed if desired.
When editing an existing property list, properties may be selected in the
Property Description Format list box and edited, deleted, or rearranged
as desired.
0|aptcr 10 F0iiii aid Vicwii a ||cws|cct FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
10-10
In addition to such properties as temperature, pressure, enthalpy, etc.,
property items such as double line, line, and text may be incor-
porated in a property list to add blank lines and special headings.
uaalag a 6ase 5luJy
Case Study is an executive level feature that allows you to perform
studies on a base case solution by altering parameters selectively and
rerunning the simulation.
Access the Case Study main data entry window by selecting
Input/Casestudy Data from the menu bar.
Figure 10-4: Case Study Main Data Entry Window
Enable the window by checking the Define Case Study box.
In this window you can specify the changes you want to make to your
input Parameters and to define the Results you want to examine. You
may define as many parameters and results as you want.
FaramaIars. The table of parameters initially has one row. You may
insert or remove as many rows as you wish.
FaramaIar IdanIIIIar. The parameter identifier defines the way you want
the output data to be presented after the Case Study has been executed.
A default identifier (here PARAM1) is supplied. To change the
parameter identifier, click on the data field and enter a new name.
FaramaIar. You must identify a parameter to change. Click on
Parameter to open the Parameter window. Select the parameter that you
want to change. When you close this window, the parameter you have
specified appears in place of the original text.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 10 F0iiii aid Vicwii a ||cws|cct
10-11
8IarI VaIua. Click on Base Case Value to open the Parameter Start
Value window where you define the starting value for the parameter.
The starting value defaults to the value of the parameter in the base
case. When you close this window, the starting value will be displayed.
8IarI 6yrIa. The start cycle is the cycle after which the incremental
changes are implemented. Cycles before the start cycle use the value in
the base case. If necessary, enter a new start cycle number. By default,
the starting cycle is one (1).
Lnd 6yrIa. Cycles after the end cycle use the value in the end cycle. If
necessary, enter a new end cycle number. The end cycle defaults to the
value of the start cycle.
8Iap VaIua. Next, define the value of the incremental step change per
cycle. The new step value will be displayed.
asuIIs. The table of results initially has one row. You may insert or
remove as many rows as you wish. You may define a Result as one
flowsheet parameter or as a function of two flowsheet parameters or as
a function of one flowsheet parameter and a constant. See SPEC/
VARY/DEFINE in Chapter 9 for details on using and changing mathe-
matical operators and composing specifications.
asuII IdanIIIIar. The result identifier will be used when you define how
you want the output data to be presented after the Case Study has been
executed. A default identifier is supplied. To change the result identi-
fier, click on it and enter a new identifier.
FIrsI FaramaIar. Click on the first (or only) parameter to open the
Parameter window where you select the parameter that you want as a
Result or as the first element of the function you are defining.
8arond (aIaranra) FaramaIar. Click on second parameter to open the
Parameter window where you select the parameter (or constant) that
you want as the second element of the function you are defining.
LxaruIIon pIIons. Select from the Execute: list to execute the base case
only or the base case and the case study. If you do not want to execute
all the cycles of the case study, select Base Case and Specified Cycles
and specify a beginning and ending cycle.
0|aptcr 10 F0iiii aid Vicwii a ||cws|cct FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
10-1?
vlewlag 6ase 5luJy esulls
Select Output/Case Study/Plots or Output/Case Study/Table from
the menu bar to specify the format of your Case Study results. After
entering a required name and optional title for the plot or table, click on
the Data button to open a window where you may specify the
parameters and results you wish to have plotted or tabulated, enter
labels for the axes of the plot or rows and columns of the table, etc.
uaalag Flles la 8alck MaJe
You can execute one or more PRO/II ASCII keyword input files or
flowsheet simulation files in Batch Mode from within PRO/II.
The keyword input file may be one that was created using a text editor
or word processor, or one that was previously created using the
Keyword File Export capability. You can also execute flowsheet simu-
lations that were created using PRO/II from the GUI, or were created
by importing a PRO/II keyword input file.
The batch execution of keyword input files or simulation files generates
the standard PRO/II ASCII output file for each of the selected files.
While executing simulation problems in batch mode, you can continue
to work with other Windows applications. You can terminate the
currently executing problem or the batch execution mode completely by
pushing the Terminate Current Problem or Terminate Batch Run
buttons, respectively.
To select a PRO/II keyword input file, simulation file (or group of
files), or a previously stored execution list file:
Close the currently open simulation.
Choose File/Run Batch from the menu bar. PRO/II displays the
Run Batch - Input and/or Simulation Files Selection window.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 10 F0iiii aid Vicwii a ||cws|cct
10-13
Figure 10-5: Run Batch - Input and/or Simulation Files Selection
Initially there are no keyword input (*.INP) or simulation files (*.PR1)
displayed in the File Sequence window. There are two methods of
adding keyword input or simulation files to the file sequence list:
Select the files explicitly using the Add Files button, or
Load a previously saved list of files using the Load List button.
To select the desired keyword input or simulation files:
Click he Add Files button.
PRO/II displays a list of available existing keyword input files. The
default file type is keyword files (*.INP). You can change the file type
to simulation files (*.PR1, *.PRZ) using the Files of type drop-down
list-box.
0|aptcr 10 F0iiii aid Vicwii a ||cws|cct FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
10-14
Figure 10-6: Run Batch - File Select
Type or select the name of the file that you want to execute. You
can select multiple files within a given directory. Only the key-
word input files highlighted in the currently selected directory will
be added to the list of files to execute when you exit this window.
Click the OK button to validate your selection and return to the
Run Batch - Input and/or Simulation Files Selection window.
To load an existing list of keyword input and/or simulation files:
Click on the Load List button.
PRO/II displays a list of available existing execution list files. The
default file type is Run Batch List (*.LST). These files contain the
complete path and name of keyword input and simulation files in the
execution order previously specified by the user. An example of the
typical contents of an execution list file is given below:
C.\SMSC\FR0_w\uSER\CASE1.hF
C.\SMSC\FR0_w\uSER\CASE2.hF
C.\SMSC\FR0_w\uSER\CASE8.hF
Execution list files may include comment lines (beginning with a
semicolon ;), and include list file directives given by #include followed
by the .LST file name. An example is given below:
; This is a comment
C.\SMSC\FR0_w\uSER\CASE1.hF
C.\SMSC\FR0_w\uSER\CASE2.hF
; The following list file to be loaded
; contains flash problems
#include flash.LST
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 10 F0iiii aid Vicwii a ||cws|cct
10-15
hale: The #include directives may be nested, e.g., in the example
above, flash.LST itself could contain the directives #include dewpt.LST
and #include bubpt.LST.
Figure 10-7: Run Batch - Load File List
Type or select the name of the execution list file that you want to
load. You can select multiple list files within a given directory.
Only the list files highlighted in the currently selected directory
will be used to create the list of keyword input and simulation files
to be executed.
Click the OK button to validate the selection and exit the win-
dow.
When you return to the Run Batch - Input and/or Simulation Files
Selection window, the contents of the previously selected execution list
file(s) will have been expanded and are now displayed in the File
Sequence list box. Selected files will be added to the bottom of the list
of previously selected files displayed in the File Sequence list box.
avIsIng Iha FIIa LxaruIIon 8aquanra rdar
You can revise the order in which the selected files are to be executed
using the Remove , Move Up , Move Down , Move Top and
Move Bottom buttons.
6raaIIng an LxaruIIon FIIa LIsI
You can store a list of keyword input or simulation files as an Execution
File List that can be retrieved and executed at a later date.
Click on the Select from Lists button.
0|aptcr 10 F0iiii aid Vicwii a ||cws|cct FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
10-16
PRO/II displays the Run Batch - Save File List As window containing
the execution file list options.
Figure 10-8: Run Batch - Save File List As
Enter a name for the Execution List File.
Click OK to store the list as a *.LST file in ASCII format.
LxaruIIng Iha 8aIrh LIsI
When you return to the Run Batch - Input and/or Simulation Files
Selection window, you can begin the execution of the specified file list. To
start the batch mode execution of the list:
Click on the OK button.
The specified list will be executed in the order shown in the File Sequence
box. When the execution is complete, a message will be displayed to notify
you that the batch mode execution has been completed.
TarmInaIIng LxaruIIon oI a 8aIrh LIsI
You have the choice of terminating the currently executing simulation
problem, or terminating the batch mode execution completely.
To terminate batch mode execution of the selected keyword files:
Click on the Terminate Current Problem button to terminate the
currently executing problem.
The problem execution will stop after the current unit calculations are
complete.
hale: You can terminate an executing problem only during calculation.
To terminate batch mode execution completely:
Click the Terminate Batch Run button to end the execution.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 10 F0iiii aid Vicwii a ||cws|cct
10-17
VIaWIng uIpuI asuIIs
asuIIs oI 8aIrh LxaruIIon oI kayWord InpuI (*.IhF) FIIas. By default, the
program deletes the simulation files that remain after batch mode
execution of specified keyword input files (*.INP). The standard PRO/II
ASCII output report will be located in the corresponding .OUT file(s).
asuIIs oI 8aIrh LxaruIIon oI 8ImuIaIIon (*.F1, *.FZ) FIIas. By default, the
program will not delete the simulation files that remain after the batch
mode execution of specified simulation files (*.PR1, *.PRZ), or the
ASCII format standard output report located in the corresponding .OUT
file. You can open the resulting simulation file(s) with the File/Open
command, and then proceed to generate reports or modify the simula-
tion flowsheet as desired in PRO/II.
Whatever type of file (keyword input or simulation) was executed in
batch mode, you can always view and edit the corresponding standard
ASCII output files with any ASCII-capable text editor or word
processor.
0|aptcr 10 F0iiii aid Vicwii a ||cws|cct FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
10-18
6kaler 11
Frlallag aaJ Flalllag
This chapter describes how to generate, view and print reports, and
generate and print plots. Printer setup is also described.
ellalag ulul Farmal
PRO/II provides a variety of report options for streams, unit operations
and dimensional units. You can change the output format of a report for
any solved simulation without re-executing the simulation.
To define the output format:
Choose Output/Report Format from the menu bar. The Report For-
mat menu appears with options for Units of Measure, Miscellane-
ous Data, Stream Properties, and Unit Operations.
Figure 11-1: Report Format Menu
8aIIIng MIsraIIanaous aIa aporI pIIons
You can set the report dimensions, identify the data you want to include
and set the product stream scaling using the Miscellaneous Data option.
To set miscellaneous data options:
Choose the Option/Report Format/Miscellaneous Data from the
menu bar. The Miscellaneous Report Options window appears.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 11 Friitii aid F|cttii
11-1
Figure 11-2: Miscellaneous Report Options
8aIIIng FrodurI 8Iraam8raIIng
To change the scale stream flowrate:
Choose the Product Stream Scaling button from the Miscellane-
ous Report Options window. The Report Options - Product Stream
Scaling window appears.
Select the Scale Stream Flowrate checkbox.
Specify the stream to be scaled, the components to be scaled, and
the scaled flowrate.
Figure 11-3: Scale Stream Flowrate
Click OK twice to commit the changes and return to the PFD.
0|aptcr 11 Friitii aid F|cttii FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
11-?
8aIIIng 8IraamFroparIIas aporI pIIons
To set the stream properties report options:
Choose the Output/Report Format/Stream Properties menu item.
The Stream Property Report Options window appears (Figure
11-4).
Select the desired flowrate, fractions, or percent values for the
Standard Component Flowrate/Composition Report.
Click OK to commit the entries and return to the PFD.
Figure 11-4: Stream Property Report Options
8aIIIng nIIs oI Maasura aporI pIIons
In addition to the global, problem and unit level default units of
measure you set for input data, you can also set Problem Units of
Measure for output reports. You can change the output values for all the
fields by applying a different units of measure set or you can make indi-
vidual value adjustments.
To set units of measure for output reports:
Choose the Units of Measure menu item from the Report Format
menu. The Default Units of Measure for Problem Output Report
window appears.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 11 Friitii aid F|cttii
11-3
Figure 11-5: Default Units of Measure for Problem Output Report
Click Initialize from UOM Library to extract default values from
another set or replace the default values as necessary.
Optionally, click Standard Vapor Conditions to change the
vapor condition settings for this problem. The Problem Standard
Vapor Condition window appears.
Figure 11-6: Problem Standard Vapor Conditions
Specify the desired standard vapor conditions.
Click OK in the child windows to return to the PFD.
8aIIIng nII paraIIons aporI pIIons
You can set specific print options for each type of unit operation.
To set the unit operations report options:
Choose the Output/Report Format/Unit Operations menu item. The
Unit Operation Output Report Options window appears.
0|aptcr 11 Friitii aid F|cttii FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
11-4
Figure 11-7: Unit Operations Output Report Options
Select the desired unit operation.
Choose Print Options . The Column Print Options window
appears.
Figure 11-8: Column Print Options
Select the items you want to include in a Column Report.
Optionally, click Plot Column Results to set options for a plot.
The Column Plot Options window appears.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 11 Friitii aid F|cttii
11-5
Figure 11-9: Column Plot Options
Click OK in the child windows, then Close to commit the
entries and return to the PFD.
eaerallag a earl
You can generate a report to a file. Use the Define Format option to
define the format of the report.
To generate a report from an executed simulation:
Click on the Generate Reports icon on the toolbar, or choose
Output/Generate Reports from the menu bar.
As PRO/II generates the report, a window appears, displaying the status
of the report as it runs. Once the report has been generated, the default
editor window appears displaying the contents of the report.
PRO/II appends an .OUT extension to the current simulation name and
saves the file in the USER directory.
vlewlag a earl
To view a previously generated report of the current simulation:
Choose Output/View Report from the menu bar.
To view a previously generated report for any simulation:
Choose File/Open from the menu bar.
Select Report Files in the List Files of Type list box and choose the
desired file.
0|aptcr 11 Friitii aid F|cttii FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
11-6
Frlallag a earl
To print the report:
Print from your text editor while viewing the report, or
Choose File/Print from the menu bar.
Select Report in the Print drop-down list box in the Print window.
Click OK .
Flalllag
PRO/II generates and displays a variety of plots for input data and
tabulated results. The following plots can be generated:
G Input Data
G Assay stream analysis
G Output Results
G Distillation column profiles (temperature, flowrates,
composition, and separation factor)
G Zones analysis for simple and rigorous heat exchangers
G Phase envelopes
G Heating/Cooling curves
Plots can be displayed using PRO/IIs Plot Viewer or Microsoft Excel.
The section Setting Up the Plot Driver later in this chapter describes
how to select and configure the plot driver.
anaraIIng a FIoI
To generate an assay stream analysis plot, select the View Curve...
button on the Stream Assay Definition window. Three curves will be
generated:
G The actual user input distillation data
G The regressed TBP curve
G The component cuts generated.
To generate one of the output results that PRO/II supports:
Choose Output/Generate Plot from the menu bar. PRO/II displays
the Generate Plot window as shown in Figure 11-10.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 11 Friitii aid F|cttii
11-7
Figure 11-10: Generate Plot Window
By default, the Units for Selection list box displays all the unit opera-
tions in your flowsheet for which plots are available. If you check the
Selected Units option, only those units you previously selected on the
PFD for which plots are available will be shown.
When you select a unit operation in the Units for Selection list box, the
Available Plots list box displays all plots available for that unit. You
may select a plot then click on the Plot button to display the plot. If
the plot requires additional options to be chosen, the Plot button
will change to an Options button. Currently, additional data is
required only for Distillation Column Plots.
FIoIIIng a 6oIumn
To obtain a plot of vapor and liquid compositions:
Choose Vapor and Liquid Compositions, then choose Options
to open the Column Vapor and Liquid Composition Plot window.
Figure 11-11: Column Vapor and Liquid Composition Plot
Enter the additional data required.
Click the Plot button.
0|aptcr 11 Friitii aid F|cttii FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
11-8
8aIIIng p Iha FIoI rIvar
PRO/II can display plots using its internal Plot Viewer or Microsoft
Excel (through version 7).
The PRO/II Plot Viewer is a built-in utility that also prints plots.
Microsoft Excel provides a complete set of formatting features. With
Excel you can change plot colors, axis titles, and other attributes to
create a presentation-quality graph.
To select and configure the plot driver:
Choose Options/Plot Setup on the menu bar to open the Plot Setup
window.
Figure 11-12: Plot Setup Window
PRO/IIs installation procedure will set up the options in this window. Select
the desired plot driver using the list box. If you need to configure the
currently selected plot driver, press the Setup button to display the Setup
Plot Driver window. You cannot configure the PRO/II Plot Viewer (option
SIMSCI).
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 11 Friitii aid F|cttii
11-9
Figure 11-13: Setup Plot Driver Window
The configuration options are:
rIvar FIIa. The complete path and filename of the dynamic link library
(DLL) for the plot driver.
rIvar FunrIIon. The function name to invoke the driver.
6ommand LIna. The full command line to invoke the plotting application.
pIIons. Additional driver-specific options.
Tke Flal vlewer
PRO/IIs Plot Viewer utility lets you view a plot, print it, copy it to the
clipboard, and export its data to a file. Modifications of plot attributes
are not supported. If you want access to comprehensive editing and
formatting features for your plot, choose the Excel plot driver.
8avIng, 8andIng, aIr.
To save a plot:
Choose File/Save As from the Plot window menu.
Enter the desired plot file name and click OK .
You can send a plot from the Plot window to your plotter.
To send a plot to the plotter:
Choose File/Print from the Plot window menu.
To export a plot to an ASCII file:
Choose File/Export from the Plot window menu.
Select the file type (tab- or comma-delimited) and click OK .
To copy the plot image to the clipboard:
Choose Edit/Copy from the Plot window menu.
0|aptcr 11 Friitii aid F|cttii FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
11-10
5elllag u lke Frlaler
To set up the printer:
Choose File/Print Setup from the menu bar.
Select a printer.
Select paper orientation and size and click OK .
Frlallag a Flawskeel Layaul
To print a flowsheet diagram:
Choose File/Print from the menu bar.
Select the range of pages and click OK .
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 11 Friitii aid F|cttii
11-11
This page intentionally left blank.
0|aptcr 11 Friitii aid F|cttii FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
11-1?
6kaler 12
6uslamlzlag lke FF Warklace
This chapter surveys the customization of PFD appearance. You can
control unit and stream appearance, modify the stream property tables,
and set the font style used on your PFD.
6kaaglag uall 5lyle
You can specify a different icon, name, or label starting number for any
unit operation. These changes affect all unit operations that you subse-
quently place on the PFD.
6hangIng Iha nII Iron IobaIIy
To change the style of a unit globally:
Choose Options/Drawing Defaults/Unit Display from the menu
bar. The Unit Style window appears.
Figure 12-1: Unit Style Window for Classes of Units
Select the type of unit operation you want to change.
Enter your changes for the label format and starting number.
The text portion to the left of the % sign is the label displayed with
the unit number. The label may not contain spaces or underscores. The
integers following d are appended to the automatically applied
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 1? 00stcmizii t|c F|L Wcrkp|acc
1?-1
sequential unit numbers. You may also choose the starting number for
the particular unit. For example, if the Auto Label Format for the Flash
unit operation were FLASHUNIT%d05, subsequent Flashes placed
on the PFD would be labeled FLASHUNIT105, FLASHUNIT205,
FLASHUNIT305, and so forth.
You can also modify the type face and type size used in the stream label
as discussed below under the topic Changing the Default Font.
6hangIng Iha nII Iron Ior a 8IngIa nII
You can specify a different display icon for any unit operation currently
shown in your flowsheet. Some unit operations can be represented by
several different icons. This choice is particularly useful when different
variants of the same unit operation are being modeled.
hale: Any icon available can be assigned to a User-Added Subroutine.
To change the style of a single unit:
Right-click on the icon of the unit you wish to modify. The unit
menu appears.
Figure 12-2: Unit Menu
Select Display... from this menu (or select Edit/Display Style
from the menu bar) to open the Unit Style window for the selected
unit type as shown in Figure 12-3.
0|aptcr 1? 00stcmizii t|c F|L Wcrkp|acc FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
1?-?
Figure 12-3: Display Style Window
Select an alternative icon from the palette at the top of the window.
Choose OK to confirm the change.
You can also change the type face, type size and color of the unit label
by choosing Select to access a standard font editing window.
6hangIng Iha LabaI Ior a FarIIruIar nII
PRO/II automatically labels each unit you place it on the PFD. You can
change the label for each unit without altering the numbering sequence.
To change a unit label:
Double-click on the unit on the PFD.
Type over the existing Unit label in the data entry window.
Commit the change by pressing OK .
6kaaglag 5lream 5lyle
You can modify stream appearance by changing:
G The height and width of the arrows
G The fill of the arrows
G The segments on which the arrows appear
G The label format
G The starting number
G The stream label location
G The stream label border
G The label type (name or list of properties)
G The contents of the property list (material balance, gas report,
comparative molars rates, etc.).
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 1? 00stcmizii t|c F|L Wcrkp|acc
1?-3
To change the style of a stream:
Choose Options/Drawing Defaults/Stream Display from the
menu bar to open the Stream Style window.
Figure 12-4: Stream Style Window
By default, stream labels have rectangular borders and appear on the
stream line. (Optionally, you may select (1) diamond-shaped or circular
label borders, or, alternatively, no label border at all, and (2) the
position of the label relative to the stream.) Process stream arrows are
not filled and appear only on the horizontal segments of an orthogonal
process stream. You can change the appearance of the arrows and
where the arrows appear on the process stream.
Figure 12-5: Default Stream Style
0|aptcr 1? 00stcmizii t|c F|L Wcrkp|acc FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
1?-4
Figure 12-6: Modified Stream Style
6hangIng Iha LabaI Ior a FarIIruIar 8Iraam
PRO/II automatically labels each stream as it is placed on the PFD. You
can change the number or label for just one stream without altering the
ongoing numbering sequence.
To change a stream label:
Double-click on the stream to open the Stream Data window. Al-
ternatively, right-click on the stream and choose Data Entry.
Figure 12-7: Stream Data Entry Window
Enter the new stream name in the Stream entry field.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 1? 00stcmizii t|c F|L Wcrkp|acc
1?-5
IspIayIng 8IraamFroparIIas on 8IraamLabaIs
PRO/II allows you to display various stream properties on labels
attached to the streams on the PFD. Display options include:
G Selecting a global default property list for all stream labels in
the flowsheet
G Choosing from a group of predefined property lists
G Creating a custom stream label property list
G Positioning stream property labels anywhere on or beside the
streams on the PFD
G Choosing the type of border for any label
G Choosing a different font for any label
To Select a Global Default Steam Property:
Choose Options/Drawing Defaults/Stream Display from the
menu bar to open the Stream Style window.
From the Stream Label Type drop-down list choose the Properties
option.
Choose one of the predefined property lists and click OK to com-
mit your choice.
The property list that you have selected will appear on all streams
subsequently drawn on the PFD.
Creating a Customized Stream Property List
PRO/II allows you to create customized property lists for use in Stream
Property Tables. You can use the same property list in more than one
simulation. The default Stream Property Table is outlined by a single-
lined rectangular box. You may arrange the properties in any desired
order, and you may separate entries by single or double horizontal lines
to improve the legibility of the list.
To select a property list:
Choose Options/Stream Property Lists from the menu bar to dis-
play the Define Property List window (Figure 12-8).
0|aptcr 1? 00stcmizii t|c F|L Wcrkp|acc FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
1?-6
Figure 12-8: Define Property List Window
Select a list from the Property List box (Figure 12-9).
Figure 12-9: A Typical Property List
You can add or delete properties, modify the property description
and change the numerical format.
To create a property list:
Choose New from the Define Property List window. The New
List window appears.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 1? 00stcmizii t|c F|L Wcrkp|acc
1?-7
Figure 12-10: New List Window
Enter a name for the new list, or
Select the list from which you want to copy an existing property
list.
Choose OK to commit the entries.
To add one or more properties to a list:
Select the desired properties. (The usual Windows click, shift-click
and control-click selection options are supported.)
Choose Add-> .
The selected properties will be added to the bottom of the property list.
To change the order of the properties in a list:
Select the properties you want to move.
Use the Up , Down , Top , Bottom buttons to move the se-
lected properties.
To change the description or the format of a property:
Select the property you want to change.
Enter the new description and format in the entry fields under the
property list.
Commit the changes using the Replace button.
To delete a property from a list:
Select the properties you want to delete.
Choose Remove .
To clear (delete) all properties from a list:
Choose Clear .
To demarcate sections of a list:
Insert single or double horizontal lines where desired.
0|aptcr 1? 00stcmizii t|c F|L Wcrkp|acc FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
1?-8
FosIIIonIng 8IraamFroparIy LabaIs on Iha FF
You may place stream labels on, above, below or beside the streams on
the PFD. The labels may appear with or without stems connecting them
to the streams.
To position stream labels:
Choose Options/Drawing Defaults/Stream Display from the
menu bar.
Select the desired position from the Stream Label Location drop-
down list.
Click OK to commit your selection.
Alternatively, you may drag a stream label to any of these positions
from the PFD itself.
While in the Stream Styles window, you may also choose a text font and
a border style for the labels from the corresponding drop-down lists.
MaJllylag rawlag Frelereaces
Drawing preferences include settings for snap and move tolerances,
zoom and pan increments, the PFD palette icon, icon fill, unit snapping,
and delete confirmation.
To modify drawing preferences:
Choose Options/Drawing Defaults/General from the menu bar.
The General Drawing Defaults window appears with current settings.
The settings can be changed as desired.
5ecllylag a elaull Jllar
You can specify a default editor (such as Brief, Edit or Notepad) for use
with PRO/II to display output reports and keyword input files. Using
the editor, you can save any displayed text to a file or printer. The
default editor is the Programmers File Editor (pfe.exe).
To specify a default editor:
Choose Options/Editor from the menu bar to open the Set Text
Editor window.
Enter the full path name to the editor executable program file.
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc 0|aptcr 1? 00stcmizii t|c F|L Wcrkp|acc
1?-9
Figure 12-11: Set Text Editor
6kaaglag lke elaull Faal
The Default Font option enables you to set the default font, font style
and size used in PRO/IIs main and data entry windows. This option is
useful if the default font size for your system is too large for PRO/IIs
data entry windows.
Note that you cannot change the fonts for the title, menu, and status bar
text. Also, changing the font size will not change the size of PRO/IIs
windows.
To specify the default font:
Choose Options/Font from the menu bar to display the Font speci-
fication window.
Choose the desired font, font style, and size.
Figure 12-12: Font Window
0|aptcr 1? 00stcmizii t|c F|L Wcrkp|acc FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
1?-10
laJex
A
Align text 5-6
All objects
selecting 5-2
Assay
cutpoints and
characterization window 7-5
data, selecting 7-2,7-5
Assay data 1-10
AutoCAD
exporting to a .DXF file 3-13
8
Border handles 1-4
using 1-5
Bounding box
changing its size 6-4
moving 6-4
Breakpoint mode
turning off 10-7
Breakpoints 10-2
deleting 10-6
setting using a cursor 10-6
using 10-6
Breakpoints window 10-7
closing 10-7
Broyden 9-73
BVLE
See Unit operations
6
Calculation history
viewing 10-8
Calculation sequence 1-10,7-2
Calculator
intrinsic functions 9-8,9-9
See Unit operations
Calculator procedure
FORTRAN GOTO/IF/DO 9-11,9-12
FORTRAN STOP/RETURN 9-14
stream property storage 9-10
Cancel
connection 4-16
selection 5-3
unit placement 4-13
Change
bounding box size 6-4
connection 4-16
delete confirmation 4-10
flowsheet layout 4-18
object size 5-3
product stream scaling 11-2
single stream label 12-5
single unit label 12-3
standard vapor condition 11-4
unit icon 12-2
unit size 5-3
unit style 12-1
unit styles globally 12-1
window position 1-5
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc Iidcx
I-11
Change PFD image size
using Pan View
window bounding box 6-4
Change PRO/II window size 1-5
Clipboard
copying a stream property table 3-13
copying stream data 8-31
copying the PFD 3-12
Close
breakpoints 10-7
Close simulation 3-4
Color coding cues 1-6
Column plot options window 11-6
Column print options window 11-5
Component properties 1-10,7-2
Component selection 1-10,7-2,7-3
Component selection window 7-3
Compressor
See Unit operations
Connection
canceling 4-16
changing 4-16
drawing 4-16
Control menu 1-4
Controller
Unit operations 1-1
Converting
flowsheet to PRO/II keyword file 3-12
Copy
simulation 3-5
Copy file selector 3-5
Create units of measure set window 4-6
Customizing Data Entry windows
See User-added Unit Operations

Data entry window buttons 1-10


Default editor
specifying 12-9
Default fonts
setting 12-10
Default Levels 4-1
Default unit specification tolerances window
4-11
Define
output report format 11-1
scope of simulation 7-1
Define format submenu 11-1
Define Property List window 12-7
Delete
simulation 3-4
unit 4-13
Delete confirmation
turning off 4-10
Deleting
breakpoints 10-6
Depressuring unit
See Unit operations
Deselecting objects 5-3
Display
Pan View window 6-4
Distillation column
See Unit operations
Draw
connections 4-16
freehand objects 4-20
Iidcx FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
I-1?
incoming streams 4-15
outgoing streams 4-16
polylines 4-21
squares 4-22
streams 4-15,4-16
Draw text window 4-20
Drawing freehand objects 4-20
Drawing preferences
modifying 12-9
Dsipalying the complete flowsheet
See Zoom full

Edit
text 5-6
Editor
specifying default 12-9
Electrolyte version 9-157
column algorithm (ELDIST) 9-158
thermodynamic models 9-157
Enter
flowsheet tolerances 4-11
text 4-20
Existing simulation files
opening 3-2
Expander
See Unit operations
Exporting
See AutoCAD
flowsheet 3-12
PRO/II keyword files 3-10
stream property table data 3-12
F
Fill from structure 8-7
Flash
See Unit operations
Flip
selected objects 5-6
unit icon 5-6
Flowsheet
exporting 3-12
redrawing 6-3
Flowsheet layout
changing its shape 4-18
printing 11-11
Flowsheet optimizer
See Unit operations
Flowsheet tolerances
entering 4-11
Fonts
setting default 12-10
Freehand objects
drawing 4-20

General Drawing Defaults window 4-10


Generate
plot 11-7
reports 11-6
Gibbs reactor
See Unit operations
Global defaults 4-1
problem description 4-1
thermodynamic systems 4-9
units of measure sets 4-3
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc Iidcx
I-13
Global defaults thermodynamic system
window 4-9
Global units of measure sets window 4-3
gnuplot
See Plot
Go To buttons 1-11
Go To stream 4-18
Go To Stream 1-11
Go To unit 4-18
Go To Unit 1-11
Goto 10-2
setting current unit for execution 10-6
using Run palette 10-6
Grid snapping 4-13
turning off 4-13
Group of Objects
selecting 5-2
h
Heating/cooling curves
See Unit operations
Help for an item
See What Is?
Hide
Pan View window 6-4
Horizontal Scroll Bar 1-4
l
Icon
flipping 5-6
rotating 5-6
Icon style window 12-1
Importing
PRO/II keyword file 3-7
unsupported features 3-8
Incoming streams
drawing 4-15
L
Large pan 6-5
Liquid-liquid extraction column
See Unit operations
LNG heat exchanger
See Unit operations
Locating a unit or stream on the PFD 4-18
M
Maintain stream property lists 12-6
Maximize/Restore buttons 1-4
Menu bar 1-4
Menus
using 1-6
Microsoft Excel
See Plot
Minimize button 1-4
Minimize/Maximize buttons
using 1-5
Miscellaneous data
setting report options 11-1
Miscellaneous report options window 11-2
Mixer
See Unit operations
Move
selected objects 5-5
streams 4-17
Move tolerance
setting 5-5
MS Excel
See Spreadsheets
Iidcx FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
I-14
MS Word
See Word processors
Multiple objects
selecting 5-1
Multiple unit icons
placing 4-13
h
New list window 12-8
New simulation
opening 3-1

Object size
changing 5-3
Objects
deselecting 5-3
drawing freehand 4-20
flipping 5-6
moving 5-5
rearranging 5-5
resizing 5-3
rotating 5-5
selecting 5-1
selecting all 5-2
selecting group 5-2
Open
existing simulation 3-2
new simulation 3-1
Open simulation window 3-2
Operating modes 1-9
Orthogonal polylines 4-21
Outgoing streams
drawing 4-16
Output format
defining 11-1
F
Palettes
PFD 4-12
Run 1-9
Pan
large 6-5
Up/Down/Left/Right 6-5
Pan View window 6-4
bounding box 6-4
displaying and hiding 6-4
panning with 6-4
Panning 6-3
using menu options 6-5
using the Pan View window 6-4
Panning sensitivity
setting 6-5
PFD 1-4,1-13,3-1
scrolling 6-1
Place
multiple unit icons 4-13
selected unit 4-12
Plot
generating 11-7
Microsoft Excel 11-9
output results 11-7
viewer 11-9
Polylines
drawing 4-21
Ports
color changes 4-16
connecting 4-16
Print
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc Iidcx
I-15
flowsheet layout 11-11
Printer setup 11-11
PRO/II icon 1-1
PRO/II keyword file
importing 3-7
PRO/II main window
components 1-4
manipulate 1-5
PRO/II menus 1-6
Problem
defining scope 7-1
Problem default units of measure
sets 4-4
window 4-4
Problem defaults units of measure 4-1
Problem description 1-10,7-2
setting global defaults 4-1
Problem standard vapor
conditions window 11-4
Problem units of measure
set output report 11-4
Procedure data
predefined variables 9-107
Product stream scaling
changing 11-2

Reaction data 1-10,7-2


See Unit operations
Rearrange
objects 5-5
Recycle options 1-10,7-2
Redraw 1-12
simulation 6-3
Reference Manual
See Online Reference Manual
Relabel
specific unit 4-14
stream 4-17
Report
generating 11-6
viewing 11-6
Report format
defining 11-1
Report options
miscellaneous data 11-1
unit operations 11-4
units of measure 11-3
Re-route
streams 4-17
Resize
object 5-3
Resize PRO/II window 1-5
Restore
unit icon size 5-5
Results
viewing 10-8
Rotate
selected objects 5-5
unit icon 5-6
Run 10-2
displaying palette 1-9
simulation 10-4
Run palette
using 10-1
Run-only mode
See Also Unsupported Features
Iidcx FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
I-16
5
Save
current simulation 3-2
simulation to another name 3-3
Save As dialog box 3-3
Scale stream flowrate window 11-2
Scroll bar
Horizontal 1-4
Vertical 1-4
Scrolling
PRO/II main window 6-1
Scrolling increments
setting 6-1
Select
all objects 5-2
components 7-3
group of objects 5-2
multiple objects 5-1
objects 5-1
thermodynamic methods 7-4
unit from palette 4-12
Selected objects
moving 5-5
Selection
undoing 5-3
Set
breakpoints 10-6
default font 12-10
move tolerance 5-5
panning sensitivity 6-5
scrolling increments 6-1
zoom increment 6-2
Set report options
miscellaneous data 11-1
unit operations 11-4
units of measure 11-3
Set text editor window 12-10
Setup printer 11-11
SIMSCI Add-on units 9-160
RESET 9-162
SIMSCI Add-on Units
BLEND 9-161
component property reporter 9-161
polymer CSTR 9-160
Profimatics reactors 9-162
SIMSCIs plot viewer 11-9
Simulation
closing 3-4
copying 3-5
deleting 3-4
open existing 3-2
opening new 3-1
redrawing 6-3
running 10-4
saving 3-2
saving to another name 3-3
step through execution 10-5
stop execution 10-5
Simulation defaults
units of measure sets 4-4
Simulation preferences
setting 4-1
Simulation scope
defining 7-1
Single stream label
changing 12-5
Snapping 4-13
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc Iidcx
I-17
Specifying
default editor 12-9
Spreadsheets 3-12
Squares
drawing 4-22
Standard Vapor Condition
changing 11-4
Starting PRO/II 1-1
Status
unsupported featues 3-9
Status bar 1-4
Step 10-2
Step through simulation 10-5
Stop 10-2
simulation execution 10-5
Stream
relabeling 4-17
searching for 4-18
Stream calculator
See Unit operations
Stream label
changing 12-5
Stream property list
maintaining 12-6
Stream Property Report
Options window 11-3
Stream style window 12-4
Streams
drawing 4-16
going to 4-18
moving 4-17
re-route 4-17
selecting multiple 5-1
Streams data entry window 8-23,12-5
Streams Mode 4-15
Streams/Unit Palette 4-12
T
Text
aligning 5-6
editing 5-6
entering 4-20
Thermodynamic data 1-10,7-2
Thermodynamic data window 7-4
Thermodynamic methods
selecting 7-4
Thermodynamic systems
global defaults 4-9
Title bar 1-4
Tool buttons 1-12
Toolbar 1-4
PFD 1-9
standard toolbar 12-9
Toolbar buttons 1-9
Turn off
breakpoint mode 10-7
delete confirmation 4-10
grid snapping 4-13
u
Undo
selection 5-3
unit placement 4-13
Unit
deleting 4-13
going to 4-18
relabeling 4-14
searching for 4-18
Iidcx FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
I-18
Unit Data Entry window 4-14
Unit icon
changing 12-2
Unit label
changing 12-3
Unit operation output
report options window 11-5
Unit operations
Boiling pot reactor 9-120
BVLE 8-43
Calculator 9-2
Compressor 9-42
Continuous stirred tank reactor 9-120
Controller 9-46
Conversion reactor 9-123
Depressuring unit 9-57
Distillation column 9-19
Equilibrium reactor 9-122
Expander 9-63
Flowsheet optimizer 9-70
Gibbs reactor 9-121
Heating/cooling curves 9-89
Mixer 9-93
Multivariable controller 9-94
Phase envelope 9-97
Plug flow reactor 9-120
Pump 9-113
Reaction data 9-114
Reactor 9-118
setting report options 11-4
SPEC/VARY/DEFINE 9-135
Splitter 9-130
User-added unit operations 9-151
Valve 9-163
Unit Operations
Stream calculator 9-132
Unit placement
undoing 4-13
Unit size
changing 5-3
restoring 5-5
Unit specification tolerances
entering 4-11
Unit style
changing 12-1
Units
connecting 4-16
selecting from palette 4-12
selecting multiple 5-1
Units of measure 1-10,7-2
setting report options 11-3
Units of measure library window 4-6
Units of measure sets
global defaults 4-3
problem defaults 4-4
User-added transport methods 8-19
User-added unit operation
creating custom windows 9-153
User-added unit operation window 9-154
User-defined components 2-4
v
Vertical scroll bar 1-4
View
calculation history 10-8
report 11-6
View buttons 1-12
View convergence 10-2,10-8
FFU/II Lscr's S0idc Iidcx
I-19
View different area in PFD main window
using Pan View window
bounding box 6-4
View results 10-2,10-8
W
Welcome window 1-1
What Is? 1-13
Word processors 3-12
Z
Zoom area 1-12,6-2
Zoom full 1-12,6-2
Zoom increment
setting 6-2
Zooming 6-1
Iidcx FFU/II Lscr's S0idc
I-?0

Das könnte Ihnen auch gefallen